Table of Contents
Quick task index
1.
Preparing the camera and flow of
operations
2. Shooting using the viewfinder
3. Shooting using live view
4. Viewing photographs and movies
5. Basic operations
6. Using shooting options
7. Menu functions
8. Printing pictures
9.
Connecting the camera to a
computer and a smartphone
10. Battery, battery charger, and card
11. Interchangeable lenses
12. Using separately sold accessories
13. Information
14. SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Thank you for purchasing an Olympus digital camera. Before you start to use your new camera,
please read these instructions carefully to enjoy optimum performance and a longer service life.
Keep this manual in a safe place for future reference.
We recommend that you take test shots to get accustomed to your camera before taking important
photographs.
The screen and camera illustrations shown in this manual were produced during the development
stages and may differ from the actual product.
The contents in this manual are based on firmware version 1.0 for this camera. If there are
additions and/or modifications of functions due to firmware update for the camera, the contents will
differ. For the latest information, please visit the Olympus website.
Instruction Manual
DIGITAL CAMERA
2
EN
This notice concerns the supplied fl ash unit and is chiefl y directed to users in
North America.
Information for Your Safety
IMPORTANT SAFETY
INSTRUCTIONS
When using your photographic equipment, basic safety precautions should always be
followed, including the following:
• Read and understand all instructions before using.
• Close supervision is necessary when any fl ash is used by or near children. Do not leave
fl ash unattended while in use.
• Care must be taken as burns can occur from touching hot parts.
• Do not operate if the fl ash has been dropped or damaged - until it has been examined by
qualifi ed service personnel.
• Let fl ash cool completely before putting away.
• To reduce the risk of electric shock, do not immerse this fl ash in water or other liquids.
• To reduce the risk of electric shock, do not disassemble this fl ash, but take it to qualifi ed
service personnel when service or repair work is required. Incorrect reassembly can
cause electric shock when the fl ash is used subsequently.
• The use of an accessory attachment not recommended by the manufacturer may cause a
risk of fi re, electric shock, or injury to persons.
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS
Indications used in this manual
The following symbols are used throughout this manual.
#
Cautions
Important information on factors which may lead to a malfunction
or operational problems. Also warns of operations that should be
absolutely avoided.
$
Notes
Points to note when using the camera.
%
Tips
Useful information and hints that will help you get the most out of
your camera.
g
Reference pages describing details or related information.
3
EN
Table of Contents
Quick task index 7
Unpack the box contents .............9
Preparing the camera and
fl ow of operations 10
Names of parts ...........................10
Charging and inserting the
battery .........................................12
Inserting and removing cards ...13
Attaching a lens to the
camera ......................................... 14
Attaching the fl ash unit .............15
Power on .....................................16
Setting the date/time ..................17
Setting the shooting mode ........18
Selecting a shooting method ....19
Shooting using the
viewfi nder 20
Shooting ...................................... 20
Shooting still pictures................20
Recording movies .....................22
Setting shooting functions ........23
Using the Multi-function
button........................................23
Using the super control panel ...24
Shooting using live view 25
Shooting ...................................... 25
Shooting still pictures................25
Recording movies .....................26
Using the touch screen ..............27
Selecting a focusing method ....27
Using the wireless LAN
function .....................................27
Setting shooting functions ........28
Using live guides ......................28
Using live control .......................30
Viewing photographs and
movies 31
Viewing photographs and
movies .........................................31
Index display/Calendar
display ......................................31
Viewing still images ..................32
Watching movies ......................32
Volume......................................32
Protecting images .....................32
Erasing images .........................33
Selecting images ......................33
Using the touch screen ..............34
Selecting and protecting
images ......................................34
Basic operations 35
Information displays while
shooting ......................................35
Viewfi nder display when shooting
using the viewfi nder ..................35
Monitor display when shooting
using live view ..........................36
Switching the information
display ......................................37
Using the shooting modes ........38
“Point-and-shoot” photography
(P program mode) ....................38
Choosing aperture
(A aperture-priority mode) .......39
Choosing shutter speed
(S shutter-priority mode) ..........40
Choosing aperture and shutter
speed (M manual mode) ..........41
Table of Contents
4
EN
Table of Contents
Using movie mode
(n) ............ 42
Adding effects to a movie
[Movie Effect] ............................42
Using art fi lters..........................44
Shooting in scene mode ...........45
Using PHOTO STORY .............47
Commonly used shooting
options ........................................49
Controlling exposure
(exposure compensation) .........49
Changing the brightness of
highlights and shadows ............49
Locking the exposure
(AE Lock) ..................................49
Using a fl ash
(fl ash photography)...................50
Choosing a focus target
(AF Area) ..................................52
Setting the AF target .................52
Face priority AF/pupil detection
AF .............................................53
Zoom frame AF/zoom AF..........54
Sequential shooting/using the
self timer ...................................55
Adjusting color
(white balance) .........................56
ISO sensitivity ...........................57
Controlling color
(Color Creator)..........................58
HDR photography .....................59
Information display during
playback ......................................60
Playback image information .....60
Switching the information
display ......................................60
Changing the playback
information display method.......61
Sharing images over Wi-Fi
connection (Share Order) .........62
Manipulating playback
images ......................................63
Using shooting options 66
Reducing camera shake
(image stabilizer) ......................66
Processing options
(picture mode) ..........................68
Adding effects to a movie .........69
Setting the image aspect ..........69
Image quality (record mode).....70
Adjusting fl ash output
(fl ash intensity control)..............71
Choosing how the camera
measures brightness
(metering) .................................72
Choosing a focus mode
(AF mode).................................73
Movie sound options (recording
sound with movies) ...................74
Menu functions 75
Basic menu operations ..............75
Using Shooting Menu 1/
Shooting Menu 2 ........................76
Formatting the card
(Card Setup) .............................76
Restoring default settings
(Reset/Myset) ...........................77
Processing options
(Picture Mode) ..........................78
Image quality (K) ...................79
Setting the self timer (j/Y) ...79
Varying settings over a series
of photographs (bracketing)......80
Recording multiple exposures
in a single image (multiple
exposure)..................................82
Shooting automatically with
a fi xed interval (time lapse
shooting) ................................... 83
Wireless remote control fl ash
photography..............................84
Digital Zoom
(Digital Tele-converter) .............84
HDR photography .....................84
5
EN
Table of Contents
Using the playback menu ..........85
Displaying images rotated
(R) .......................................... 85
Editing still images ....................85
Canceling all protections ..........87
Using the Smartphone
connection option (Connection
to Smartphone) .........................87
Using the setup menu ................88
X (Date/time setting) ...............88
W (Changing the display
language)..................................88
i (Monitor brightness
adjustment) ............................... 88
Rec View ..................................88
Wi-Fi Settings ...........................88
c/# Menu Display ..................88
Firmware...................................88
Setting up a wireless LAN
connection (Wi-Fi Settings) ......89
Using the custom menus ...........90
R AF/MF ..................................90
S Button/Dial/Lever .................91
T Release/j .........................91
U Disp/8/PC ..........................92
V Exp/p/ISO ..........................93
W # Custom ............................94
X K/Color/WB ....................... 95
Y Record/Erase .......................96
Z Movie ...................................97
b Built-In EVF ..........................97
k
K Utility ..............................98
AEL/AFL ...................................98
MF Assist ..................................99
Button Function ........................99
t Lever Function .................101
Viewing camera images on
TV ...........................................101
Choosing the control panel
displays (KControl
Settings) .................................103
Adding information displays
(G/Info Settings) ...................105
Shutter speeds when the fl ash
fi res automatically [# X-Sync.]
[# Slow Limit].........................106
AF focus adjustments .............107
Using the accessory port
menus ........................................ 108
Before using the accessory port
menus ..................................... 108
Using OLYMPUS PENPAL .....109
A OLYMPUS PENPAL
Share ...................................... 110
B OLYMPUS PENPAL
Album ..................................... 111
C Electronic Viewfi nder ......... 111
Printing pictures 112
Print reservation (DPOF) .........112
Creating a print order..............112
Removing all or selected
pictures from the print order ...112
Direct printing (PictBridge) .....113
Easy printing ...........................114
Custom printing ......................114
Connecting the camera to a
computer and a smartphone
116
Installing the PC software .......116
Copying pictures to a computer
without OLYMPUS Viewer 3 .....118
Using the camera wireless
LAN function .............................119
Things you can do with
OI.Share .....................................121
6
EN
Table of Contents
Battery, battery charger, and
card 122
Battery and charger .................122
Using an optional AC adapter
....122
Using your charger abroad .....122
Usable cards .............................123
Record mode and fi le size/
number of storable still
pictures .....................................124
Interchangeable lenses 125
M.ZUIKO DIGITAL lens
specifi cations ..........................125
Using separately sold
accessories 129
Power Battery Holder
(HLD-7) ......................................129
External fl ash units designated
for use with this camera ..........130
Wireless remote control fl ash
photography............................131
Other external fl ash units ........132
Principal Accessories ..............133
System chart .............................134
Information 136
Shooting tips and
information ................................136
Error codes ...............................138
Cleaning and storing the
camera ....................................... 140
Cleaning the camera ..............140
Storage ...................................140
Cleaning and checking the
image pickup device ...............140
Pixel Mapping - Checking the
image processing functions ....141
Menu directory ..........................142
Specifi cations ...........................148
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 151
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ..........151
Index 161
7
EN
Quick task index
Shooting
g
Taking pictures with automatic settings
iAUTO (A)
18
Easy photography with special effects
Art fi lter (ART)44
Choosing an aspect ratio
Aspect ratio 69
Quickly matching settings to the scene
Scene mode (SCN)45
Pro-level photography made simple
Live Guide 28
Adjusting the brightness of a photograph
Exposure compensation 49
Taking pictures with a blurred background
Live Guide 28
Aperture priority shooting 39
Taking pictures that stop the subject in
motion or convey a sense of motion
Live Guide 28
Shutter priority shooting 40
Taking pictures with the correct color
White balance 56
One-touch white balance 57
Processing pictures to match the subject/
Taking monotone pictures
Picture Mode 68
Art fi lter (ART)44
When the camera will not focus on your
subject/Focusing on one area
Using the touch screen 27
AF Area 52
Zoom frame AF/zoom AF 54
Focusing on a small spot in the frame/
confi rming focus before shooting
Zoom frame AF/zoom AF 54
Recomposing photographs after focusing
C-AF+TR (AF tracking) 73
Turning off the beep speaker
8 (Beep sound)
93
Taking photos without the fl ash
ISO/DIS Mode 57/45
Reducing camera shake
Image Stabilizer 66
Anti-Shock z
94
Self-timer 55
Remote cable 133
Taking pictures of a subject against
backlight
Flash shooting 50
Gradation (Picture Mode) 78
Photographing fi reworks
Bulb/time photography 41
Scene mode (SCN)45
Reducing image noise (mottling)
Noise Reduct. 93
Taking pictures without white subjects
appearing too white or black subjects
appearing too dark
Gradation (Picture Mode) 78
Histogram/
Exposure compensation
37/49
Highlight&Shadow Control 49
Optimizing the monitor/
adjusting monitor hue
Monitor brightness
adjustment
88
Live View Boost 92
Quick task index
8
EN
Quick task index
Checking set effect before taking a
picture
Preview function 100
Test Picture 100
Checking horizontal or vertical orientation
before shooting
Level gauge 37
Shooting with deliberate composition
Displayed Grid 92
Zooming in on photos to check focus
Autoq (Rec View)
88
Self-portraits
Self-timer 55
Sequential shooting
Sequential shooting 55
Extending the useful life of the battery
Sleep 93
Increasing the number of pictures that
can be taken
Record mode 70
Playback/Retouch
g
Viewing images on a TV
HDMI/Video Out 92
Playback on TV 101
Viewing slideshows with background
music
Slideshow 65
Brightening shadows
Shadow Adj (JPEG Edit) 86
Dealing with red-eye
Redeye Fix (JPEG Edit) 86
Printing made easy
Direct printing 113
Commercial prints
Creating a print order 112
Simple photo sharing
Share Order 62
Using the camera wireless
LAN function
119
OLYMPUS PENPAL 109
Connection to Smartphone 87
Camera Settings
g
Restoring default settings Reset 77
Saving the settings
Myset 77
Changing the menu display language
W
88
9
EN
Unpack the box contents
Unpack the box contents
The following items are included with the camera.
If anything is missing or damaged, contact the dealer from whom you purchased the
camera.
Camera Body cap Strap USB cable
CB-USB6
• Flash case
• Computer software CD-ROM
• Instruction manual
• Warranty card
Flash
FL-LM2
Lithium ion battery
BLN-1
Lithium ion charger
BCN-1
Attaching the strap
1
Thread the strap in the direction of the arrows.
4
3
2
1
2
Lastly, pull the strap tight making sure that it is fastened securely.
5
• Attach the other end of the strap to the other eyelet in the same way.
10
EN
Preparing the camera and fl ow of operations
1
1
Names of parts
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
a
b
c
d
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
n
o
m
e
1 Mode dial lock .................................P. 18
2 Rear dial*
1
(o)
.......................P. 23, 38 – 41, 56, 58, 105
3 Fn2 button ................................P. 23, 49
4 H/R (Movie) button ........P. 33/P. 22, 99
5 Front dial*
1
(r) .................P. 31, 38 – 41
6 Shutter button .................................P. 21
7 Self-timer lamp/AF illuminator
...............................................P. 55/P. 91
8 Lens attachment mark ....................P. 14
9 Y (One-touch white balance) button
........................................................P. 57
0 Z (Preview) button .........................P. 39
a Mount (Remove the body cap before
attaching the lens.)
b Mode dial ........................................P. 18
c Stereo microphone .............P. 64, 74, 87
d ON/OFF lever ................................P. 16
e AFm (AF/Metering mode) button
(#/w settings*
2
) ..........P. 50, 71, 72, 73
f jYHDR (Sequential shooting/Self-
timer/HDR) button
(Bracket settings*
2
) .............P. 55, 37, 80
g External fl ash connector ...............P. 132
h Microphone connector cover
i Strap eyelet.......................................P. 9
j Connector cover
k Lens release button ........................P. 14
l Lens lock pin
m Microphone connector (Third-party
commercial microphones can be used.
l3.5 stereo mini-plug)
n HDMI connector (Type D) .............P. 101
o Multi-connector .............P. 101, 113, 116
*
1
In this manual, the r and o icons represent operations performed using the front dial
and rear dial.
*
2
When the lever is set to 2
Preparing the camera and fl ow of
operations
11
EN
Preparing the camera and fl ow of operations
1
1
7
5
4
8
0
9
a
f
b
c
e
d
g
h
6
3
2
i
j
k
l
m
n
1 Accessory port ..............................P. 108
2 Diopter adjustment dial ...................P. 20
3 u (LV) button ..............................P. 19
4 Monitor (Touch screen)
................................P. 16, 27, 34, 36, 60
5 Viewfi nder ..........................P. 19, 20, 39
6 Eye sensor
7 Eyecup ..........................................P. 133
8 Hot shoe .......................................P. 130
9 AEL/AFL button..................P. 32, 49, 98
0 Lever ..................................P. 38 – 41, 91
a INFO button .............................P. 37, 60
b Fn1 button ......................................P. 52
c Q button ..................................P. 30, 75
d Arrow pad* ......................................P. 31
e MENU button .................................P. 75
f q (Playback) button ................P. 31, 61
g Speaker
h (Erase) button ............................P. 33
i Tripod socket
j PBH cover.....................................P. 129
k Battery compartment cover.............P. 12
l Battery compartment lock ...............P. 12
m Card slot cover................................P. 13
n Card slot .........................................P. 13
* In this manual, the FGHI icons represent operations performed using the arrow
pad.
12
EN
Preparing the camera and fl ow of operations
1
Charging and inserting the battery
1
Charging the battery.
Charging indicator
BCN-1
Charging in
progress
Lights orange
Charging
complete
Off
Charging error
Blinks orange
(Charging time: Up to
approximately 4 hours)
1
2
3
AC wall outlet
AC cable
Lithium ion battery
Lithium ion charger
Direction indicating mark ()
Charging indicator
# Cautions
• Unplug the charger when
charging is complete.
2
Loading the battery.
3
2
1
Battery
compartment
lock
Battery
compartment cover
Direction
indicating
mark
3
Closing the battery cover.
Removing the battery
Turn off the camera before opening or closing the
battery compartment cover. To remove the battery, fi rst
push the battery lock knob in the direction of the arrow
and then remove.
# Cautions
• Contact an authorized distributor or service center if you are unable to remove the
battery. Do not use force.
$ Notes
• It is recommended to set aside a backup battery for prolonged shooting in case the
battery in use drains.
• Also read “Battery, battery charger, and card” (P. 122).
13
EN
Preparing the camera and fl ow of operations
1
Inserting and removing cards
1
Loading the card.
• Open the card slot cover.
• Slide the card in until it is locked into place.
g “Usable cards” (P. 123)
# Cautions
• Turn off the camera before loading or
removing the card.
3
2
1
2
Closing the card slot cover.
• Close fi rmly until you hear a click.
# Cautions
• Be sure the card slot cover is closed before using the camera.
Removing the card
Press the inserted card lightly and it will be ejected.
Pull out the card.
# Cautions
• Do not remove the battery or card while the card
write indicator (P. 36) is displayed.
Eye-Fi Cards
Read “Usable cards” (P. 123) before use.
14
EN
Preparing the camera and fl ow of operations
1
Attaching a lens to the camera
1
Attach a lens to the camera.
1
2
Rear cap
2
1
• Align the lens attachment mark (red) on the camera with the alignment mark (red) on
the lens, then insert the lens into the camera’s body.
• Rotate the lens in the direction indicated by the arrow until you hear it clicks.
# Cautions
• Make sure the camera is turned off.
• Do not press the lens release button.
• Do not touch internal portions of the camera.
2
Remove the lens cap.
2
1
1
Using lenses with an UNLOCK switch
Retractable lenses with an UNLOCK switch cannot
be used while retracted. Turn the zoom ring in the
direction of arrow (
1
) to extend the lens (
2
).
To store, turn the zoom ring in the direction of arrow
(
4
) while sliding the UNLOCK switch (
3
).
4
1
2
3
Removing the lens from the camera
While pressing the lens release button, rotate the
lens in the direction of the arrow.
2
1
Lens release button
Interchangeable lenses
Read “Interchangeable lenses” (P. 125).
15
EN
Preparing the camera and fl ow of operations
1
Attaching the fl ash unit
1
Remove the terminal cover from the fl ash unit and attach the fl ash to the
camera.
• Slide the fl ash unit all the way in, stopping when it contacts the back of the shoe and
is securely in place.
2
3
1
2
1
UNLOCK switch
2
To use the fl ash, raise the fl ash head.
• Lower the fl ash head when the fl ash is not in use.
# Cautions
• When not using the accessory port, be sure to attach the cover.
Removing the Flash Unit
Press the UNLOCK switch while removing the fl ash
unit.
2
1
UNLOCK switch
16
EN
Preparing the camera and fl ow of operations
1
Power on
1
Move the ON/OFF lever to the ON position to turn on the camera.
• When the camera is turned on, the monitor will turn on.
• To turn off the camera, return the lever to the OFF position.
ON/OFF lever
Monitor
Battery level
; (green): Camera ready to shoot.
: (green): Low battery
] (blinks red): Charge the battery.
250250 F5.6
i
NORM
ISO
AUTO
AUTO
WB
AUTO
4:3
01:02:0301:02:03
10231023
RR
Wi-Fi
2013.10.01 12:30
Using the monitor
2
1
You can adjust the angle of the monitor.
Camera sleep operation
If no operations are performed for a minute, the camera enters “sleep” (stand-by) mode to
turn off the monitor and to cancel all actions. The camera activates again when you touch
any button (the shutter button, q button, etc.). The camera will turn off automatically if
left in sleep mode for 4 hours. Turn the camera on again before use.
17
EN
Preparing the camera and fl ow of operations
1
Setting the date/time
Date and time information is recorded on the card together with the images. The fi le
name is also included with the date and time information. Be sure to set the correct
date and time before using the camera.
1
Display the menus.
• Press the MENU button to display the menus.
MENU button
h
4:3
D
1
2
Shooting Menu 1
Card Setup
Reset/Myset
Picture Mode
Image Aspect
Back
Set
Digital Tele-converter Off
2
Select [X] in the [d] (setup) tab.
• Use FG on the arrow pad to select
[d] and press I.
• Select [X] and press I.
--.--.-- --:--X
W
j
±0
k
±0
2
1
Setup Menu
English
0.5sec
Wi-Fi Settings
c
/
#
Menu Display
Firmware
Rec View
Back
Set
[d] tab
3
Set the date and time.
• Use HI to select items.
• Use FG to change the selected item.
• Use FG to select the date format.
X
2013
YMDTime
Cancel
Y/M/D
The time is displayed using a
24-hour clock.
4
Save settings and exit.
• Press Q to set the camera clock and exit to the main menu.
• Press the MENU button to exit the menus.
18
EN
Preparing the camera and fl ow of operations
1
Setting the shooting mode
Use the mode dial to select the shooting mode.
A
A full auto mode in which the camera automatically optimizes settings for the
current scene. The camera does all the work, which is convenient for beginners.
P
Aperture and shutter speed are automatically adjusted for optimal results.
A
You control aperture. You can sharpen or soften background details.
S
You control shutter speed. You can express the motion of moving subjects, or
freeze motion without any blur.
M
You control aperture and shutter speed. You can shoot with long exposures for
fi reworks or other dark scenes.
ART
Select an art fi lter.
SCN
Select a scene according to the subject.
J
You can shoot a PHOTO STORY. Shoot with selected PHOTO STORY type.
n
Shoot movies using shutter speed and aperture effects and movie special effects.
First, try taking photographs in full auto mode.
1
Press the mode dial lock to release the lock and set the mode dial to A.
• When the mode dial lock has been pressed down, the mode dial is locked. Each time
you press the mode dial lock, it switches between locked/released.
Mode dial lock
Monitor
250250 F5.6
i
NORM
ISO
AUTO
AUTO
WB
AUTO
4:3
01:02:0301:02:03
10231023
RR
Wi-Fi
2013.10.01 12:30
Number of
storable still
pictures
Available
recording
time
ISO
sensitivity
Shutter speed Aperture value
Indicator Mode icon
19
EN
Preparing the camera and fl ow of operations
1
Selecting a shooting method
With this camera, you can select between two shooting methods: Shooting using the
viewfi nder and shooting using live view with the monitor. Press the u button to switch
between shooting methods.
In addition, you can set various shooting functions using the super control panel, live
control, and LV super control panel, depending on the shooting method.
Shooting using the
viewfi nder
Monitor
Lights up when you move
your eye away from the
viewfi nder.
250250 F5.6
i
NORM
ISO
AUTO
AUTO
WB
AUTO
4:3
01:02:0301:02:03
10231023
2013.10.01 12:30
RR
Wi-Fi
0.00.0
Super control panel
Q
Cursor
250250 F5.6
i
NORM
ISO
AUTO
AUTO
WB
AUTO
4:3
01:02:0301:02:03
10231023
ISO
When setting shooting
functions, if you press the
Q button, a cursor will
appear on the super control
panel. Touch the function
you want to set.
250250 F5.6
i
NORM
ISO
AUTO
AUTO
WB
AUTO
4:3
01:02:0301:02:03
10231023
WB
Shooting using live view
Monitor
250250 F5.6
01:02:0301:02:03
3838
L
N
ISO-A
200
Wi-Fi
j
0.00.0
FullHD
F
S-IS AUTOS-IS AUTO
Live view display
Q
WB
AUTO
WBWBWB
AUTOAUTOAUTO
AUTOAUTO
L
N
4:3
WB
AUTO
WBWBWB
AUTOAUTOAUTO
P
WB Auto
AUTOAUTO
S-IS AUTOS-IS AUTO
FullHD
F
When setting shooting
functions, if you press the
Q button, live control will
be displayed and you can
select a function by turning
the rear dial.
u button
Viewfi nder
Automatically lights up
when your eye moves
close.
When the viewfi nder is lit
up, the monitor turns off.
250 F5.6 0.00.0
ee
ISO-A
200
ISO-A
200
01:02:03
1023
Q
AUTOAUTO
L
N
4:3
WB
AUTO
WBWBWB
AUTOAUTOAUTO
WB Auto
AUTOAUTO
S-IS AUTOS-IS AUTO
FullHD
F
If you press the Q button
while the viewfi nder is lit
up, Live Control will be
displayed in the viewfi nder.
(During A mode, a live
guide is displayed.)
20
EN
Shooting using the viewfi nder
2
2
Shooting
Each time you press the u button, you can switch between shooting with the
viewfi nder and shooting with live view. When shooting with the viewfi nder, the super
control panel will be displayed on the monitor.
250250 F5.6
i
NORM
ISO
AUTO
AUTO
WB
AUTO
4:3
01:02:0301:02:03
10231023
RR
Wi-Fi
2013.10.01 12:30
u button
Viewfi nder
Super control panel
If the display in the viewfi nder looks
blurry
Look through the viewfi nder and rotate the
diopter adjustment dial until the display is in
sharp focus.
Shooting still pictures
1
Set up the camera and decide on the composition.
• The viewfi nder turns on
and the monitor turns off
automatically when you put
your eye to the viewfi nder.
• Be careful that your fi ngers
or the camera strap do not
obstruct the lens.
Horizontal grip Vertical grip
Shooting using the viewfi nder
21
EN
Shooting using the viewfi nder
2
2
Lightly press the shutter button down to the fi rst position. (Press halfway.)
• The AF confi rmation mark (() will be displayed, and a green frame (AF target) will
be displayed in the focus location.
250 F5.6
ee
01:02:03
1023
ISO-A
200
ISO-A
200
Press the shutter
button halfway.
AF confi rmation mark
Shutter speed
Aperture value
AF target
• The ISO sensitivity, shutter speed and aperture value that have been set
automatically by the camera are displayed.
• If the AF confi rmation mark blinks, the subject is not in focus. (P. 136)
3
Press the shutter button again to take a picture. (Press all the way down.)
• The shutter sounds and the picture is taken.
• The shot image will be displayed on the monitor.
Pressing the shutter button halfway and all the way down
The shutter button has two positions. The act of lightly pressing the shutter button to the
fi rst position and holding it there is called “pressing the shutter button halfway,” that of
pressing it all the way down to the second position “pressing the shutter button all (or the
rest of) the way down.”
Press halfway
Press the rest of
the way down
# Cautions
• You can change the viewfi nder display style. In this manual, [Style 1] is used.
• If the angle of the monitor has been changed, the viewfi nder will not light up automatically.
• If you press and hold down the u button, a menu is displayed that allows you to change
the settings for automatically lighting up the viewfi nder.
22
EN
Shooting using the viewfi nder
2
Recording movies
You can record movies in all shooting modes except J (PHOTO STORY). First, try
recording in full auto mode.
1
Set the mode dial to A.
2
Press the R button to begin recording.
• The image being shot is displayed on the monitor.
• If you look through the viewfi nder, the image being
recorded will be displayed.
• You can change the focus location by touching the
screen while recording (P. 27).
R button
3
Press the R button again to end recording.
• When shooting is complete, the super control
panel will be displayed on the monitor.
00:02:1800:02:18
RR
Displayed during
recording
Recording time
# Cautions
• When using a camera with a CMOS image sensor, moving objects may appear distorted
due to the rolling shutter phenomenon. This is a physical phenomenon whereby distortion
occurs in the fi lmed image when shooting a fast-moving subject or due to camera shaking.
In particular, this phenomenon becomes more noticeable when using a long focal length.
• If the camera is used for extended periods, the temperature of the image pickup device
will rise and noise and colored fog may appear in images. Turn off the camera for a short
time. Noise and colored fog may also appear in images recorded at high ISO sensitivity
settings. If the temperature rises further, the camera will turn off automatically.
• When using a Four Thirds system lens, the AF will not operate while recording movies.
Taking photographs during movie recording
• Press the shutter button during movie recording to pause movie recording and take a
photograph. Movie recording restarts after the photograph is taken. Press the R button
to end recording. Three fi les will be recorded to the memory card: the movie footage
preceding the photograph, the photograph itself, and the movie footage following the
photograph.
• Only one photograph can be taken at a time during movie recording; the self-timer and
fl ash cannot be used.
# Cautions
• Image size and quality for photographs are independent of movie frame size.
• The autofocus and metering used in movie mode may differ from that used to take
photographs.
• The R button cannot be used to record movies in the following instances:
Multiple exposure (still photography also ends.)/shutter button pressed halfway/during
bulb or time photography/sequential shooting/Panorama/SCN mode (e-Portrait, Hand-
Held Starlight, 3D)/time lapse shooting
23
EN
Shooting using the viewfi nder
2
Setting shooting functions
Using the Multi-function button
When framing pictures in the viewfi nder, you can adjust settings quickly using the
multi-function button. At default settings, the Fn2 button is assigned the role of the
multi-function button.
Choosing a function
1
Press and hold the Fn2 button and rotate the dial.
• The menus are displayed.
2
Keep rotating the dial to select the desired function.
• Release the button when the desired function is selected.
Using multifunction options
Press the Fn2 button. An option selection dialog will be displayed.
[a] assigned to Fn2 button
Zoom AF
Zoom frame AFShooting display
Fn2
Fn2
250 F5.6
ee
01:02:03
1023
ISO-A
200
ISO-A
200
250 F5.6
ee
01:02:03
1023
ISO-A
200
ISO-A
200
250 F5.6
ee
01:02:03
1023
ISO-A
200
ISO-A
200
Press and hold
Q/Fn2
Highlight and shadow
control options
SHADOW
HI LIGHT
250 F5.6 0.00.0
ee
ISO-A
200
ISO-A
200
01:02:03
1023
P
4:3
Aspect ratio optionsColor Creator option
Fn2
Other option assigned to Fn2 button
Function Front dial (
r
) Rear dial (
o
)
b (Highlight and shadow control) (P.49)
Highlight control Shadow control
c (Color Creator) (P.58)
Hue Saturation
a (Zoom frame AF/zoom AF) (P.54)
Zoom frame AF: Exposure compensation
Zoom AF: Zoom in or out
d (Image Aspect) (P.69)
Select an option
24
EN
Shooting using the viewfi nder
2
Using the super control panel
When shooting using the viewfi nder, the super control panel will be displayed on the
monitor. Set your main shooting functions using the super control panel.
Super control panel display
250250 F5.6
i
NORM
ISO
AUTO
AUTO
WB
AUTO
4:3
01:02:0301:02:03
10231023
ISO
+
2.0
+
2.0
RR
2
5
3
4
1
6
7
8
9
a
0cdfe b
Settings that can be modifi ed using the super control panel
1 Currently selected option
2 ISO sensitivity .................................P. 57
3 Flash mode .....................................P. 50
4 Flash intensity control .....................P. 71
5 Sequential shooting/self-timer ........P. 55
6 White balance .................................P. 56
White balance compensation
7 Picture mode...................................P. 68
8 Sharpness N..................................P. 78
Contrast J .....................................P. 78
Saturation T .................................P. 78
Gradation z...................................P. 78
B&W Filter x .................................P. 78
Picture tone y ...............................P. 79
9 Color space.....................................P. 95
0 Button function assignment ......P. 91, 99
a Face priority ....................................P. 53
b Metering mode ................................P. 72
c Aspect ratio .....................................P. 69
d Record mode ..................................P. 70
e AF mode .........................................P. 73
AF target .........................................P. 52
f Image stabilizer...............................P. 66
# Cautions
• Not displayed in SCN, J, or n modes.
1
Press the Q button.
• The cursor appears.
2
Touch the function you wish to set.
• The cursor appears over the function you touched.
3
Turn the front dial and select a setting value.
250250 F5.6
i
NORM
ISO
AUTO
AUTO
WB
AUTO
4:3
01:02:0301:02:03
10231023
ISO
Cursor
$ Notes
• You can display menus for each function by selecting a function and pressing Q.
25
EN
Shooting using live view
3
3
Shooting
You can switch between shooting using the viewfi nder and shooting using live view by
pressing the u button. When shooting using live view, the subject is displayed on the
monitor.
250250 F5.6
01:02:0301:02:03
3838
ISO-A
200
Wi-Fi
RR
u button
Monitor
Shooting still pictures
1
Set up the camera and decide on the composition.
• Be careful not to cover the lens with a fi nger or the camera strap.
2
Touch the area of the subject you want to focus
on.
• The camera focuses on the area you touched and
automatically takes a photograph.
• The recorded image is displayed on the monitor.
250250 F5.6
01:02:0301:02:03
3838
ISO-A
200
Wi-Fi
RR
$ Notes
• You can also use the shutter button to take a photograph, just as you would when
shooting using the viewfi nder.
• You can also press the shutter button after the camera focuses on the area you touched
to take a photograph. g “Using the touch screen” (P. 27)
Shooting using live view
26
EN
Shooting using live view
3
Recording movies
You can record movies in all shooting modes except J (PHOTO STORY). First, try
recording in full auto mode.
1
Set the mode dial to A.
2
Press the R button to begin recording.
• You can change the focus location by touching the
screen while recording (P. 27).
R button
3
Press the R button again to end recording.
00:02:1800:02:18
RR
Displayed during
recording
Recording time
# Cautions
• When using a camera with a CMOS image sensor, moving objects may appear distorted
due to the rolling shutter phenomenon. This is a physical phenomenon whereby distortion
occurs in the fi lmed image when shooting a fast-moving subject or due to camera shaking.
In particular, this phenomenon becomes more noticeable when using a long focal length.
• If the camera is used for extended periods, the temperature of the image pickup device
will rise and noise and colored fog may appear in images. Turn off the camera for a short
time. Noise and colored fog may also appear in images recorded at high ISO sensitivity
settings. If the temperature rises further, the camera will turn off automatically.
• When using a Four Thirds system lens, the AF will not operate while recording movies.
Taking photographs during movie recording
• Press the shutter button during movie recording to pause movie recording and take a
photograph. Movie recording restarts after the photograph is taken. Press the R button
to end recording. Three fi les will be recorded to the memory card: the movie footage
preceding the photograph, the photograph itself, and the movie footage following the
photograph.
• Only one photograph can be taken at a time during movie recording; the self-timer and
fl ash cannot be used.
# Cautions
• Image size and quality for photographs are independent of movie frame size.
• The autofocus and metering used in movie mode may differ from that used to take
photographs.
• The R button cannot be used to record movies in the following instances:
Multiple exposure (still photography also ends.)/shutter button pressed halfway/during
bulb or time photography/sequential shooting/Panorama/SCN mode (e-Portrait, Hand-
Held Starlight, 3D)/time lapse shooting
27
EN
Shooting using live view
3
Using the touch screen
When shooting using live view, touch panel functions can be used.
Selecting a focusing method
You can focus and shoot by tapping the monitor.
Tap
T
to cycle through touch screen settings.
250250 F5.6
01:02:0301:02:03
3030
ISO-A
200
RR
Wi-Fi
U
Touch screen operations disabled.
T
Tap a subject to focus and automatically
release the shutter. This function is not
available in
n
mode.
V
Tap to display an AF target and focus on the
subject in the selected area. You can use the
touch screen to choose the position and size of
the focus frame. Photographs can be taken by
pressing the shutter button.
Previewing Your Subject ( V )
1
Tap the subject in the display.
• An AF target will be displayed.
• Use the slider to choose the size of the frame.
1414
1010
7
7
5x
5x
250250 F5.6
ISO-A
200
S-IS AUTOS-IS AUTO
2
Use the slider to choose the size of the target
frame, and then tap Y to zoom in on the
subject of the target frame.
• Use your fi nger to scroll the display when the picture
is zoomed in.
• Tap Z to cancel the zoom display.
# Cautions
• When using a Four Thirds system lens, the range within which auto focus is possible
decreases. If you touch the screen outside of the possible range, the camera shoots
without using AF.
Using the wireless LAN function
You can connect the camera to a smartphone and
control the camera over Wi-Fi. To use this function, you
must have the relevant app installed on the smartphone.
g “Using the camera wireless LAN function” (P. 119),
“Things you can do with OI.Share” (P. 121)
250250 F5.6
01:02:0301:02:03
3030
Wi-Fi
ISO-A
200
RR
Wi-Fi
28
EN
Shooting using live view
3
Setting shooting functions
Using live guides
Live guides are available in iAUTO (A) mode. While iAUTO is a full auto mode, live
guides make it easy to access a variety of advanced photographic techniques.
1
Set the mode dial to A.
2
Touch the tab to display live guides.
• Select a guide item and touch it to set that item.
250250 F5.6
01:02:0301:02:03
3838
ISO-A
200
Wi-Fi
RR
Tab
Change Color Saturation
Cancel
Guide item
3
Use your fi nger to position the sliders.
• Tap
a
to enter the setting.
• To cancel the live guide setting, tap
k
on the
screen.
• If [Shooting Tips] is selected, highlight an item and
press Q to view a description.
• The effect of the selected level is visible in the
display. If [Blur Background] or [Express Motions]
is selected, the display will return to normal, but the
selected effect will be visible in the fi nal photograph.
0
Clear & Vivid
Flat & Muted
Cancel Set
Level bar/selection
4
Shoot.
• To clear the live guide from the display, press the MENU button.
$ Notes
• Live guides can also be used when shooting using the viewfi nder.
When shooting using the viewfi nder, settings are made using the dial and buttons. If you
press the Q button, the live guide is displayed, and the rear dial is used to select items
and operate the sliders.
29
EN
Shooting using live view
3
# Cautions
• If [RAW] is currently selected for image quality, image quality will automatically be set to
[YN+RAW].
• Live guide settings are not applied to the RAW copy.
• Pictures may appear grainy at some live guide setting levels.
• Changes to live guide setting levels may not be visible in the monitor.
• Frame rates drop when [Blurred Motion] is selected.
• The fl ash cannot be used with the live guide.
• Changes to live guide options cancel previous changes.
• Choosing live guide settings that exceed the limits of the camera exposure meters may
result in pictures that are over or underexposed.
30
EN
Shooting using live view
3
Using live control
When shooting using live view, live control can be used to set functions in P, A, S,
M,
n
, and J modes. Using live control allows you to preview the effects of different
settings in the monitor.
WB
AUTO
WBWBWB
AUTOAUTOAUTO
AUTOAUTO
L
N
4:3
WB
AUTO
WBWBWB
AUTOAUTOAUTO
P
WB Auto
AUTOAUTO
S-IS AUTOS-IS AUTO
FullHD
F
Settings
Functions
Available settings
Image stabilizer ....................................P. 66
Picture mode ........................................P. 68
Scene mode .........................................P. 45
Art fi lter mode .......................................P. 44
n mode ...............................................P. 69
White balance .......................................P. 56
Sequential shooting/self-timer ..............P. 55
Aspect ratio...........................................P. 69
Record mode ........................................P. 70
Flash mode ...........................................P. 50
Flash intensity control ...........................P. 71
Metering mode......................................P. 72
AF mode ...............................................P. 73
ISO sensitivity .......................................P. 57
Face priority ..........................................P. 53
Movie sound record ..............................P. 74
1
Press Q to display the live control.
• To hide the live control, press Q again.
2
Use the rear dial to select the
settings, use the front dial to
change the selected setting,
and press Q.
• The selected settings take effect
automatically if no operations are
performed for about 8 seconds.
WB
AUTO
WBWBWB
AUTOAUTOAUTO
AUTOAUTO
L
N
4:3
WB
AUTO
WBWBWB
AUTOAUTOAUTO
P
WB Auto
AUTOAUTO
S-IS AUTOS-IS AUTO
FullHD
F
Cursor
Displays
the selected
function
name
Cursor
Arrow pad
Arrow
pad
# Cautions
• Some items are not available in some shooting modes.
$ Notes
• Live control can also be used when shooting using the viewfi nder.
If you press the Q button during viewfi nder display, live control will be displayed in the
viewfi nder. If the viewfi nder is switched off while shooting is in progress, live control will
also be canceled.
31
EN
Viewing photographs and movies
4
4
Viewing photographs and movies
1
Press the q button.
• Your most recent photograph or movie will be displayed.
• Select the desired photograph or movie using the front dial or arrow pad.
HI
Front dial
Displays the
previous
frame
Displays
the next
frame
q button
2013.10.01 12:30 20
100-0020
L
N
2013.10.01 12:30 4
100-0004
WB
AUTO
WBWBWB
AUTOAUTOAUTO
P
HD
Still image
Movie
Index display/Calendar display
• To start index playback, turn the rear dial to G during single-frame playback. To start
calendar playback, turn the dial a little further.
• Turn the rear dial to a to return to single-frame playback.
q
p
q
p
2013.10.01 12:30 20
100-0020
L
N
Index display
2013.10.01 12:30 21
Calendar display
2013.10
Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat
29 30 1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9 10 11 12
13 14 15 16 17 18 19
20 21 22 23 24 25 26
27 28 29 30 31 1 2
3 4 5 6 7
29 30 1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9 10 11 12
13 14 15 16 17 18 19
20 21 22 23 24 25 26
27 28 29 30 31 1 2
3 4 5 6 7
Viewing photographs and movies
Q
32
EN
Viewing photographs and movies
4
Viewing still images
Close-up playback
In single-frame playback, turn the rear dial to a to zoom in. Turn to G to return to single-
frame playback.
2x
2013.10.01 12:30 20
100-0020
L
N
Rear dial
Watching movies
Select a movie and press the Q button to display the
playback menu. Select [Movie Play] and press the Q
button to begin playback. To interrupt movie playback,
press MENU.
m
Movie
Back
Movie Play
Erase
Set
Share Order
Volume
Volume can be adjusted by pressing F or G during single-
frame and movie playback.
00:00:02/00:00:14
Protecting images
Protect images from accidental deletion. Display an image
you wish to protect and press the AEL/AFL button; a 0
(protect) icon will appear on the image. Press the AEL/AFL
button again to remove protection.
You can also protect multiple selected images.
2013.10.01 12:30 20
100-0020
L
N
4
:
3
0 (protect) icon
# Cautions
• Formatting the card erases all images even if they have been protected.
33
EN
Viewing photographs and movies
4
Erasing images
Display an image you want to delete and press the button. Select [Yes] and press
the Q button.
button
Erase
Back
Yes
No
Set
Selecting images
Select the image. You can also select multiple images for
protection or deletion. Press the H button to select an
image; a v icon will appear on the image. Press the H
button again to cancel the selection.
Press Q to display the delete or protect selection menu.
2013.10.01 12:30 21
34
EN
Viewing photographs and movies
4
Using the touch screen
You can use the touch panel to manipulate images.
Full-frame playback
Viewing additional images
• Slide your fi nger to the left to view later frames, right to
scroll view earlier frames.
Playback zoom
• Slide the bar up or down to zoom in or out.
• Use your fi nger to scroll the display when the picture is
zoomed in.
• Tap P to display index playback.
Tap Q again for calendar playback.
Index/Calendar Playback
Page ahead/Page back
• Slide your fi nger up to view the next page, down to view
the previous page.
• Use Q or R to choose the number of images
displayed.
• Tap R several times to return to single-frame
playback.
S
Viewing images
• Tap an image to view it full frame.
Selecting and protecting images
In single-frame playback, lightly touch the screen to display the touch menu. You can
then perform the desired operation by touching the icons in the touch menu.
H
Select an image. You can select multiple images for protection.
h
You can set the images you wish to share over Wi-Fi connection.
g [Share Order] (P. 62)
0
Protects an image.
# Cautions
• The situations in which touch screen operations are not available include the following.
Panorama/3D/e-portrait/multiple exposure/during bulb or time photography/one-touch
white balance dialog/when buttons or dials are in use
• Do not touch the display with your fi ngernails or other sharp objects.
• Gloves or monitor covers may interfere with touch screen operation.
• You can also use the touch screen with the ART, SCN and J menus. Tap an icon to
select it.
35
EN
Basic operations
5
5
Basic operations
Information displays while shooting
Viewfi nder display when shooting using the viewfi nder
AEL
MY1
250 F5.6 +2.0+2.0
Hi +7
Sh
-
3
Hi +7
Sh
-
3
ee
ISO-A
200
ISO-A
200
01:02:03
1023
PBH
AEL
MY1
250 F5.6 +2.0+2.0
Hi +7
Sh
-
3
Hi +7
Sh
-
3
ee
ISO-A
200
ISO-A
200
01:02:03
1023
PBH
AEL
MY1
250 F5.6 +2.0+2.0
Hi +7
Sh
-
3
Hi +7
Sh
-
3
ee
ISO-A
200
ISO-A
200
01:02:03
1023
PBH
f
g
e
1 2 3 4
c b a 0 9 7 68 5d
1 Battery check
; Lit up: Ready for use.
: Lit up: Battery is running low.
] Blinks (red) : Charging required.
2 Shooting mode...................P. 18, 38 – 47
3 Myset ..............................................P. 77
4 Available recording time
5 Number of storable still pictures ...P. 124
6 ISO sensitivity .................................P. 57
7 White balance .................................P. 56
8 Highlight and shadow control..........P. 49
9 Top: Flash intensity control .............P. 71
Bottom: Exposure compensation
indicator .............................P. 49
0 Exposure compensation value........P. 49
a Aperture value .........................P. 38 – 41
b Shutter speed ..........................P. 38 – 41
c AE Lock u ...................................P. 49
d AF confi rmation mark......................P. 21
e Flash ...............................................P. 50
(blinks: charging in progress)
f PBH (displayed when camera is
receiving power from power battery
holder)...........................................P. 129
g Level gauge (displayed by pressing the
shutter button down halfway) ..........P. 37
You can change the viewfi nder display style. In this manual, [Style 1] is used.
g [Built-in EVF Style] (P. 97)
36
EN
Basic operations
5
Monitor display when shooting using live view
250250 F5.6
ISO
400
L
N
4:3
S-AFS-AF
AEL
RC
BKT
+
2.0
+
2.0
P
+7+7
01:02:0301:02:03
10231023
45
mm45 mm
-3-3
j
RR
-
2.0
-
2.0
HD
N
1
3
j
FPS
Wi-Fi
FP
S-ISS-IS
x
y
z
A
B
C
w
v
u
1
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
f
e
32 654 97 0a b
r
t
qp os n
dc
D
8
1 Card write indicator .........................P. 13
2 Wi-Fi connection .....................P. 27, 119
3 Super FP fl ash ..............................P. 130
4 RC mode.......................................P. 131
5 Auto bracket/HDRf ...........P. 80/P. 59
6 Multiple exposure............................P. 82
7 High frame rate ...............................P. 93
8 Digital Tele-converter ......................P. 84
9 Time lapse shooting ........................P. 83
0 Face priority ....................................P. 53
a Movie sound ...................................P. 74
b Focal length/Internal temperature
warning m ................P. 128/P. 139
c Flash ...............................................P. 50
(blinks: charging in progress,
lights up: charging completed)
d AF confi rmation mark......................P. 21
e Image stabilizer...............................P. 66
f Art fi lter ...........................................P. 44
Scene mode....................................P. 45
Picture mode...................................P. 68
g White balance .................................P. 56
h Sequential shooting/self-timer ........P. 55
i Aspect ratio .....................................P. 69
j Record mode (still images) .............P. 70
k Record mode (movies) ...................P. 71
l Available recording time
m Number of storable still pictures ...P. 124
n Highlight&Shadow Control ..............P. 49
o Top: Flash intensity control ......P. 71
Bottom: Exposure compensation
indicator............................P. 49
p Exposure compensation value........P. 49
q Aperture value .........................P. 38 – 41
r Shutter speed ..........................P. 38 – 41
s Histogram .......................................P. 37
t AE Lock ..........................................P. 49
u Shooting mode...................P. 18, 38 – 47
v Myset ..............................................P. 77
w Shooting using touch screen
operations .......................................P. 27
x Flash intensity control .....................P. 71
y ISO sensitivity .................................P. 57
z AF mode .........................................P. 73
A Metering mode ................................P. 72
B Flash mode .....................................P. 50
C Battery check
; Lit up (green): Ready for use
(displayed for about
ten seconds after
the camera is turned
on.)
: Lit up (green): Battery is running
low
.
] Blinks (red):
Charging required
D Live guide recall ..............................P. 28
37
EN
Basic operations
5
Switching the information display
You can switch the information displayed in the monitor during shooting using the
INFO button.
When shooting using the viewfi nder
Monitor display
INFO
INFO
INFO
INFO
INFO
INFO
Super control panel
250250 F5.6
i
NORM
ISO
AUTO
AUTO
WB
AUTO
4:3
01:02:0301:02:03
10231023
2013.10.01 12:30
RR
Wi-Fi
0.00.0
Level gauge display
250250 F5.6
P
0.00.0
ISO-A
200
Wi-Fi
Image only
Viewfi nder display
Can be switched while looking through the viewfi nder.
INFO
INFO
Level gauge display
INFO
INFO
INFO
INFO
250 F5.6 0.00.0
ee
ISO-A
200
ISO-A
200
01:02:03
1023
INFO
INFO
Image only
Histogram displayInformation display on
250 F5.6 0.00.0
ee
ISO-A
200
ISO-A
200
01:02:03
1023
S-IS AUTO S-IS AUTO
250 F5.6 0.00.0
ee
ISO-A
200
ISO-A
200
01:02:03
1023
250 F5.6 0.00.0
ee
ISO-A
200
ISO-A
200
01:02:03
1023
L
N
S-IS AUTO
S-IS AUTO
FullHDFullHD
RR
When shooting using Live View
INFO
Level gauge display
INFO INFO
250250 F5.6
P
0.00.0
INFO
Image only
Histogram display
Information display on
01:02:0301:02:03
3838
250250 F5.6
0.00.0
RR
Wi-Fi
L
N
S-IS AUTO
S-IS AUTO
ISO-A
200
FullHD
F
01:02:0301:02:03
3838
250250 F5.6
P
0.00.0
RR
Wi-Fi
L
N
S-IS AUTO
S-IS AUTO
FullHDFullHD
ISO-A
200
Histogram display
Display a histogram showing the distribution of brightness in the image. The horizontal axis
gives the brightness, the vertical axis the number of pixels of each brightness in the image.
Areas above the upper limit at shooting are displayed in red, those below the lower limit in
blue, and the area metered using spot metering in green.
Level gauge display
Indicate the orientation of the camera. The “tilt” direction is indicated on the vertical bar and
the “horizon” direction on the horizontal bar. Use the indicators on the level gauge as a guide.
38
EN
Basic operations
5
Using the shooting modes
“Point-and-shoot” photography (P program mode)
In mode P, the camera automatically adjusts shutter speed and aperture in response
to subject brightness. Set the mode dial to P.
AEL
MY1
250 F5.6 +2.0+2.0
Hi +7
Sh
-
3
Hi +7
Sh
-
3
ee
ISO-A
200
ISO-A
200
01:02:03
1023
PBH
250250 F5.6
01:02:0301:02:03
3838
L
N
P
ISO-A
200
0.00.0
FullHD
F
RR
Wi-Fi
S-IS AUTO
S-IS AUTO
Shooting
mode
Shutter speed
Aperture value
When shooing using
the viewfi nder
When shooting using
live view
• The functions you can set with the dials depend on the position of the lever.
Front dial
Lever
Rear dial
Dial
Position of the lever
12
r
Exposure
compensation
ISO
o
Program shift White balance
• The shutter speed and aperture selected by the camera are displayed.
• The shutter speed and aperture displays will blink if the camera is unable to achieve
optimal exposure.
Warning display
example (blinking)
Status Action
60"
60"
F2.8
F2.8
The subject is too
dark.
• Use the fl ash.
8000
8000
F22
F22
The subject is too
bright.
• The metered range of the camera is
exceeded. A commercially available ND
fi lter (for adjusting the amount of light) is
required.
• The aperture value at the moment when its indication blinks varies with the lens type and
focal length of the lens.
• When using a fi xed [ISO] setting, change the setting. g [ISO] (P. 57)
Program shift (%)
In P and ART modes, you can choose different
combinations of aperture value and shutter speed without
altering exposure. “s” appears next to the shooting mode
during program shift. To cancel program shift, turn the rear
dial until “s” is no longer displayed.
# Cautions
• Program shift is not available when you are using a
fl ash.
250250 F5.6
i
NORM
ISO
AUTO
AUTO
WB
AUTO
4:3
01:02:0301:02:03
10231023
2013.10.01 12:30
0.00.0
P
s
RR
Wi-Fi
Program shift
39
EN
Basic operations
5
Choosing aperture (A aperture-priority mode)
In mode A, you choose the aperture and let the camera automatically adjust shutter
speed for optimal exposure. Rotate the mode dial to A.
Front dial
Lever
Rear dial
Dial
Position of the lever
12
r
Exposure
compensation
ISO
o
Aperture value White balance
• Larger apertures (lower F-numbers) decrease depth of
fi eld (the area in front of or behind the focus point that
appears to be in focus), softening background details.
Smaller apertures (higher F-numbers) increase depth
of fi eld.
Aperture value
250250 F5.6
01:02:0301:02:03
3838
L
N
A
0.00.0
ISO
400
FullHD
F
When shooting using live
view
Setting the aperture value
Reducing aperture value Increasing aperture value
F2 F3.5 F5.6 F8.0 F16
• The shutter speed display will blink if the camera is unable to achieve optimal
exposure.
Warning display
example (blinking)
Status Action
30"
30"
F5.6
F5.6
The subject is
underexposed.
• Decrease the aperture value.
8000
8000
F5.6
F5.6
The subject is
overexposed.
• Increase the aperture value.
• If the warning display does not disappear,
the metered range of the camera is
exceeded. A commercially available ND
fi lter (for adjusting the amount of light) is
required.
• The aperture value at the moment when its indication blinks varies with the lens type and
focal length of the lens.
• When using a fi xed [ISO] setting, change the setting. g [ISO] (P. 57)
Preview function
You can preview the focus range (depth of fi eld). While pressing the preview button, the
aperture is stopped down to the set aperture value.
40
EN
Basic operations
5
Choosing shutter speed (S shutter-priority mode)
In mode S, you choose the shutter speed and let the camera automatically adjust
aperture for optimal exposure. Rotate the mode dial to S.
Front dial
Lever
Rear dial
Dial
Position of the lever
12
r
Exposure
compensation
ISO
o
Shutter speed White balance
• A fast shutter speed can freeze a fast action scene
without any blur. A slow shutter speed will blur a fast
action scene. This blurring will give the impression of
dynamic motion.
When shooting using live
view
Shutter speed
250250 F5.6
01:02:0301:02:03
3838
L
N
S
0.00.0
ISO
400
FullHD
F
Setting the shutter speed
Slower shutter speed Faster shutter speed
2" 1" 15 60 100 400 1000
• The aperture value display will blink if the camera is unable to achieve optimal
exposure.
Warning display
example (blinking)
Status Action
2000
2000
F2.8
F2.8
The subject is
underexposed.
• Set the shutter speed slower.
125
125
F22
F22
The subject is
overexposed.
• Set the shutter speed faster.
• If the warning display does not disappear,
the metered range of the camera is
exceeded. A commercially available ND
fi lter (for adjusting the amount of light) is
required.
• The aperture value at the moment when its indication blinks varies with the lens type and
focal length of the lens.
• When using a fi xed [ISO] setting, change the setting. g [ISO] (P. 57)
41
EN
Basic operations
5
Choosing aperture and shutter speed (M manual mode)
In mode M, you choose both the aperture and the shutter speed. At a speed of BULB, the
shutter remains open while the shutter button is pressed. Set the mode dial to M.
Front dial
Lever
Rear dial
Dial
Position of the lever
12
r
Aperture value ISO
o
Shutter speed White balance
• Shutter speed can be set to values between 1/8000 and 60 seconds or to [BULB] or
[LIVE TIME].
# Cautions
• Exposure compensation is not available in M mode.
Choosing when the exposure ends (bulb/time photography)
Use for night landscapes and fi reworks. Shutter speeds of [BULB] and [LIVE TIME] are
available in mode M.
Bulb photography (BULB): The shutter remains open while the shutter button is pressed.
The exposure ends when the shutter button is released.
Time photography (TIME): The exposure begins when the shutter button is pressed all
the way down. To end the exposure, press the shutter button
all the way down again.
• When using BULB or TIME, screen brightness is varied automatically.
• When using [LIVE TIME], the progress of the exposure will be displayed in the monitor
during shooting. The display can also be refreshed by pressing the shutter button halfway.
• [Live BULB] (P. 94) can be used to display the image exposure during bulb photography.
# Cautions
• ISO sensitivity can be set to a value up to ISO 1600 for live bulb and live time
photography.
• To reduce camera blur during long exposures, mount the camera on a tripod and use a
remote cable (P. 133).
• The following features are not available during long exposures:
Sequential shooting/self-timer shooting/AE bracket shooting/image stabilizer/
fl ash bracketing/multiple exposure*
* An option other than [Off] is selected for [Live BULB] or [Live TIME] (P. 94).
• Even when [Noise Reduct.] is in use, noise may be noticeable in the image displayed on
the monitor during shooting.
Noise in images
While shooting at slow shutter speeds, noise may appear on screen. These phenomena
occur when the temperature rises in the image pickup device or image pickup device
internal drive circuit, causing current to be generated in those sections of the image pickup
device that are not normally exposed to light. This can also occur when shooting with a
high ISO setting in a high-temperature environment. To reduce this noise, the camera
activates the noise reduction function. g [Noise Reduct.] (P. 93)
42
EN
Basic operations
5
Using movie mode
(n)
Movie mode
(n)
can be used to fi lm movies with special effects.
You can create movies that take advantage of the effects available in still photography
mode. Use live control to select the settings. g “Adding effects to a movie” (P. 69)
You can also apply an after-image effect or zoom in on an area of the image during
movie recording.
Adding effects to a movie [Movie Effect]
1
Rotate the mode dial to n.
2
Press the R button to begin recording.
• Press the R button again to end recording.
3
Touch the on-screen icon of the effect you wish to
use.
• You can also use the buttons displayed on icons.
U
Multi Echo
Apply an after-image effect. After-images will appear
behind moving objects.
V
One Shot Echo
An after-image will appear for a short time after you press
the button. The after-image will disappear automatically
after a while.
T
Art Fade
Film with the selected picture mode effect. The fade
effect is applied to the transition between scenes.
M
Movie Tele-
converter
Zoom in on an area of the image without using the lens
zoom. Zoom in on the selected position of the image
even while the camera is kept fi xed.
Multi Echo
Touch the icon to apply the effect. Touch again to cancel the effect.
One Shot Echo
Each touch of the icon adds to the effect.
Art Fade
Touch the icon. Touch the picture mode you wish to use. The effect will be applied when you
release your fi nger.
43
EN
Basic operations
5
Movie Tele-converter
1
Touch the icon to display the zoom frame.
• You can change the position of the zoom frame by touching the screen or using
FGHI.
• Press and hold Q to return the zoom frame to a central position.
2
Touch K or press the Fn2 button to zoom in on the area in the zoom
frame.
• Touch L or press the Fn2 button to return to the zoom frame.
3
Touch O or press Q to cancel the zoom frame and exit Movie tele-
converter mode.
# Cautions
• The frame rate will drop slightly during recording.
• The 2 effects cannot be applied simultaneously.
• Use a memory card with an SD speed class of 6 or better. Movie recording may end
unexpectedly if a slower card is used.
• Taking a photograph during movie recording cancels the effect; the effect does not appear
in the photograph.
• [e-Portrait], [Diorama] and [Color Creator] cannot be used at the same time as Art Fade.
• Movie Tele-converter cannot be used when [Picture Mode] is set to [ART].
• The sound of touch operations and button operations may be recorded.
• Besides using touch operations, you can apply effects using the buttons corresponding to
the displayed icons.
44
EN
Basic operations
5
Using art fi lters
1
Rotate the mode dial to ART.
• A menu of art fi lters will be displayed. Select a fi lter
using FG.
• Press Q or press the shutter button halfway to select
the highlighted item and exit the art fi lter menu.
1
Pop Art
Types of art fi lters
j Pop Art t Cross Process
k Soft Focus u Gentle Sepia
l Pale&Light Color v Dramatic Tone
m Light Tone Y Key Line
n Grainy Film Z Watercolor
o Pin Hole u ART BKT (ART bracketing)
s Diorama
2
Shoot.
• To choose a different setting, press Q to display the art fi lter menu.
ART bracketing
When one shot is taken, images are recorded for each selected art fi lter. Press I to
choose fi lters.
Art effects
Art fi lters can be modifi ed and effects can be added. Pressing I in the art fi lter menu
displays additional options.
Modifying fi lters
Option I is the original fi lter, while options II and on add effects that modify the original
fi lter.
Adding effects*
Soft focus, pin-hole, frames, white edges, starlight, fi lter, tone, blur
* The effects available vary with the selected fi lter.
# Cautions
• If [RAW] is currently selected for image quality, image quality will automatically be set to
[YN+RAW]. The art fi lter will be applied to the JPEG copy only.
• Depending on the subject, tone transitions may be ragged, the effect may be less
noticeable, or the image may become more “grainy.”
• Some effects may not be visible in live view or during movie recording.
• Playback may differ according to the fi lters, effects, or movie quality settings applied.
45
EN
Basic operations
5
Shooting in scene mode
1
Rotate the mode dial to SCN.
• A menu of scene menu will be displayed. Select a scene
using FG.
• Press Q or press the shutter button halfway to select
the highlighted item and exit the scene menu.
1 Portrait
Types of scene modes
O Portrait
J
Macro
P e-Portrait r Nature Macro
L Landscape Q Candle
K Landscape+Portrait R Sunset
J
Sport T Documents
i
Hand-Held Starlight s Panorama (P. 46)
G Night Scene
(
Fireworks
U Night+Portrait g Beach & Snow
G
Children fn Fisheye Effect
H
High Key wn Wide-Angle
I
Low Key mn Macro
q DIS Mode T 3D Photo
2
Shoot.
• To choose a different setting, press Q to display the scene menu.
# Cautions
• In [e-Portrait] mode, two images are recorded: an unmodifi ed image and a second
image to which [e-Portrait] effects have been applied. Recording may take some time. In
addition, when the image quality mode is [RAW], the image is recorded in RAW+JPEG.
• [n Fisheye Effect], [n Wide-Angle], and [n Macro] are for use with optional converter
lenses.
• Movies cannot be recorded in [e-Portrait], [Hand-Held Starlight], [Panorama], or [3D
Photo] mode.
• In [Hand-Held Starlight], 8 frames are shot at one time and then combined. When the
image quality mode is [RAW], a JPEG image is combined with the fi rst RAW image and
recorded in RAW+JPEG.
• [3D Photo] is subject to the following limitations.
[3D Photo] can be used only with a 3D lens.
The camera monitor cannot be used to playback images in 3D. Use a device that
supports 3D display.
Focus is locked. In addition, fl ash and self-timer also cannot be used.
Image size is fi xed at 1920 × 1080.
RAW photography is not available.
Frame coverage is not 100%.
46
EN
Basic operations
5
Taking panoramas
If you have installed the supplied computer software, you can use it to join pictures together
to form a panorama. g “Connecting the camera to a computer and a smartphone” (P. 116)
1
Rotate the mode dial to SCN.
2
Select [Panorama] and press Q.
3
Use FGHI to choose a pan direction.
4
Take a picture, using the guides to frame the shot.
• Focus, exposure, and other settings are fi xed at the
values for the fi rst shot.
250250 F5.6 38
M
5
Take the remaining images, framing each shot so that the guides overlap with
the previous picture.
[
2
]
250250 F5.6 38
M
[
3
]
Exit Exit
• A panorama may include up to 10 images. A warning indicator (g) is displayed after
the tenth shot.
6
After taking the last shot, press Q to end the series.
# Cautions
• During panorama shooting, the image previously taken for position alignment will not be
displayed. With the frames or other markers for display in the images as a guide, set the
composition such that the edges of the overlapping images overlap within the frames.
$ Notes
• Pressing Q before shooting the fi rst frame returns to the scene mode selection menu.
Pressing Q in the midst of shooting ends the sequence of panorama shooting, and allows
you to continue with the next one.
47
EN
Basic operations
5
Using PHOTO STORY
1
Rotate the mode dial to J.
• A PHOTO STORY menu will be displayed.
A
Standard
B
Speed
C
Fun Frames
Standard1
1
2
3
2
Use FG to choose the theme of the PHOTO STORY.
• You can choose different effects, number of frames and aspect ratios for each theme.
You can also change the aspect ratio, the division pattern and the frame effect of
individual images.
Changing between variations
E
Original PHOTO STORY
F G H
PHOTO STORY with effects and aspect ratios changed from the original
PHOTO STORY.
The number of images and arrangement of image regions can be altered for
each theme of the PHOTO STORY.
• You can change the frame color and frame surrounding effect in each variation.
• Every theme and variation provides a different PHOTO STORY.
3
After fi nishing the settings, press Q.
• The monitor switches to PHOTO STORY display.
• The subject of current frame is displayed in live view.
• Touch any of the masked frames to switch the masked frame to the current frame.
• Press the MENU button to change the theme.
4
Shoot an image for the fi rst frame.
• The image you have shot is displayed in the fi rst
frame.
F5.0
0.0
0.0
1
ISO-A
200
10231023
250250
5
Shoot an image for the next frame.
• View and shoot the subject for the next frame.
• Press to cancel the image in the directly preceding
frame and retake the shot.
• Touch any frame to cancel the image in it and retake
the shot. Touch the frame, and then touch O.
F5.0
0.0
0.0
1
ISO-A
200
10231023
250250
Next frame (Live view display)
Shot image
48
EN
Basic operations
5
6
Once you have shot all the frames, press Q to save the image.
• Press the MENU button, and you can select other themes.
$ Notes
• During the shooting of a PHOTO STORY, the following operations are available.
Exposure compensation/Program shift/Flash shooting (except when the theme is
[Speed].)/Live control settings
# Cautions
• If the camera is turned off during shooting, all the data for images up to that point is
cancelled and nothing is recorded on the memory card.
• If [RAW] is currently selected for image quality, image quality will automatically be set to
[YN+RAW]. The PHOTO STORY image is saved as JPEG and the images in the frames
as RAW. RAW images are saved in [4:3].
• From among the [AF Mode], [S-AF], [MF] and [S-AF+MF] can be set.
Also, the AF target is fi xed to a single central point.
• The metering mode is fi xed to digital ESP metering.
• The following operations are not available in PHOTO STORY mode.
MENU display/Movie/Sequential shooting/Self timer/INFO display/Face priority AF/
Digital Tele-converter/Picture mode
• The following button operations are disabled.
Fn1/Fn2/INFO etc.
• During the shooting of a PHOTO STORY, the camera will not go into sleep mode.
49
EN
Basic operations
5
Commonly used shooting options
Controlling exposure (exposure compensation)
Rotate the front dial to choose exposure compensation. Choose positive (“+”) values to
make pictures brighter, negative (“–”) values to make pictures darker. Exposure can be
adjusted by ±5.0 EV.
Negative (–) No compensation (0) Positive (+)
# Cautions
• Exposure compensation is not available in A, M, or SCN mode.
• The viewfi nder and live view display can only be changed up to ±3.0EV. If the exposure
exceeds ±3.0EV, the exposure bar will begin fl ashing.
• Movies can be corrected in a range up to ±3.0EV.
Changing the brightness of highlights and shadows
When the multi-function button is set to [Highlight&Shadow
Control], a setting screen will be displayed when you press
the Fn2 button. Adjust the shadow using the rear dial and
the highlight using the front dial.
SHADOW
HI LIGHT
Locking the exposure (AE Lock)
You can lock just the exposure by pressing the AEL/AFL button. Use this when you
want to adjust the focus and exposure separately or when you want to shoot several
images at the same exposure.
• If you press the AEL/AFL button once, the exposure is locked and u is displayed.
g “AEL/AFL” (P. 98)
• Press the AEL/AFL button once again to release the AE Lock.
# Cautions
• The lock will be released if you operate the mode dial, MENU button, or Q button.
50
EN
Basic operations
5
Using a fl ash (fl ash photography)
The fl ash can be set manually as required. The fl ash can be used for fl ash
photography in a variety of shooting conditions.
1
Attach the fl ash to the camera and raise
the light-emitting unit.
• g “Attaching the fl ash unit” (P. 15)
2
Set the lever to position 2 and press the AFm button.
AFm button
Lever
P
Flash Auto
AUTOAUTO
00
0.0
When shooting using live view
3
Select a setting using the rear dial and press the Q button.
• The options available and the order in which they are displayed vary depending on
the shooting mode. g “Flash modes that can be set by shooting mode” (P. 51)
AUTO Auto fl ash
The fl ash fi res automatically in low light or
backlight conditions.
#
Fill-in fl ash The fl ash fi res regardless of the light conditions.
$
Flash off The fl ash does not fi re.
!/
#!
Red-eye reduction fl ash
This function allows you to reduce the red-eye
phenomenon. In S and M modes, the fl ash
always fi res.
#SLOW
Slow synchronization
(1st curtain)
Slow shutter speeds are used to brighten dimly-lit
backgrounds.
!SLOW
Slow synchronization
(1st curtain)/Red-eye
reduction fl ash
Combines slow synchronization with red-eye
reduction.
#SLOW2/
2nd
Curtain
Slow synchronization
(2nd curtain)
The fl ash fi res just before the
shutter closes to create trails
of light behind moving light
sources.
#FULL,
#1/4 etc.
Manual
For users who prefer manual operation. If you
press the INFO button, you can use the dial to
adjust the fl ash level.
4
Press the shutter button all the way.
51
EN
Basic operations
5
# Cautions
• In [!/#!(Red-eye reduction fl ash)], after the pre-fl ashes, it takes about 1 second
before the shutter is released. Do not move the camera until shooting is complete.
• [!/#!(Red-eye reduction fl ash)] may not work effectively under some shooting
conditions.
• When the fl ash fi res, the shutter speed is set to 1/320 sec. or slower. When shooting
a subject against a bright background with the fi ll-in fl ash, the background may be
overexposed.
Flash modes that can be set by shooting mode
Shooting
mode
LV super
control
panel
Flash mode
Flash
timing
Conditions for
fi ring the fl ash
Shutter
speed
limit
P/A
#AUTO
Auto fl ash
1st
curtain
Fires automatically
in dark/backlit
conditions
1/30 sec. –
1/320 sec.*
!
Auto fl ash
(red-eye reduction)
#
Fill-in fl ash Always fi res
30 sec. –
1/320 sec.*
$
Flash off
kk k
!
SLOW
Slow synchronization
(red-eye reduction)
1st
curtain
Fires automatically
in dark/backlit
conditions
60 sec. –
1/320 sec.*
#SLOW
Slow synchronization
(1st curtain)
#
SLOW2
Slow synchronization
(2nd curtain)
2nd
curtain
S/M
#
Fill-in fl ash
1st
curtain
Always fi res
60 sec. –
1/320 sec.*
#!
Fill-in fl ash
(red-eye reduction)
$
Flash off
kk k
#
2nd-C
Fill-in fl ash/Slow
synchronization
(2nd curtain)
2nd
curtain
Always fi res
60 sec. –
1/320 sec.*
• #AUTO, $ can be set in A mode.
* 1/250 sec. when using an separately sold external fl ash unit
Minimum range
The lens may cast shadows over objects close to
the camera, causing vignetting, or be too bright
even at minimum output.
Lens
Approximate distance at
which vignetting occurs
14 – 42 mm 0.25 m
17 mm 0.25 m
40 – 150 mm 0.9 m
14 – 150 mm 0.5 m
12 – 50 mm 0.45 m
12 – 40 mm
3.2 m (when focal length is
12 mm)
0.7 m (when focal length is
14 mm or above)
• External fl ash units can be used to prevent vignetting. To prevent photographs from being
overexposed, select mode A or M and choose a high f-number, or reduce ISO sensitivity.
52
EN
Basic operations
5
Choosing a focus target (AF Area)
Choose which of the 81 autofocus targets will be used for autofocus.
1
Press the arrow pad or Fn1 button to display the AF targets.
2
Rotate the dial to choose the AF position.
• “All targets” mode is restored if you move the cursor off the screen.
All Targets
Single Target
All Targets
The camera automatically
chooses from the full set of
focus targets.
Select the focus target
manually.
Differences in target display depending on lens
The target display will differ depending on the lens you are using.
When using a Micro Four Thirds system lens, 81 AF targets will be
displayed.
When using a Four Thirds system lens, 37 AF targets will be
displayed.
Setting the AF target
You can change the target selection method and target size. You can also select Face
priority AF (P. 53).
1
Press the INFO button during AF target selection and choose a selection
method using FG.
INFO
ii
o
FG
ii
o
(All Targets)
The camera automatically selects all AF targets.
I
(Single Target)
You select a single AF target.
K
(Small Target)
The AF target can be reduced in size.
J
(Group Target)
The camera automatically chooses from the targets in the
selected group.
# Cautions
• Reverts to “Single Target” when shooting movies.
53
EN
Basic operations
5
Face priority AF/pupil detection AF
The camera detects faces and adjusts focus and digital ESP.
1
Press the Fn1 button to display the AF target.
2
Press the INFO button.
• You can change the AF target selection method.
3
Use HI to select an option and press Q.
ii
o
Selection method
J
Face Priority Off Face priority off.
I
Face Priority On Face priority on.
K
Face & Eye Priority On
The autofocus system selects the pupil of the eye
closest to the camera for face-priority AF.
L
Face & R. Eye Priority On
The autofocus system selects the pupil of the eye on
the right for face-priority AF.
M
Face & L. Eye Priority On
The autofocus system selects the pupil of the eye on
the left for face-priority AF.
4
Point the camera at your subject.
• When shooting using the viewfi nder, look through the
viewfi nder.
• If a face is detected, it will be indicated by a white
border.
5
Press the shutter button halfway to focus.
• When the camera focuses on the face in the white
border, the border will turn green.
• If the camera is able to detect the subject’s eyes, it will
display a green frame over the selected eye.
(pupil detection AF)
6
Press the shutter button the rest of the way down to
shoot.
01:02:0301:02:03
10231023
250250 F5.6
P
0.00.0
RR
Wi-Fi
L
N
S-IS AUTO
S-IS AUTO
ISO-A
200
FullHD
F
01:02:0301:02:03
10231023
250250 F5.6
P
0.00.0
RR
Wi-Fi
L
N
S-IS AUTO
S-IS AUTO
ISO-A
200
FullHD
F
# Cautions
• Face priority applies only to the fi rst shot in each sequence taken during sequential
shooting.
• Depending on the subject and the art fi lter setting, the camera may not be able to correctly
detect the face.
• When set to [p (Digital ESP metering)], metering is performed with priority given to
faces.
• When using a Four Thirds system lens, even if a face is detected, if it is outside the AF
area, the face priority AF will not operate.
$ Notes
• Face priority is also available in [MF]. Faces detected by the camera are indicated by
white frames.
54
EN
Basic operations
5
Zoom frame AF/zoom AF
You can zoom in on a portion of the frame when adjusting focus. Choosing a high
zoom ratio allows you to use autofocus to focus on a smaller area than is normally
covered by the AF target. You can also position the focus target more precisely.
01:02:0301:02:03
3030
250250 F5.6
0.00.0
RR
Wi-Fi
L
N
S-IS AUTO
S-IS AUTO
ISO-A
200
FullHD
F
Shooting display
01:02:0301:02:03
3030
250250 F5.6
0.0
0.0
RR
Wi-Fi
L
N
S-IS AUTO
S-IS AUTO
ISO-A
200
FullHD
F
Zoom frame AF Zoom AF
U
U
U
U
U
U
Q / U
(Press and hold)
1
Assign [U] to one of the buttons in advance using [Button Function] (P. 99).
• a can also be set as a multi-function button.
2
Press the U button to display the zoom frame.
• If the camera was focused using autofocus just before the button was pressed, the
zoom frame will be displayed at the current focus position.
• Use FGHI to position the zoom frame.
• Press the INFO button and use FG to choose the zoom ratio.
Comparison of AF and zoom frames
14×
10×
7×
5×
3
Press the U button again to zoom in on the zoom frame.
• Use FGHI to position the zoom frame.
• Rotate the dial to choose the zoom ratio.
4
Press the shutter button halfway to initiate autofocus.
• The camera will focus using the subject in the frame at the center of the screen. To
change the focus position, move it by touching the screen.
$ Notes
• You can also display and move the zoom frame using touch screen operations.
# Cautions
• Zoom is visible only in the monitor and has no effect on the resulting photographs.
• When you are using a Four Thirds system lens, the AF will not operate with during zoom
display.
55
EN
Basic operations
5
Sequential shooting/using the self timer
Keep the shutter button pressed all the way down to take a series of photos.
Alternatively, you can take pictures using the self timer.
1
Set the lever to position 1 and press the jYHDR button to display the
selection items.
2
Turn the rear dial and select an item.
o
Single-frame
shooting
Shoots 1 frame at a time when the shutter button is pressed
(normal shooting mode).
T
Sequential H
Photographs are taken at about 10 frames per second (fps) while
the shutter button is pressed all the way down. Focus, exposure,
and white balance are fi xed at the values for the fi rst shot in each
series ([S-AF], [MF]).
S
Sequential L
Photographs are taken at about 6.5 frames per second (fps)
while the shutter button is pressed all the way down. Focus and
exposure are fi xed according to the options selected for [AF
Mode] (P. 73) and [AEL/AFL] (P. 98).
Y12s
Self-timer
12 SEC
Press the shutter button halfway to focus, the rest of the way
down to start the timer. First, the self-timer lamp lights up for
approximately 10 seconds, then it blinks for approximately 2
seconds and the picture is taken.
Y2s
Self-timer
2 SEC
Press the shutter button halfway to focus, the rest of the
way down to start the timer. The self-timer lamp blinks for
approximately 2 seconds, and then the picture is taken.
YC
Self-timer
Custom
Set the number of frames to be shot. Select g, press the INFO
button, and rotate the dial.
$ Notes
• To cancel the activated self-timer, press the jYHDR button.
• In [S-AF] and [MF] focus modes, focus and exposure will be fi xed at the values for the fi rst
frame in each sequence.
# Cautions
• When you are using S, no confi rmation image is displayed during shooting. The
image is displayed again after shooting ends. When you are using T, the image shot
immediately before is displayed.
• The speed of sequential shooting varies depending on the lens you are using and the
focus of the zoom lens.
• During sequential shooting, if the battery check blinks due to low battery, the camera
stops shooting and starts saving the pictures you have taken on the card. The camera
may not save all of the pictures depending on how much battery power remains.
• Fix the camera securely on a tripod for self-timer shooting.
• If you stand in front of the camera to press the shutter button halfway when using the self-
timer, the photograph may be out of focus.
56
EN
Basic operations
5
Adjusting color (white balance)
White balance (WB) ensures that white objects in images recorded by the camera
appear white. [AUTO] is suitable in most circumstances, but other values can be
selected according to the light source when [AUTO] fails to produce the desired results
or you wish to introduce a deliberate color cast into your images.
1
Set the lever to position 2, and turn the rear dial to
select items.
Lever
Rear dial
WB
AUTO
WBWBWB
AUTOAUTOAUTO
ISO-A
200
ISO-AISO-AISO-A
200200200
AUTOAUTO
AUTOAUTO
P
WB Auto
AUTOAUTO
AUTOAUTO
250 F5.6 0.0
LOWLOW
200200
250250 320320 400400 500500
Recommend
WB mode
Color
temperature
Light conditions
Auto white
balance
AUTO
k
Used for most light conditions (when there is a
white portion framed on the monitor). Use this
mode for general use.
Preset white
balance
5
5300K
For shooting outdoors on a clear day, or to
capture the reds in a sunset or the colors in a
fi reworks display
N
7500K
For shooting outdoors in the shadows on a clear
day
O
6000K For shooting outdoors on a cloudy day
1
3000K For shooting under a tungsten light
>
4000K For subjects lit by fl uorescent lights
U
k
For underwater photography
n
5500K For fl ash shooting
One-touch
white balance
(P. 57)
P/Q/
W/X
Color
temperature
set by one-
touch WB.
Choose when a white or gray subject can be
used to measure white balance and the subject
is under mixed lighting or lit by an unknown type
of fl ash or other light source.
Custom white
balance
CWB
2000K –
14000K
After pressing the INFO button, use HI
buttons to select a color temperature and then
press Q.
57
EN
Basic operations
5
One-touch white balance
Measure white balance by framing a piece of paper or other white object under the lighting
that will be used in the fi nal photograph. This is useful when shooting a subject under natural
light, as well as under various light sources with different color temperatures.
1
Prepare a neutral-colored paper, such as white or gray.
• Frame the object so that it fi lls the display and no shadows fall it.
2
Shoot while pressing the Y (one-touch white balance) button.
• You can also shoot after selecting P, Q, W, or X from the white balance
options screen and then pressing INFO.
3
Select from P, Q, W, or X and register.
• If it is already selected in the white balance menu, select [Yes] and press the Q
button.
• The new value is saved as a preset white balance option.
• The new value is stored until one-touch white balance is measured again. Turning the
power off does not erase the data.
% Tips
• If the subject is too bright or too dark or visibly tinted, the message [WB NG Retry] will be
displayed and no value will be recorded. Correct the problem and repeat the process from
Step 1.
ISO sensitivity
Increasing ISO sensitivity increases noise (graininess) but allows photographs to be
taken when lighting is poor. The setting recommended in most situations is [AUTO],
which starts at ISO 200 — a value that balances noise and dynamic range — and then
adjusts ISO sensitivity according to shooting conditions.
1
Set the lever to position 2, and turn the front dial to select items.
Lever
Front dial
AUTO
The sensitivity is set automatically according to the shooting
conditions.
LOW, 200 – 25600 Sensitivity is set to the selected value.
58
EN
Basic operations
5
Controlling color (Color Creator)
You can adjust the color of the subject while looking through the viewfi nder. Select this
function with the multi-function button to use it.
Set the multi-function button to c (Color Creator) in advance (P. 23).
1
While looking through the viewfi nder, press the Fn2 button.
• An options screen will be displayed in the viewfi nder.
Fn2 button
2
Set hue using the front dial and saturation using the rear dial.
• The settings are stored under picture mode.
# Cautions
• The white balance is fi xed to AUTO.
• When the image quality mode is set to [RAW], the image is recorded in RAW+JPEG.
59
EN
Basic operations
5
HDR photography
The camera shoots several images and automatically combines them into an HDR
image. You can also shoot several images and perform HDR imaging on a computer
(HDR bracketing photography).
1
Set the lever to position 1 and press the jYHDR button to display the
selection items.
• A menu will be displayed on the screen.
HDR button
Lever
AUTOAUTO
oo
TT
S
S
Y
12s
Y
12s
Y
2s
Y
2s
Y
c
Y
c
P
HDR
OFFOFF
3F
2.0EV
3F3F3F
2.0EV2.0EV2.0EV
HDR1HDR1 HDR2HDR2
7F
2.0EV
7F7F7F
2.0EV2.0EV2.0EV
5F
2.0EV
5F5F5F
2.0EV2.0EV2.0EV
3F
3.0EV
3F3F3F
3.0EV3.0EV3.0EV
jY
oo
When shooting using live view
2
Turn the front dial to select a setting.
HDR1
Four shots are taken, each with a different exposure, and the
shots are combined into one HDR image inside the camera.
HDR2 provides a more impressive image than HDR1. ISO
sensitivity is fi xed to 200. Also, the slowest available shutter
speed is 1 second and the longest available exposure is 4
seconds.
HDR2
3F 2.0EV
HDR bracketing is performed. Select the number of images and
the exposure difference.
HDR imaging processing is not performed.
5F 2.0EV
7F 2.0EV
3F 3.0EV
5F 3.0EV
3
Shoot.
• When you press the shutter button, the camera automatically shoots the set number
of images.
• While shooting, a simply composed image will be displayed on the monitor or in the
viewfi nder.
# Cautions
• In the case of HDR1 and HDR2, exposure compensation is not available.
• If you shoot with a slower shutter speed, there may be more noticeable noise.
• Attach the camera to a tripod or other stabilizing item and then shoot.
• The image displayed on the monitor or in the viewfi nder while shooting will differ from the
HDR-processed image.
• In the case of HDR1 and HDR2, the HDR-processed image will be saved as a JPEG fi le.
When the image quality mode is set to [RAW], the image is recorded in RAW+JPEG. The
only image recorded in RAW is the image with suitable exposure.
• If set to HDR1/HDR2, the picture mode is fi xed to [Natural] and the color setting is fi xed to
[sRGB]. [Full-time AF] does not operate.
• Flash photography, bracketing, multiple exposure and time lapse shooting cannot be used
at the same time as HDR photography.
60
EN
Basic operations
5
Information display during playback
Playback image information
Simplifi ed display Overall display
F5.6F5.6
+1.0+1.0
G+4G+4A+4A+4
AdobeAdobe
NaturalNatural
ISO 400ISO 400
250250
+2.0+2.0 45mm45mm
1/84608×3456
×10×10
4
:
3
L
N
3D3D
2013.10.01 12:30 15
100-0015
WB
AUTO
P
SD
AF
±0±0
o
l
m
n
p
r
q
k
j
stuwx
hg i
v
2013.10.01 12:30 15
100-0015
×10×10
4
:
3
L
N
3D3D
SD
f
0
a
4
15789
bcde
2
3
6
1 Battery check ..................................P. 16
2 Wi-Fi connection .....................P. 27, 119
3 Including GPS information ............P. 121
4 Eye-Fi upload complete ..................P. 98
5 Print reservation
Number of prints ...........................P. 112
6 Share order .....................................P. 62
7 Sound record ..................................P. 64
8 Protect ............................................P. 64
9 Image selected ...............................P. 33
0 File number .....................................P. 96
a Frame number
b Storage device ..............................P. 123
c Record mode ..................................P. 70
d Aspect ratio .....................................P. 69
e 3D image ........................................P. 45
f Date and time .................................P. 17
g Aspect border .................................P. 69
h AF target .........................................P. 52
i Shooting mode...................P. 18, 38 – 46
j Exposure compensation .................P. 49
k Shutter speed ..........................P. 38 – 41
l Aperture value .........................P. 38 – 41
m Focal length ..................................P. 128
n Flash intensity control .....................P. 71
o White balance compensation
p Color space.....................................P. 95
q Picture mode...................................P. 68
r Compression rate ...........................P. 70
s Pixel count ......................................P. 70
t ISO sensitivity .................................P. 57
u White balance .................................P. 56
v AF Focus adjustments ..................P. 107
w Metering mode ................................P. 72
x Histogram .......................................P. 37
Switching the information display
You can switch the information displayed in the monitor during playback using the
INFO button.
F5.6F5.6
±0.0±0.0
G±10G±10A±10A±10
AdobeAdobe
NaturalNatural
ISO 400ISO 400
250250
+2.0+2.0 45mm45mm
1/84032×3024
×10×10
4
:
3
L
N
2013.10.01 12:30 15
100-0015
WB
AUTO
P
AF
±0±0
2013.10.01 12:30 15
100-0015
4
:
3
L
N
×10×10
INFO
INFO
INFO
INFO
INFO
INFO
Overall display
Simplifi ed displayImage only
61
EN
Basic operations
5
Changing the playback information display method
Press the q button to view pictures full frame. Press the shutter button halfway to
return to shooting mode.
Index display/calendar display
25 frames
Index display
Q
q
p
q
p
Single-frame
playback
Calendar display
2013.10
Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat
29 30 1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9 10 11 12
13 14 15 16 17 18 19
20 21 22 23 24 25 26
27 28 29 30 31 1 2
3 4 5 6 7
29 30 1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9 10 11 12
13 14 15 16 17 18 19
20 21 22 23 24 25 26
27 28 29 30 31 1 2
3 4 5 6 7
2013.10.01 12:30 21
2013.10.01 12:30 20
100-0020
L
N
Playback zoom (close-up playback)
2× zoom
close-up playback
Single-frame
playback
14× zoom
2x
q
q
p
p
2013.10.01 12:30 20
100-0020
L
N
14x
Rear dial (o) Zoom in (p)/Index (q)
Front dial (r)
Previous (t)/Next (s)
Operation also available during close-up playback.
Arrow pad
(FGHI)
Single-frame playback: Next (I)/previous (H)/playback volume
(FG)
Close-up playback: Scroll image
You can display the next frame (I) or the
previous frame (H) during close-up playback
by pressing the INFO button.
Index/calendar playback: Highlight image
Fn1
Displays a zoom frame. Use touch operations to set the position
of the frame and press Fn1 to zoom in. To cancel, press Fn1.
INFO View image info
H
Select picture (P. 33)
AEL/AFL Protect picture (P. 32)
Delete picture (P. 33)
Q
View menus (in calendar playback, press this button to exit to
single-frame playback)
62
EN
Basic operations
5
Sharing images over Wi-Fi connection (Share Order)
You can connect the camera to a smartphone over wireless LAN (P. 119). Once the
smartphone is connected, you can use it view images stored on the card, and transfer
images between the camera and smartphone.
With [Share Order], you can select the images to share in advance.
1
On the playback screen, touch the screen.
• A touch menu will be displayed.
2
Select an image using a touch operation or HI and then touch h on the
touch menu.
• h is displayed on the images selected for sharing.
• To cancel the selection, touch h again.
3
Touch the screen to exit [Share Order].
• After an image has been selected for sharing, the selected image will be shared
when a Wi-Fi connection is established using [One-Time].
# Cautions
• You can set a share order on a maximum around 200 frames.
• Not available for [SD] or [HD] movies.
63
EN
Basic operations
5
Manipulating playback images
Press Q during playback to display a menu of simple options that can be used in
playback mode.
JPEG
m
R
Rotate
JPEG Edit
Back
Set
Share Order
Still image frame Movie frame
JPEG Edit, RAW Data Edit g P. 85, 86
—
Image Overlay g P. 87
—
Movie Play —
Share Order gP. 62
*
0 (Protect)
R (Audio recording)
—
Rotate
—
m (Slideshow)
Erase
* Not available for [SD] or [HD] movies.
Performing operations on a movie frame (Movie Play)
Q
Pause or resume playback.
• You can perform the following operations while playback is paused.
HIor dial
Previous/Next
Press and hold HI to continue the operation.
F
Display the fi rst frame.
G
Display the last frame.
H/I
Advance or rewind a movie.
F/G
Adjust volume.
# Cautions
• We recommend using the supplied PC software to play movies on a computer. Before
launching the software for the fi rst time, connect the camera to the computer.
64
EN
Basic operations
5
Protecting images
Protect images from accidental deletion. Display an image you
wish to protect and press Q to display the playback menu.
Select [0] and press Q, and then press F to protect the
image. Protected images are shown by a 0 (protect) icon.
Press G to remove protection. Press Q to save settings and
exit.
You can also protect multiple selected images. g Selecting
images
2013.10.01 12:30 20
100-0020
L
N
4
:
3
0 (protect) icon
# Cautions
• Formatting the card erases all images even if they have been protected.
Audio recording
Add an audio recording (up to 30 sec. long) to the current photograph.
1
Display the image to which you want to add an
audio recording and press Q.
• Audio recording is not available with protected images.
• Audio recording is also available in the playback menu.
2
Select [R] and press Q.
• To exit without adding a recording, select [No].
JPEG
m
R
Rotate
JPEG Edit
Back
Set
Share Order
3
Select [R Start] and press Q to begin recording.
• To stop recording part-way through, press Q.
4
Press Q to end recording.
• Images with audio recordings are indicated by a H icon.
• To delete a recording, select [Erase] in Step 2.
R
R
Start
No
Erase
Back Set
Rotate
Choose whether to rotate photographs.
1
Play the photograph back and press Q.
2
Select [Rotate] and press Q.
3
Press F to rotate the image counterclockwise, G to rotate it clockwise; the
image rotates each time the button is pressed.
• Press Q to save settings and exit.
• The rotated image is saved in its current orientation.
• Movies, 3D photos, and protected images cannot be rotated.
65
EN
Basic operations
5
Slideshow
This function displays images stored on the card one after another.
1
Press Q during playback and select [m].
JPEG
m
R
Rotate
JPEG Edit
Back
Set
Share Order
2
Adjust settings.
Start Start the slideshow. Images are displayed in order, starting with the
current picture.
BGM Set BGM or turn BGM [Off].
Slide Set type of slideshow to execute.
Slide Interval Choose the length of time each slide is displayed from 2 to 10
seconds.
Movie Interval Select [Full] to include full-length movie clips in the slideshow,
[Short] to include only the opening portion of each clip.
3
Select [Start] and press Q.
• The slideshow will start.
• Press Q to stop the slideshow.
Volume
Press FG during the slideshow to adjust the overall volume of the camera speaker.
Press HI to adjust the balance between the background music and the sound recorded
with photographs or movies.
$ Notes
• You can change [Joy] to different BGM. Record the data downloaded from the Olympus
website onto the card, select [Joy] from [BGM] in step 2, and press I. Visit the following
website for the download.
http://support.olympus-imaging.com/bgmdownload/
66
EN
Using shooting options
6
6
Using shooting options
Reducing camera shake (image stabilizer)
You can reduce the amount of camera shake that can occur when shooting in low light
situations or shooting with high magnifi cation. The image stabilizer starts when you
press the shutter button halfway.
1
Press the Q button and select the image stabilizer.
250250 F5.6
i
NORM
ISO
AUTO
AUTO
WB
AUTO
4:3
01:02:0301:02:03
10231023
IS Mode
When shooting using
the viewfi nder
When shooting using
live view
WB
AUTO
WBWBWB
AUTOAUTOAUTO
L
N
4:3
j
WB
AUTO
WBWBWB
AUTOAUTOAUTO
mmmm5050
S-ISS-IS S-ISS-IS
OFFOFF
S-IS AUTOS-IS AUTO
S-IS AUTO
S-IS AUTO
S-ISS-IS
FullHD
F
P
Focal Length
Auto
2
Select an item using the front dial and press the Q button.
Still
picture
OFF S-I.S. Off
Image stabilizer is off.
S-IS1 Auto
Image stabilizer is on.
S-IS2 Vertical IS
Image stabilization applies only to vertical
(Y) camera shake. Use when panning the
camera horizontally.
S-IS3 Horizontal IS
Image stabilization applies only to horizontal
(Z) camera shake. Use when panning the
camera horizontally with the camera held in
portrait orientation.
S-IS AUTO
Landscape
Panning I.S.
The camera detects the panning direction and
applies the appropriate image stabilization.
Movie
OFF M-I.S. Off
Image stabilizer is off.
ON Movie-I.S.
In addition to Auto image stabilization, camera
shake that occurs when shooting while
walking is also reduced.
Choosing a focal length (Micro Four Thirds/Four Thirds System lenses excluded)
Use focal length information to reduce camera shake when shooting with lenses that are not
Micro Four Thirds or Four Thirds system lenses.
• Select [Image Stabilizer], press the INFO button, use HI to select a focal length, and
press Q.
• Choose a focal length between 8 mm and 1000 mm.
• Choose the value that most closely matches to the one that is printed on the lens.
67
EN
Using shooting options
6
# Cautions
• The image stabilizer cannot correct excessive camera shake or camera shake that occurs
when the shutter speed is set to the slowest speed. In these cases, it is recommended
that you use a tripod.
• When using a tripod, set [Image Stabilizer] to [OFF].
• When using a lens with an image stabilization function switch, priority is given to the lens
side setting.
• When priority is being given to the lens side image stabilization and the camera side is set
to [S-IS-AUTO], [S-IS1] is used instead of [S-IS-AUTO].
• You may notice an operating sound or vibration when the image stabilizer is activated.
68
EN
Using shooting options
6
Processing options (picture mode)
Select a picture mode and make individual adjustments to contrast, sharpness, and
other parameters (P. 78). Changes to each picture mode are stored separately.
1
Press the Q button and select [Picture Mode].
250250 F5.6
i
NORM
ISO
AUTO
AUTO
WB
AUTO
4:3
01:02:0301:02:03
10231023
Picture Mode
When shooting using the
viewfi nder
When shooting using live
view
P
Natural
WB
AUTO
WBWBWB
AUTOAUTOAUTO
L
N
4:3
M C
jj
i
h
jj
j
44
j
55
S-IS AUTOS-IS AUTO
FullHD
F
2
Select an item using the front dial and press the Q button.
h
i-Enhance Produces more impressive-looking results suited to the scene.
i
Vivid Produces vivid colors.
j
Natural Produces natural colors.
Z
Muted Produces fl at tones.
a
Portrait Produces beautiful skin tones.
J
Monotone Produces black and white tone.
K
Custom
Select one picture mode, set the parameters, and register the
setting.
v
e-Portrait
Produces smooth skin textures. Cannot be used with bracket
photography or when shooting movies.
c
Color Creator Produces colors set using color creator (P. 58).
j
Pop Art
Choose an art fi lter and select the desired effect.
k
Soft Focus
l
Pale&Light Color
m
Light Tone
n
Grainy Film
o
Pin Hole
s
Diorama
t
Cross Process
u
Gentle Sepia
v
Dramatic Tone
Y
Key Line
Z
Watercolor
69
EN
Using shooting options
6
Adding effects to a movie
You can create movies that take advantage of the effects available in still photography
mode. Set the dial to
n
to enable the settings.
1
Set the shooting mode to
n
, press the Q button,
and use the rear dial to select a shooting mode
item.
PP
P
P
WB
AUTO
WBWBWB
AUTOAUTOAUTO
n
PP
AA SS MM
PP
S-AFS-AF
j
M-IS ONM-IS ON
FullHD
F
Program Auto
2
Switch the shooting mode using the front dial and press the Q button.
P Optimal aperture is set automatically according to the brightness of the subject.
A
Depiction of background is changed by setting the aperture. Use the rear dial to
adjust the aperture.
S
Shutter speed affects how the subject appears. Use the rear dial to adjust the
shutter speed. Shutter speed can be set to values between 1/30 s and 1/4000 s.
M
You control both aperture and shutter speed. Use the front dial to choose the
aperture, the rear dial to select the shutter speed from values between 1/30 s and
1/4000 s. Sensitivity can be set manually to values between ISO 200 and 3200;
auto ISO sensitivity control is not available.
# Cautions
• When recording a movie, you cannot change the settings for exposure compensation,
aperture value, and shutter speed.
• If [Image Stabilizer] is activated while recording a movie, the recorded image is enlarged
slightly.
• Stabilization is not possible when the camera shake is excessive.
• When the inside of the camera becomes hot, shooting is automatically stopped to protect
the camera.
• With some art fi lters, [C-AF] operation is limited.
• Cards with an SD speed class of 6 or above are recommended for movie recording.
Setting the image aspect
You can change the aspect ratio (horizontal-to-vertical ratio) when taking pictures.
Depending on your preference, you can set the aspect ratio to [4:3] (standard), [16:9],
[3:2], [1:1], or [3:4].
1
Press the Q button and select an aspect ratio.
2
Select a setting using the front dial and press the Q button.
# Cautions
• JPEG images are cropped to the selected aspect ratio; RAW images, however, are not
cropped but are instead saved with information on the selected aspect ratio.
• When RAW images are played back, the selected aspect ratio is shown by a frame.
70
EN
Using shooting options
6
Image quality (record mode)
Select an image quality for photographs and movies according their intended use, for
example retouching on a computer or display on the web.
1
Press the Q button and select an image quality for photographs or movies.
250250 F5.6
i
NORM
ISO
AUTO
AUTO
WB
AUTO
4:3
01:02:0301:02:03
10231023
K
When shooting using
the viewfi nder
When shooting using
live view
L
F
4:3
P
WB
AUTO
WBWBWB
AUTOAUTOAUTO
S-IS AUTOS-IS AUTO
RAWRAW
L M
N
S
N
3838
L
F+
RAW
F+F+F+
RAWRAWRAW
NN
N
FullHD
F
4608x3456
Record mode
2
Select an item using the front dial and press the Q button.
Record modes (still images)
Choose from RAW and JPEG (YF, YN, XN, and WN) modes. Choose a RAW+JPEG option
to record both a RAW and a JPEG image with each shot. JPEG modes combine image size
(Y, X, and W) and compression ratio (SF, F, N, and B).
Image size Compression rate
Application
Name Pixel count
SF
(Super
Fine)
F
(Fine)
N
(Normal)
B
(Basic)
Y (Large)
4608×3456*
YSF YF* YN* YB
Select for the
print size
X (Middle)
3200×2400
XSF XF XN* XB
2560×1920*
1920×1440
1600×1200
W (Small)
1280×960*
WSF WF WN* WB
For small prints
and use on a
website
1024×768
640×480
* Default
RAW image data
This format (extension “.ORF”) stores unprocessed image data for later processing. RAW
image data cannot be viewed using other cameras or software, and RAW images cannot
be selected for printing. JPEG copies of RAW images can be created using this camera.
g “Editing still images” (P. 85)
71
EN
Using shooting options
6
Record modes (movies)
Record mode Pixel count File format Application
Full HD Fine 1920×1080
MPEG-4 AVC/
H.264*
1
Display on TVs and other
devices
Full HD Normal 1920×1080
HD Fine 1280×720
HD Normal 1280×720
HD 1280×720
Motion JPEG*
2
For computer playback or
editing
SD 640×480
• Depending on the type of card used, recording may end before the maximum length is
reached.
*1 Individual movies can be up to 29 minutes long.
*2 Files may be up to 2GB in size.
Adjusting fl ash output (fl ash intensity control)
Flash output can be adjusted if you fi nd that your subject to appears overexposed, or is
underexposed even though the exposure in the rest of the frame is just right.
1
Set the lever to position 2 and press the AFm button.
AFm button
Lever
P
Flash Auto
AUTOAUTO
00
0.0
2
Select an item using the front dial and press the Q button.
# Cautions
• This setting has no effect when the fl ash control mode for the external fl ash unit is set to
MANUAL.
• Changes to fl ash intensity made with the external fl ash unit are added to those made with
the camera.
72
EN
Using shooting options
6
Choosing how the camera measures brightness (metering)
Choose how the camera meters subject brightness.
1
Set the lever to position 1 and press the AFm button.
• You can also press the Q button to select metering.
AFm button
Lever
AUTOAUTO
P
ESP
HIHI SHSH
Single AF
S-AFS-AF
C-AFC-AF
MFMF
S-AFS-AF
MF
C-AFC-AF
TR
S-AFS-AF
2
Turn the front dial to select an item.
p
Digital ESP
metering
The camera meters exposure in 324 areas of the frame and
optimizes exposure for the current scene or (if an option other
than [OFF] is selected for [I Face Priority]) portrait subject.
This mode is recommended for general use.
H
Center weighted
averaging
metering
This metering mode provides the average
metering between the subject and the
background lighting, placing more weight on
the subject at the center.
I
Spot metering
Choose this option to meter a small area (about
2% of the frame) with the camera pointed at
the object you wish to meter. Exposure will be
adjusted according to the brightness at the
metered point.
IHI
Spot metering -
highlight
Increases spot metering exposure. Ensures bright subjects
appear bright.
ISH
Spot metering -
shadow
Lowers spot metering exposure. Ensures dark subjects appear
dark.
3
Press the shutter button halfway.
• Normally, the camera will start metering when the shutter button is pressed halfway
and lock exposure while the shutter button is held in this position.
73
EN
Using shooting options
6
Choosing a focus mode (AF mode)
Select a focusing method (focus mode).
You can choose separate focusing methods for still photography mode and
n
mode.
1
Set the lever to position 1 and press the AFm button.
• You can also press the Q button to select AF mode.
AFm button
Lever
AUTOAUTO
P
ESP
HIHI SHSH
Single AF
S-AFS-AF
C-AFC-AF
MFMF
S-AFS-AF
MF
C-AFC-AF
TR
S-AFS-AF
2
Turn the rear dial to select an item.
• The selected AF mode is displayed on the monitor.
S-AF (single AF)
The camera focuses once when the shutter button is pressed
halfway. When the focus is locked, a beep sounds, and the AF
confi rmation mark and the AF target mark light up. This mode is
suitable for taking pictures of still subjects or subjects with limited
movement.
C-AF
(continuous AF)
The camera repeats focusing while the shutter button remains
pressed halfway. When the subject is in focus, the AF confi rmation
mark lights up on the monitor and the beep sounds when the focus
is locked at the fi rst and second time.
Even if the subject moves or you change the composition of the
picture, the camera continues trying to focus.
MF
(manual focus)
This function allows you to manually
focus on any subject.
Near
)
Focus ring
S-AF+MF
(simultaneous use of
S-AF mode and MF
mode)
After pressing the shutter button halfway to focus in [S-AF] mode,
you can turn the focus ring to fi ne-adjust focus manually.
C-AF+TR
(AF tracking)
Press the shutter button halfway to focus; the camera then tracks
and maintains focus on the current subject while the shutter button
is held in this position.
• The AF target is displayed in red if the camera can no longer track
the subject. Release the shutter button and then frame the subject
again and press the shutter button halfway.
• With a Four Thirds system lens, the tracking range narrows. If
the AF target is displayed in red, AF does not operate even if the
subject is tracked.
# Cautions
• The camera may be unable to focus if the subject is poorly lit, obscured by mist or smoke,
or lacks contrast.
• When using a Four Thirds system lens, the AF will not operate while recording movies.
74
EN
Using shooting options
6
Movie sound options (recording sound with movies)
1
Press the Q button when shooting with live view and select a movie sound.
When shooting using
live view
ONON
RR
n
RR
OFFOFF
ONON
ii
ISO
AUTO
ISOISOISO
AUTOAUTOAUTO
RR
Movie
R
On
2
Switch ON/OFF using the front dial and press the Q button.
# Cautions
• When recording sound in a movie, the sound made by the lens and camera operating
may be recorded. If desired, you can reduce these sounds by shooting with [AF Mode]
set to [S-AF], or by limiting the amount of times you press the buttons. You can use an
external microphone.
• No sound is recorded in s (Diorama) mode.
75
EN
Menu functions (Basic operations)
7
7
Basic menu operations
The menus contain shooting and playback options that are not displayed by the live
control, and let you customize the camera settings for easier use.
W
Preliminary and basic shooting options
X
Advanced shooting options
q
Playback and retouch options
c
Customizing camera settings (P. 90)
#
Accessory port menu options for accessory port devices such as EVF and
OLYMPUS PENPAL (P. 108)*
d
Camera setup (e.g., date and language)
* Not displayed at default settings.
1
Press the MENU button to display the menus.
j
4:3
D
1
Shooting Menu 1
Card Setup
Reset/Myset
Picture Mode
Image Aspect
Back
Set
2
Digital Tele-converter Off
Press Q to confi rm the
setting
Operation guide
Press the MENU button
to go back one screen
Tab
2
Use FG to select a tab and press Q.
3
Select an item using FG and press Q to display options for the
selected item.
1
oj/Y
2
Time Lapse Settings Off
Back
Shooting Menu 2
Image Stabilizer
Bracketing
HDR Off
Set
Multiple Exposure
#
RC Mode Off
Off
Off
The current setting is displayed
Function
Q
1
Off
Time Lapse Settings Off
Back
Shooting Menu 2
Image Stabilizer
Bracketing
HDR
j/Y
Off
Set
2
Multiple Exposure
#
RC Mode Off
Off
Y
12s
o
Y
2
s
T
S
Y
C
4
Use FG to highlight an option and press Q to select.
• Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit the menu.
$ Notes
• For the default settings of each option, refer to “Menu directory” (P. 142).
• A guide is displayed for about 2 seconds after you select an option. Press the INFO
button to view or hide guides.
Menu functions
76
EN
Menu functions (Shooting menus)
7
Using Shooting Menu 1/Shooting Menu 2
j
4:3
D
1
Shooting Menu 1
Card Setup
Reset/Myset
Picture Mode
Image Aspect
Back
Set
2
Digital Tele-converter Off
W
Card Setup (P. 76)
Reset/Myset (P. 77)
Picture Mode (P. 78)
K (P. 79)
Image Aspect (P. 69)
Digital Tele-converter (P. 84)
X j/Y (Sequential shooting/Self-timer)
(P. 55, 79)
Image Stabilizer (P. 66)
Bracketing (P. 80)
HDR (P. 84)
Multiple Exposure (P. 82)
Time Lapse Settings (P. 83)
# RC Mode (P. 84)
Formatting the card (Card Setup)
Cards must be formatted with this camera before fi rst use or after being used with
other cameras or computers.
All data stored on the card, including protected images, is erased when the card is
formatted.
When formatting a used card, confi rm there are no images that you still want to keep
on the card. g “Usable cards” (P. 123)
1
Select [Card Setup] in W Shooting Menu 1.
2
Select [Format].
All Erase
Format
Card Setup
Back
Set
3
Select [Yes] and press Q.
• Formatting is performed.
77
EN
Menu functions (Shooting menus)
7
Restoring default settings (Reset/Myset)
Camera settings can be easily restored to registered settings.
Using reset settings
Restore default settings.
1
Select [Reset/Myset] in W Shooting Menu 1.
2
Select [Reset] and press Q.
• Highlight [Reset] and press I to choose the reset type.
To reset all settings except the time, date, and a few
others, highlight [Full] and press Q.
g “Menu directory” (P. 142)
3
Select [Yes] and press Q.
Reset/Myset
Reset
Myset1
Myset2
Myset3
Myset4 No Data
No Data
No Data
No Data
Basic
Back
Set
Saving Myset
You can save the current camera settings for modes other than shooting mode. Saved
settings can be called up in P, A, S, and M modes.
1
Adjust settings in order to save.
2
Select [Reset/Myset] in W Shooting Menu 1.
3
Select the desired destination ([Myset1]–[Myset4]) and press I.
• [Set] appears next to destinations ([Myset1]–[Myset4]) to which settings have already
been saved. Selecting [Set] again overwrites the registered setting.
• To cancel the registration, select [Reset].
4
Select [Set] and press Q.
• Settings that can be saved to Myset g “Menu directory” (P. 142)
Using Myset
Sets the camera to the settings selected for Myset.
1
Select [Reset/Myset] in W Shooting Menu 1.
2
Select the desired settings ([Myset1]–[Myset4]) and
press Q.
3
Select [Set] and press Q.
Reset/Myset
Reset
Myset1
Myset2
Myset3
Myset4 Set
Set
Set
Set
Basic
Back
Set
78
EN
Menu functions (Shooting menus)
7
Processing options (Picture Mode)
You can make individual adjustments to contrast, sharpness and other parameters in
[Picture Mode] (P. 68) settings. Changes to each picture mode are stored separately.
1
Select [Picture Mode] in W Shooting Menu 1.
j
4:3
D
1
2
Shooting Menu 1
Card Setup
Reset/Myset
Picture Mode
Image Aspect
Back
Set
Digital Tele-converter Off
2
Select an option with FG and press Q.
3
Press I to display settings for the selected option.
h i-aJ K
Contrast Distinction between light and dark
Sharpness Sharpness of the image
Saturation Vividness of the color
k
Gradation Adjust tone (gradation).
Auto
Divides the image into detailed
regions and adjusts the brightness
separately for each region. This is
effective for images with areas of
large contrast in which the whites
appear too bright or the blacks
appear too dark.
Normal Use [Normal] mode for general uses.
High Key Gradation for a bright subject.
Low Key Gradation for a dark subject.
Effect
(i-Enhance)
Sets the extent that the effect will be
applied.
kk
B&W Filter
(Monotone)
Creates a black and white image.
The fi lter color is brightened and the
complementary color is darkened.
kk
N:Neutral
Creates a normal black and white
image.
Ye:Yellow
Reproduces clearly defi ned white
cloud with natural blue sky.
Or:Orange
Slightly emphasizes colors in blue
skies and sunsets.
R:Red
Strongly emphasizes colors in blue
skies and brightness of crimson
foliage.
G:Green
Strongly emphasizes colors in red lips
and green leaves.
79
EN
Menu functions (Shooting menus)
7
h i-aJ K
Pict. Tone
(Monotone)
Colors the black and white image.
kk
N:Neutral
Creates a normal black and white
image.
S:Sepia Sepia
B:Blue Bluish
P:Purple Purplish
G:Green Greenish
# Cautions
• Changes to contrast have no effect at settings other than [Normal].
Image quality (K)
Select an image quality. You can select a separate image quality for photographs and
movies. This is the same as the [K] item in [Live Control].
• You can change the JPEG image size and compression ratio combination, and [X] and
[W] pixel counts. [K Set], [Pixel Count] g “Using the custom menus” (P. 90)
Setting the self timer (j/Y)
You can customize the self timer operation.
1
Select [j/Y] in X Shooting Menu 2.
1
oj/Y
2
Time Lapse Settings Off
Back
Shooting Menu 2
Image Stabilizer
Bracketing
HDR Off
Set
Multiple Exposure
#
RC Mode Off
Off
Off
2
Select [YC] (custom) and press I.
3
Use FG to select the item and press I.
• Use FG to select the setting and press Q.
Frame Sets the number of frames to be shot.
Y Timer
Sets the time after the shutter button is pressed until the picture
is taken.
Interval Time
Sets the shooting interval for the second and subsequent
frames.
80
EN
Menu functions (Shooting menus)
7
Varying settings over a series of photographs (bracketing)
“Bracketing” refers to the act of varying settings automatically over a series of shots
or a series of images to “bracket” the current value. You can store bracket shooting
settings and turn bracket shooting off.
1
Select [Bracketing] in X Shooting Menu 2 and
press Q.
oj/Y
1
2
Time Lapse Settings Off
Off
Back
Shooting Menu 2
Image Stabilizer
Bracketing
HDR Off
Set
Multiple Exposure
#
RC Mode Off
Off
2
After selecting [On], press I and select a bracket
shooting type.
• When you select bracket shooting, t appears on the
screen.
AE BKT
WB BKT
FL BKT
ISO BKT
ART BKT
--
--
--
3f 1.0EV
A-- G--
Bracketing
Back
Set
3
Press I, select settings for parameters such as the number of shots, and
then press the Q button.
• Continue to press the Q button until you return to the screen in step 1.
• If you select [Off] in step 2, bracket shooting settings will be saved and you can shoot
normally.
% Tips
• You can also use button operations for bracket settings. Set the lever to position 2 and
turn the dial while pressing the jYHDR button. Select the bracket shooting type
using the front dial and the number of shots and other parameters using the rear dial.
After performing the settings, you can switch between bracket photography and normal
photography each time you press the jYHDR button.
# Cautions
• Cannot be used during HDR photography.
• Cannot be used at the same time as multiple exposure and time lapse shooting.
AE BKT (AE bracketing)
The camera varies the exposure of each shot. The modifi cation amount can be selected from
0.3 EV, 0.7 EV, or 1.0 EV. In single-frame shooting mode, one photograph is taken each time
the shutter button is pressed all the way down, while in sequential shooting mode the camera
continues to take shots in the following order while the shutter button is pressed all the way
down: no modifi cation, negative, positive. Number of shots: 2, 3, 5, or 7
• The t indicator turns green during bracketing.
• The camera modifi es exposure by varying aperture and
shutter speed (mode P), shutter speed (modes A and M),
or aperture (mode S).
• The camera brackets the value currently selected for
exposure compensation.
• The size of the bracketing increment changes with the value
selected for [EV Step]. g “Using the custom menus” (P. 90)
AE BKT
WB BKT
FL BKT
ISO BKT
ART BKT
--
--
--
--
A-- G--
--
2f 0.7EV
2f 0.3EV
2f 1.0EV
3f 0.3EV
3f 0.7EV
3f 1.0EV
Off
Bracketing
Back
Set
81
EN
Menu functions (Shooting menus)
7
WB BKT (WB bracketing)
Three images with different white balances (adjusted in specifi ed color directions) are
automatically created from one shot, starting with the value currently selected for white
balance. WB bracketing is available in P, A, S and M modes.
• White balance can be varied by 2, 4, or 6 steps on each of
the A – B (Amber – Blue) and G – M (Green – Magenta) axes.
• The camera brackets the value currently selected for white
balance compensation.
• No pictures will be taken during WB bracketing if there is
not enough memory on the card for the selected number of
frames.
A-B G-M
WB BKT
3f 4Step 3f 4Step
Back Set
FL BKT (FL bracketing)
The camera varies fl ash level over three shots (no modifi cation on the fi rst shot, negative on
the second, and positive on the third). In single-frame shooting, one shot is taken each time
the shutter button is pressed; in sequential shooting, all shots are taken while the shutter
button is pressed.
• The t indicator turns green during bracketing.
• The size of the bracketing increment changes with the value
selected for [EV Step]. g “Using the custom menus” (P. 90)
AE BKT
WB BKT
FL BKT
ISO BKT
ART BKT
--
--
--
--
A-- G--
3f 0.7EV
3f 0.3EV
3f 1.0EV
Off
Bracketing
Back
Set
ISO BKT (ISO bracketing)
The camera varies the sensitivity over three shots while keeping the shutter speed and
aperture fi xed. The modifi cation amount can be selected from 0.3 EV, 0.7 EV, or 1.0 EV. Each
time the shutter button is pressed, the camera shoots three frames with the set sensitivity
(or if auto sensitivity is selected, the optimal sensitivity setting) on the fi rst shot, negative
modifi cation on the second shot, and positive modifi cation on the third shot.
• The size of the bracketing increment does not change with
the value selected for [ISO Step]. g “Using the custom
menus” (P. 90)
• Bracketing is performed regardless of the upper limit set with
[ISO-Auto Set]. g “Using the custom menus” (P. 90)
AE BKT
WB BKT
FL BKT
ISO BKT
ART BKT
--
--
--
--
A-- G--
3f 0.7EV
3f 0.3EV
3f 1.0EV
Off
Bracketing
Back
Set
ART BKT (ART bracketing)
Each time the shutter is released, the camera records multiple images, each with a different
art fi lter setting. You can turn art fi lter bracketing on or off separately for each picture mode.
• Recording may take some time.
• ART BKT cannot be combined with WB BKT or ISO BKT.
ART BKT
Pop Art
Light Tone
Pin Hole
Diorama
Soft Focus
Pale&Light Color
Grainy Film
Back
82
EN
Menu functions (Shooting menus)
7
Recording multiple exposures in a single image (multiple exposure)
Record multiple exposures in a single image, using the option currently selected for
image quality.
1
Select [Multiple Exposure] in X Shooting Menu 2.
2
Adjust settings.
Frame Select [2f].
Auto Gain
When set to [On], the brightness of each
frame is set to 1/2 and the images are
overlaid. When set to [Off], the images are
overlaid with the original brightness of each
frame.
Overlay
When set to [On], a RAW image recorded
on a card can be overlaid with multiple
exposures and stored as a separate image.
The number of pictures taken is one.
• a is displayed in the monitor while multiple exposure
is in effect.
Multiple Exposure
Frame
Auto Gain
Overlay Off
Off
Off
Set
Back
250 F5.6
ISO
400
0.00.0
01:02:0301:02:03
3838
P
3
Shoot.
• a is displayed in green when shooting starts.
• Press to delete the last shot.
• The previous shot is superimposed on the view through the lens as a guide to
framing the next shot.
% Tips
• To overlay 3 or more frames: Select RAW for [K] and use the [Overlay] option to make
repeated multiple exposures.
• For more information on overlaying RAW images: g [Edit] (P. 85)
# Cautions
• The camera will not go to sleep while multiple exposure is in effect.
• Photographs taken with other cameras cannot be included in a multiple exposure.
• When [Overlay] is set to [On], the images displayed when a RAW image is selected are
developed with the settings at the time of shooting.
• To set the shooting functions, cancel multiple exposure shooting fi rst. Some functions
cannot be set.
• Multiple exposure is cancelled automatically from the fi rst picture in the following
situations.
The camera is turned off/The q button is pressed/The MENU button is pressed/The
shooting mode is set to a mode other than P, A, S, M/The battery power runs out/Any
cable is connected to the camera
• When a RAW image is selected using [Overlay], the JPEG image for the image recorded
in RAW+JPEG is displayed.
• When shooting multiple exposures using bracketing, priority is given to multiple exposure
shooting. While the overlay image is being saved, bracketing is reset to the factory default
setting.
83
EN
Menu functions (Shooting menus)
7
Shooting automatically with a fi xed interval (time lapse shooting)
You can set the camera to shoot automatically with a set time lapse. The shot frames
can also be recorded as into a single movie. This setting is only available in P/A/S/M
modes.
1
Perform the following settings under [Time Lapse Settings] in X Shooting
Menu 2.
Frame Sets the number of frames to be shot.
Start Waiting Time Sets waiting time before starting to shot.
Interval Time Sets interval between shots after shooting starts.
Time Lapse Movie
Sets recording format of frame sequence.
[Off]: Records each frame as a still picture.
[On]: Records each frame as a still picture and generates and
records a single movie from the frame sequence.
• The image quality of the movie is [M-JPEG HD] and the frame rate 10fps.
2
Shoot.
• Frames are shot even if the image is not in focus after AF. If you wish to fi x the focus
position, shoot in MF.
• [Rec View] operates for 0.5 seconds.
• If either of the time before shooting, or shooting interval is set to 1 minute 30 seconds
or longer, the monitor and camera power will turn off after 1 minute. 10 seconds before
shooting, the power will automatically turn on again. When the monitor is off, press the
shutter button to turn it on again.
% Tips
• Longer shooting times are possible using a power battery holder (sold separately) (P. 129)
and an AC adaptor. A maximum of 999 shots are possible.
# Cautions
• If the AF mode is set to [C-AF] or [C-AF+TR], it is automatically changed to [S-AF].
• Touch operations are disabled during time lapse shooting.
• Cannot be used with HDR photography.
• Bracketing and multiple exposure cannot be used together.
• The fl ash will not work if the fl ash charging time is longer than the interval between shots.
• For [BULB] and [TIME] shooting, the shutter speed is fi xed to 60 seconds.
• If the camera automatically turns off in interval between shots, it will turn on in time for the
next shot.
• If the any of the still pictures are not recorded correctly, the time lapse movie will not be
generated.
• If there is insuffi cient space on the card, the time lapse movie will not be recorded.
• Time lapse shooting will cancelled if any of the following is operated: Mode dial, MENU
button, q button, lens release button, or connecting the USB cable.
• If you turn off the camera, time lapse shooting will be cancelled.
• If there is not enough charge left on the battery, the shooting may end partway through.
Make sure the battery is suitably charged before starting.
84
EN
Menu functions (Shooting menus)
7
Wireless remote control fl ash photography
You can use the supplied fl ash and a fl ash equipped with the RC mode function to
perform wireless fl ash photography. g “Wireless remote control fl ash photography”
(P. 131)
Digital Zoom (Digital Tele-converter)
Digital Tele-converter is used to zoom in beyond the current zoom ratio. The camera
saves the center crop. Zoom is increased by about 2×.
1
Select [On] for [Digital Tele-converter] in W Shooting Menu 1.
2
The view in the monitor will be enlarged by a factor of two.
• The subject will be recorded as it appears in the monitor.
# Cautions
• Digital zoom is not available with multiple exposures, in J mode, or when T, s, f,
w, or m is selected in SCN mode.
• This function is not available when [Movie Effect] is [On] in n mode.
• When a RAW image is displayed, the area visible in the monitor is indicated by a frame.
• AF target drops.
HDR photography
Automatically shoot an HDR combination image, or shoot bracketing images to be
used for HDR combining. This is the same as pressing the HDR button to perform
settings (P. 59).
85
EN
Menu functions (Playback menus)
7
Using the playback menu
m
R
2
1
Playback Menu
Edit
Set
Reset Protect
Connection to Smartphone
Back
On
Print Order
m (P. 65)
R (P. 85)
Edit (P. 85)
Print Order (P. 112)
Reset Protect (P. 87)
Connection to Smartphone (P. 87)
Displaying images rotated (R)
When set to [On], photographs taken with the camera rotated in portrait orientation are
automatically rotated and displayed in portrait orientation.
Editing still images
Recorded images can be edited and saved as new images.
1
Select [Edit] in the q Playback Menu and press Q.
2
Use FG to select [Sel. Image] and press Q.
3
Use HI to select the image to be edited and press Q.
• [RAW Data Edit] is displayed if the picture is a RAW image, [JPEG Edit] if it is a JPEG
image. If the image was recorded in RAW+JPEG format, both [RAW Data Edit] and
[JPEG Edit] will be displayed. Select the menu for the image to be edited.
4
Select [RAW Data Edit] or [JPEG Edit] and press Q.
RAW Data
Edit
Create a JPEG copy of a RAW image edited according to the settings.
[Current]
The JPEG copy is processed using the current camera
settings. Adjust the camera settings before choosing this
option.
[Custom1]
Editing can be performed while changing the settings on
the monitor. You can save the settings used.
[Custom2]
ART BKT
The image is edited using settings for the selected art
fi lter.
86
EN
Menu functions (Playback menus)
7
JPEG Edit
Choose from the following options:
[Shadow Adj]: Brightens a dark backlit subject.
[Redeye Fix]: Reduces the red-eye phenomenon during fl ash shooting.
[P]: Use the dial to choose the size of the
crop and FGHI to position the crop.
O
Set
[Aspect]: Changes the aspect ratio of images from 4:3 (standard) to [3:2],
[16:9], [1:1], or [3:4]. After changing the aspect ratio, use FGHI to
specify the trimming position.
[Black & White]: Creates black and white images.
[Sepia]: Creates sepia-toned images.
[Saturation]: Sets the color depth. Adjust the color saturation checking the
picture on the screen.
[Q]: Converts the image fi le size to 1280 × 960, 640 × 480, or 320 × 240.
Images with an aspect ratio other than 4:3 (standard) are converted to the
closest image fi le size.
[e-Portrait]: Makes skin look smooth and translucent.
You may not be able to compensate depending on the image if face
detection fails.
5
When the settings are complete, press Q.
• The settings will be applied to the image.
6
Select [Yes] and press Q.
• The edited image is stored in the card.
# Cautions
• Movies and 3D photos cannot be edited.
• Red-eye correction may not work depending on the image.
• Editing of a JPEG image is not possible in the following cases:
When an image is processed on a PC, when there is not enough space in the card
memory, when an image is recorded on another camera
• When resizing ([Q]) an image, you cannot select a larger number of pixels than was
originally recorded.
• [P] and [Aspect] can only be used to edit images with an aspect ratio of 4:3 (standard).
• When [Picture Mode] is set to [ART], [Color Space] is locked to [sRGB].
87
EN
Menu functions (Playback menus)
7
Image overlay
Up to 3 frames of RAW images taken with the camera can be overlaid and saved as a
separate image.
The image is saved with the record mode set at the time the image is saved. (If [RAW]
is selected, the copy will be saved in [YN+RAW] format.)
1
Select [Edit] in the q Playback Menu and press Q.
2
Use FG to select [Image Overlay] and press Q.
3
Select the number of images in the overlay and press Q.
4
Use FGHI to select the RAW images that will
be used in the overlay.
• When you have selected the number of images
specifi ed in Step 3, the overlay will be displayed.
RAW RAW RAW
RAW
RAW RAW RAW
Image Overlay
Back
Set
5
Adjust gain.
• Use HI to select an image and use FG to adjust
gain.
• Gain can be adjusted in the range 0.1 – 2.0. Check the
results in the monitor.
Image Overlay
Back
Set
×1.5×1.5×0.3 ×0.5
6
Press Q. A confi rmation dialog will be displayed; select [Yes] and press Q.
% Tips
• To overlay 4 or more frames, save the overlay image as a RAW fi le and use
[Image Overlay] repeatedly.
Audio recording
Add an audio recording (up to 30 sec. long) to the current photograph.
This is the same function as [R] during playback. (P. 64)
Canceling all protections
This function lets you cancel the protection of several images at one time.
1
Select [Reset Protect] in the q Playback Menu.
2
Select [Yes] and press Q.
Using the Smartphone connection option (Connection to
Smartphone)
The camera can connect to a smartphone by using the wireless LAN function. Once
connected camera images can be viewed on and transferred to the other device. g
“Using the camera wireless LAN function” (P. 119)
88
EN
Menu functions (Setup menus)
7
Using the setup menu
Use the Setup Menu to set the basic camera functions.
--.--.-- --:--X
W
j
±0
k
±0
2
1
Setup Menu
English
0.5sec
Wi-Fi Settings
c
/
#
Menu Display
Firmware
Rec View
Back
Set
Option Description
g
X
(Date/time
setting)
Set the camera clock.
17
W
(Changing
the display
language)
You can change the language used for the on-screen display and
error messages from English to another language.
—
i
(Monitor
brightness
adjustment)
You can adjust the brightness and
color temperature of the monitor. Color
temperature adjustment will affect only
the monitor display during playback.
Use HI to highlight j (color
temperature) or k (brightness) and
FG to adjust the value.
Press the INFO button to switch
between [Natural] and [Vivid] monitor
color display.
-
2
j
+1
k
Vivid Natural
Back Set
—
Rec View Choose whether pictures are displayed immediately after shooting
and for how long. This is useful for making a brief check of the
picture you have just taken. Pressing the shutter button halfway
while checking the picture lets you resume shooting immediately.
[0.3sec] – [20sec]: Selects the number of seconds to display each
picture.
[Off]: The picture being recorded to the card is not displayed.
[Autoq]: Displays the image being recorded, and then switches to
playback mode. This is useful for erasing a picture after checking it.
—
Wi-Fi
Settings
Set up the camera to connect to a smartphone with Wi-Fi
connectivity using the wireless function on the camera.
89
c/#
Menu
Display
Choose whether to display the custom or accessory port menu.
108
Firmware Your product’s fi rmware version will be displayed. When you make
inquiries about your camera or accessories or when you want to
download software, you will need to state which version of each of
the products you are using.
—
89
EN
Menu functions (Setup menus)
7
Setting up a wireless LAN connection (Wi-Fi Settings)
To use the wireless LAN functions on the camera (P. 119), you need to make setting such
as the password to be used when connecting. [Private] and [One-Time] for a one-time
connection are available.
Setting password selection method
1
Select [Wi-Fi Settings] in the d Setup Menu and press Q.
2
Select [Wi-Fi Connect Settings] and press I.
3
Select the wireless LAN connection method and press Q.
• [Private]: Connect using a preset password.
• [One-Time]: Connect using a different password each time.
• [Select]: Select which method to use each time.
• [Off]: The Wi-Fi function is turned off.
Changing private connection password
Change the password used for [Private].
1
Select [Wi-Fi Settings] in the d Setup Menu and press Q.
2
Select [Private Password] and press I.
3
Follow the operation guide and press the R button.
• A new password will be set.
Cancelling image sharing
Deselects images selected for sharing (P. 62) when connected to a wireless LAN
network.
1
Select [Wi-Fi Settings] in the d Setup Menu and press Q.
2
Select [Reset share Order] and press I.
3
Select [Yes] and press Q.
Initializing wireless LAN settings
Initializes content of [Wi-Fi Settings].
1
Select [Wi-Fi Settings] in the d Setup Menu and press Q.
2
Select [Reset Wi-Fi Settings] and press I.
3
Select [Yes] and press Q.
90
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
7
Using the custom menus
Camera settings can be customized using the c Custom Menu.
Custom Menu
R
AF/MF (P. 90)
S
T
U
V
W
X
2
1
R
Custom Menu
Set
AF/MF
Button/Dial/Lever
Release/
j
Disp/
8
/PC
Exp/
p
/ISO
#
Custom
K
/Color/WB
Back
S
Button/Dial/Lever (P. 91)
T
Release/j (P. 91)
U
Disp/8/PC (P. 92)
V
Exp/p/ISO (P. 93)
W
# Custom (P. 94)
X
K/Color/WB (P. 95)
Y
Record/Erase (P. 96)
Z
Movie (P. 97)
b
Built-In EVF (P. 97)
k
K Utility (P. 98)
R AF/MF
Option Description
g
AF Mode Choose the AF mode. This is the same as the live control
setting. You can set separate focusing methods for still
photography mode and n mode.
73
Full-time AF If [On] is selected, the camera will continue to focus even
when the shutter button is not pressed halfway. Cannot be
used when using a Four Thirds system lens.
—
AEL/AFL Customize AF and AE lock. 98
Reset Lens When set to [On], this resets the focus of the lens (infi nity)
each time the power is turned off.
The focus of power zoom lenses is also reset.
—
BULB/TIME
Focusing
Normally focus locks during the exposure when manual
focus (MF) is selected. Select [On] to allow focusing using
the focus ring.
—
Focus Ring You can customize how the lens adjusts to the focal point by
selecting the rotational direction of the focus ring.
—
MF Assist When set to [On], you can automatically switch to zoom or
peaking in manual focus mode by rotating the focus ring.
99
P Set Home
Choose the AF target position that will be saved as the
home position. p appears in the AF target selection
display while you choose a home position.
—
MENU
c
R
91
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
7
Option Description
g
AF Illuminat. Select [Off] to disable the AF illuminator. —
I Face Priority
Select the face priority AF mode. This is the same as the
live control setting.
53
AF Area Pointer If you select [Off], the AF target frame will not be displayed
during confi rmation.
—
C-AF Lock When [AF Mode] (P. 73) is set to [C-AF], the AF does not
adjust to sudden changes in subject distance. Depending on
the sensitivity selected, the time it takes for the AF to adjust
will change.
—
S Button/Dial/Lever
Option Description
g
Button Function Choose the function assigned to the selected button.
[UFunction], [VFunction], [RFunction],
[tFunction], [YFunction], [ZFunction], [IFunction],
[GFunction], [nFunction], [mFunction],
[nFunction], [lFunction]
99
Dial Function You can change the functions assigned to the rear dial and
front dial.
—
Dial Direction Choose the direction in which the dial is rotated to adjust
shutter speed or aperture. Change the program shift
direction.
—
Mode Dial
Function
Customize the shooting mode set by the mode dial. You can
apply saved Myset settings. [Myset1] - [Myset4] (P. 77) can be
selected when the settings are registered.
—
t Lever
Function
You can use the positioning of the lever to change the
function of the dials and button.
101
u+v If you select [Off], you cannot switch the v button function
even if you switch the lever.
—
T Release/j
Option Description
g
Rls Priority S If [On] is selected, the shutter can be released even when
the camera is not in focus. This option can be set separately
for S-AF (P. 73) and C-AF (P. 73) modes.
—
Rls Priority C
j L fps
Choose the frame advance rates for [S] and [T]. Figures
are the approximate maximums.
55
j H fps
j + IS Off
When set to [Off], the image stablizer will turn on for
sequential shooting.
—
Half Way Rls
With IS
If set to [On], image stabilization operates when you press
shutter button halfway.
—
MENU
c
S
MENU
c
T
R AF/MF
MENU
c
R
92
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
7
Option Description
g
Lens I.S. Priority If [On] is selected, priority is given to the lens function
operation when using a lens with an image stabilization
function.
—
Release Lag-Time If [Short] is selected, the time lag between fully pressing the
shutter button and the shot being taken can be shortened.*
—
* This will shorten the battery life. Also make sure that the camera is not subject to sharp
impacts while in use. Such impacts may cause the monitor to stop displaying subjects. If
this happens, turn the power off and on again.
U Disp/8/PC
Option Description
g
HDMI [HDMI Out]: Selecting the digital video signal format for
connecting to a TV via an HDMI cable.
[HDMI Control]: Select [On] to allow the camera to be
operated using remotes for TVs that support HDMI control.
101
Video Out Choose the video standard ([NTSC] or [PAL]) used in your
country or region.
101
KControl
Settings
Choose the controls displayed in each shooting mode.
Controls
Shooting mode
P/A/
S/M
A
ART SCN
Live Control (P. 30)
Live SCP (P. 104)
Live Guide (P. 28) –
––
Art Menu ––
–
Scene Menu –––
103
G/Info Settings
Choose the information displayed when the INFO button is
pressed.
[q Info]: Choose the information displayed in full frame
playback.
[LV-Info]: Choose the information displayed when the
camera is in shooting mode.
[G Settings]: Choose the information displayed in index
and calendar playback.
105,
106
Displayed Grid
Select [w], [x], [y], [X] or [x] to display a grid on the
monitor.
—
Picture Mode
Settings
Display only the selected picture mode when a picture
mode is selected.
—
Histogram
Settings
[Highlight]: Choose the lower bound for the highlight display.
[Shadow]: Choose the upper bound for the shadow display.
105
Mode Guide Choose [Off] to not display help for the selected mode when
the mode dial is rotated to a new setting.
18
Live View Boost If [On] is selected, priority will be given to making images
clearly visible; the effects exposure compensation and other
settings will not be visible in the monitor.
—
MENU
c
U
T Release/j
MENU
c
T
93
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
7
Option Description
g
Frame Rate Select [High] to reduce frame lag. However, the image
quality may drop.
—
Art LV Mode [mode1]: The fi lter effect is always displayed.
[mode2]: Filter effects are not visible in the monitor while
the shutter button is pressed halfway. Choose for a smooth
display.
—
Expand LV Dyn.
Range
If you select [Off], the viewfi nder and monitor will be
displayed normally during HDR shooting.
59
Flicker reduction Reduce the effects of fl icker under some kinds of lighting,
including fl uorescent lamps. When fl icker is not reduced by
the [Auto] setting, set to [50Hz] or [60Hz] in accordance with
the commercial power frequency of the region where the
camera is used.
—
LV Close Up Mode [mode1]: Pressing the shutter button halfway cancels zoom.
[mode2]: Zoom is not cancelled when the shutter button is
pressed halfway.
54
Peaking Settings You can switch the edge enhancement color between white
and black.
—
Backlit LCD If no operations are performed for the selected period, the
backlight will dim to save battery power. The backlight will
not dim if [Hold] is selected.
—
Sleep The camera will enter sleep (energy saving) mode if no
operations are performed for the selected period. The
camera can be reactivated by pressing the shutter button
halfway.
—
Auto Power Off Sets camera to turn off after a set period. —
8 (Beep sound)
When set to [Off], you can turn off the beep sound that is
emitted when the focus locks by pressing the shutter button.
—
USB Mode Choose a mode for connecting the camera to a computer or
printer. Choose [Auto] to display USB mode options every
time the camera is connected.
—
V Exp/p/ISO
Option Description
g
EV Step Choose the size of the increments used when selecting
shutter speed, aperture, exposure compensation, and other
exposure parameters.
—
Noise Reduct. This function reduces the noise that is generated during
long exposures.
[Auto]: Noise reduction is performed at slow shutter speeds,
or when the internal temperature of the camera has risen.
[On]: Noise reduction is performed with every shot.
[Off]: Noise reduction off.
• Noise reduction requires about twice the time needed to
record the image.
• Noise reduction turns off automatically during sequential
shooting.
• This function may not work effectively with some shooting
conditions or subjects.
41
MENU
c
V
U Disp/8/PC
MENU
c
U
94
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
7
Option Description
g
Noise Filter Choose the amount of noise reduction performed at high
ISO sensitivities.
—
ISO Set ISO sensitivity. 57
ISO Step Select the increments available for choosing ISO sensitivity. —
ISO-Auto Set Choose the upper limit and default value used for ISO
sensitivity when [Auto] is selected for ISO.
[High Limit]: Choose the upper limit for auto ISO sensitivity
selection.
[Default]: Choose the default value for auto ISO sensitivity
selection.
—
ISO-Auto Choose the shooting modes in which [Auto] ISO sensitivity
is available.
[P/A/S]: Auto ISO sensitivity selection is available in all
modes except M. ISO sensitivity is fi xed at ISO200 in mode
M.
[All]: Auto ISO sensitivity selection is available in all modes.
—
Metering Choose a metering mode according to the scene. 72
AEL Metering Choose the metering method used for AE lock (P. 98).
[Auto]: Use the currently selected metering method.
—
BULB/TIME Timer Choose the maximum exposure for bulb and time
photography.
—
BULB/TIME
Monitor
Sets the monitor brightness when [BULB], or [TIME] is
used. Also sets the brightness of the external electronic
viewfi nder.
—
Live BULB Choose the display interval during shooting. Some
restrictions apply. The frequency drops at high ISO
sensitivities. Choose [Off] to disable the display. Tap the
monitor or press the shutter button halfway to refresh the
display.
—
Live TIME
—
Anti-Shock z
Choose the delay between the shutter button being
pressed and the shutter being released. This diminishes
camera shake caused by vibrations. This feature is
useful in situations such as microscope photography and
astrophotography. It is also useful for sequential shooting
(P. 55) and self timer photography (P. 55).
—
W # Custom
Option Description
g
# X-Sync.
Choose the shutter speed used when the fl ash fi res.
106
# Slow Limit
Choose the slowest shutter speed available when a fl ash
is used.
106
w+F
When set to [On], it will be added to the exposure
compensation value and fl ash intensity control will be
performed.
49, 71
MENU
c
W
V Exp/p/ISO
MENU
c
V
95
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
7
X K/Color/WB
Option Description
g
K Set
You can select the JPEG image quality mode from
combinations of three image sizes and four compression
rates.
1) Use HI to select a
combination ([K1] –
[K4]) and use FG to
change.
2) Press Q.
F
1
SF
Y
2
F
X
3
N
W
4
SF
W
D
Set
Pixel Count
Back
Set
Compression
rate
Image size
70
Pixel Count
Choose the pixel count for [X]- and [W]-size images.
1) Select [Xiddle] or
[Wmall] and press I.
2) Choose a pixel count
and press Q.
Xiddle
Wmall
2560×1920
1280×960
Pixel Count
Set
Back
70
Shading Comp. Choose [On] to correct peripheral illumination according to
the type of lens.
• Compensation is not available for teleconverters or
extension tubes.
• Noise may be visible at the edges of photographs taken at
high ISO sensitivities.
—
WB Set the white balance. This is the same as the live control
setting. You can also fi ne-tune the white balance for each
mode. You can also make fi ne adjustments using white
balance compensation on the super control panel (P. 24).
56
All >
[All Set]: Use the same white balance compensation in all
modes except [CWB].
[All Reset]: Set white balance compensation for all modes
except [CWB] to 0.
—
W Keep Warm
Color
Select [Off] to eliminate “warm” colors from pictures taken
under incandescent lighting.
—
#+WB
Adjust white balance for use with a fl ash.
—
Color Space You can select how colors are reproduced on the monitor
or printer.
—
MENU
c
X
96
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
7
Y Record/Erase
Option Description
g
Quick Erase
If [On] is selected, pressing the button in the playback
display will immediately delete the current image.
—
RAW+JPEG Erase Choose the action performed when a photograph recorded
at a setting of RAW+JPEG is erased in single-frame
playback (P. 33).
[JPEG]: Only the JPEG copy is erased.
[RAW]: Only the RAW copy is erased.
[RAW+JPEG]: Both copies are erased.
• Both the RAW and JPEG copies are deleted when selected
images are deleted or when [All Erase] (P. 76) is selected.
70
File Name [Auto]: Even when a new card is inserted, the fi le numbers
are retained from the previous card. File numbering
continues from the last number used or from the highest
number available on the card.
[Reset]: When you insert a new card, the folder numbers
starts at 100 and the fi le name starts at 0001. If a card
containing images is inserted, the fi le numbers start at the
number following the highest fi le number on the card.
—
Edit Filename Choose how image fi les are named by editing the portion of
the fi lename highlighted below in gray.
sRGB: Pmdd0000.jpg Pmdd
AdobeRGB: _mdd0000.jpg mdd
—
Priority Set Choose the default selection ([Yes] or [No]) for confi rmation
dialogs.
—
dpi Settings Choose the print resolution. —
Copyright
Settings*
Add the names of the photographer and copyright holder to
new photographs. Names can be up to 63 characters long.
[Copyright Info.]: Select [On] to include the names of the
photographer and copyright holder in the Exif data for new
photographs.
[Artist Name]: Enter the name of the photographer.
[Copyright Name]: Enter the name of the copyright holder.
1) Highlight a character 1 and press Q to add the
highlighted character to the name 2.
2) Repeat Step 1 to complete the name, then highlight
[END] and press Q.
• To delete a character, press the INFO button to
place the cursor in the name area 2, highlight the
character, and press .
!”#$%&
()
*+, - . /
01234567
’
89: ;<=>?
@
ABCDEFGH I JKLMNO
PQRSTUVWXYZ
[]_
abcdefghi jklmnEND
opqrs tuvwxyz
{}
ABCDE
05/70
Delete
Copyright Name
Cancel Set
2
1
—
* OLYMPUS does not accept liability for damages arising from disputes involving the use of
[Copyright Settings]. Use at your own risk.
MENU
c
Y
97
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
7
Z Movie
Option Description
g
nMode
Choose a movie record mode. This option can also be
selected using the live control.
69
Movie R
Choose [Off] to record silent movies. This option can also
be selected using the live control.
74
Movie Effect
Choose [On] to enable movie effects in n mode.
42
Wind Noise
Reduction
Reduce wind noise during recording.
—
Recording Volume Adjust microphone sensitivity.
[Built-In R]: Set the camera’s internal microphone.
[External R]: Set when using the SEMA-1 (sold separately).
[Line-In R]: Set a microphone connected to the microphone
jack.
—
b Built-In EVF
Option Description
g
Built-in EVF Style Choose the viewfi nder display style. —
V Info Settings
Like the monitor, the viewfi nder can be used to display
histograms and highlights and shadows.
—
V Displayed Grid
Display a framing grid in the viewfi nder. Choose from [w],
[x], [y], [X], and [
x
].
—
EVF Auto Switch If [Off] is selected, the viewfi nder will not turn on when you
put your eye to the viewfi nder. Use the u button to choose
the display.
—
EVF Adjust Adjust viewfi nder brightness and hue.
Brightness is automatically adjusted when [EVF Auto
Luminance] is set to [On].
—
V Half Way Level
If set to [Off], the level gauge will not be displayed when the
shutter button is pressed halfway down. This is effective
when [Built-in EVF Style] is set to [Style 1] or [Style 2].
—
MENU
c
Z
MENU
c
b
98
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
7
k
K Utility
Option Description
g
Pixel Mapping The pixel mapping feature allows the camera to check and
adjust the image pickup device and image processing functions.
141
Exposure Shift Adjust optimal exposure separately for each metering mode.
• This reduces the number of exposure compensation options
available in the selected direction.
• The effects are not visible in the monitor. To make normal
adjustments to the exposure, perform exposure compensation
(P. 49).
—
AF Focus Adj. You can minutely adjust the AF phase contrast focus point in ±20
steps.
107
: Warning
Level
Choose the battery level at which the 8 warning is displayed.
16
: Battery
Priority
Choose the primary power source when using a power battery
holder.
129
Level Adjust You can calibrate the angle of the level gauge.
[Reset]: Resets adjusted values to the default settings.
[Adjust]: Sets the current camera orientation as the 0 position.
—
Touch Screen
Settings
Activate the touch screen. Choose [Off] to disable the touch
screen.
—
Eye-Fi* Enable or disable upload when using an Eye-Fi card. Displayed
when an Eye-Fi card is inserted.
—
* Use in accordance with local regulations. Onboard airplanes and in other locations in
which the use of wireless devices is prohibited, remove the Eye-Fi card from the camera,
or select [Off] for [Eye-Fi]. The camera does not support the “endless” Eye-Fi mode.
AEL/AFL
MENU c R [AEL/AFL]
Autofocus and metering can be performed by pressing the
button to which AEL/AFL has been assigned. Choose a
mode for each focus mode.
AEL/S-AF
AEL
AEL
AFL
mode1
S-AF AEL/AFL
ExposureFully
Half Way
Back Set
AEL/AFL
Mode
Shutter button function Button function
Half-press Full press
When holding down
AEL/AFL
Focus Exposure Focus Exposure Focus Exposure
S-AF
mode1 S-AF Locked – – – Locked
mode2 S-AF – – Locked – Locked
mode3 – Locked – – S-AF –
C-AF
mode1 C-AF start Locked Locked – – Locked
mode2 C-AF start – Locked Locked – Locked
mode3 – Locked Locked – C-AF start –
mode4 – – Locked Locked C-AF start –
MF
mode1 – Locked – – – Locked
mode2 – – – Locked – Locked
mode3 – Locked – – S-AF –
MENU
c
k
99
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
7
MF Assist
MENU c R [MF Assist]
This is a focus assist function for MF. When the focus ring is rotated, the edge of the
subject is enhanced or a portion of the screen display is magnifi ed. When you stop
operating the focus ring, the screen returns to the original display.
Magnify Magnifi es a portion of the screen. The portion to be magnifi ed
can be set in advance using AF target. g [AF Area] (P.52)
Peaking Displays clearly defi ned outlines with edge enhancement. You
can select the enhancement color. g [Peaking Settings] (P.93)
$ Notes
• [Magnify] and [Peaking] can be displayed using button operations. The display is switched
every time the button is pressed. Assign the switching function to one of the buttons in
advance using [Button Function] (P. 99).
# Cautions
• When Peaking is in use, the edges of small subjects tend to be enhanced more strongly.
This is no guarantee of accurate focusing.
Button Function
MENU c S [Button Function]
See the table below for the functions that can be assigned. The options available vary from
button to button.
Button function items
[UFunction] / [VFunction] / [RFunction]*
1
/ [tFunction] / [YFunction] / [ZFunction] /
[IFunction] / [GFunction] / [nFunction] / ([Direct Function]*
2
/ [P]*
3
) / [mFunction] /
[nFunction] / [lFunction]*
4
*1 Not available in n mode.
*2 Assign the function to each of FGHI.
*3 Choose the AF target.
*4 Choose the function assigned to the button on some lenses.
F
Adjust exposure compensation.
ISO Adjust ISO sensitivity.
WB Adjust white balance.
AEL/AFL AE lock or AF lock. The function changes according to the
[AEL/AFL] setting. When AEL is selected, press the button
once to lock the exposure and display u on the monitor.
Press the button again to cancel the lock.
R REC
Press the button to record a movie.
100
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
7
z (Preview)
Aperture is stopped down to the selected value while the
button is pressed.
k (One-touch white
balance)
The camera measures white balance when the button is
pressed (P. 57).
P (AF area)
Choose the AF target.
P Home
Pressing the button selects the AF target position saved
with [P Set Home] (P. 90). The home AF target position is
indicated by a p icon. Press the button again to return to
AF target mode. If the camera is turned off when the home
position is selected, the home position will be reset.
MF Press the button to select manual focus mode. Press the
button again to restore the previously selected AF mode.
RAWK
Press the button to toggle between JPEG and RAW+JPEG
record modes.
Test Picture Pictures taken while the button is pressed are displayed in the
monitor but are not recorded to the memory card.
Myset1 – Myset4 Switches among the registered Myset settings when the
button is pressed. Press the button again to return.
I/H The button can be used to choose between I and H while
the underwater case is attached. Press and hold the button
to return to the previous mode. If this option is selected,
the FL-LM2 will fi re even when not raised. When using an
ED12-50mmEZ lens with power zoom (E-ZOOM), the lens
is automatically zoomed to the WIDE end or TELE end in
accordance with I and H switching.
Live Guide Press the button to display live guides.
b (Digital Tele-
converter)
Press the button to turn digital zoom on or off.
a (Magnify)
Press the button to display the zoom frame. Press again to
magnify the image. Press and hold the button to turn off the
zoom frame.
Peaking Each press of the button switches the monitor between
display/non-display. When Peaking is displayed, histogram
and highlight/shadow display are not available.
AF Stop Stop autofocus.
j/Y
Choose a sequential shooting or self timer option.
#
Choose a fl ash mode.
HDR Switch to HDR with the saved settings.
BKT Turns on BKT shooting using stored settings.
Multi Function Press the button to recall the selected multi function*.
When switching recalled functions, press the button while
turning the dial.
G (Touch panel lock)
Each time the button is pressed, touch panel operation
switches between enabled and disabled.
Electric Zoom When using a lens with a power zoom function, after pressing
the button, use the arrow pad for zooming operations.
* Multi function: b (Highlight&Shadow Control), c
(Color Creator), a (Magnify), d
(Image Aspect)
101
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
7
t Lever Function
MENU c S [t Lever Function]
You can use the positioning of the lever to change the function of the dials and buttons.
Table of lever position and functions assigned to dial/buttons
Mode
When the lever position is set
to 1
When the lever position is set
to 2
Off The lever function is not used. The lever function is not used.
mode1
Dial functions are based on [Dial
Function] settings.
Front dial: ISO
Rear dial: White balance
mode2
Dial functions are based on [Dial
Function] settings.
Front dial: White balance
Rear dial: ISO
mode3
The R button and Fn2
button functions are based on
[RFunction] and [VFunction]
settings.
R button: ISO
Fn2 button: White balance
mode4
The R button and Fn2
button functions are based on
[RFunction] and [VFunction]
settings.
R button: White balance
Fn2 button: ISO
mode5
The AF modes assigned to the lever positions apply. When the lever
position is set to 2, the default setting is [MF].
Viewing camera images on TV
Use the separately sold cable with the camera to playback recorded images on your
TV. Connect the camera to an HD TV using an HDMI cable to view high-quality images
on a TV screen. When connecting devices using an AV cable, fi rst set the camera’s
[Video Out] settings (P. 92).
1
2
AV cable (sold separately: CB-AVC3)
(Connect to the TV video input jack
(yellow) and audio input jack (white).)
HDMI cable (sold separately: CB-HD1)
(Connect to the HDMI connector on the TV.)
Multi-connector
HDMI connector
(type D)
Type A
102
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
7
1
Connect the TV and camera and switch to TV input.
• The camera monitor turns off when the cable is connected.
• Press the q button when connecting via an AV cable.
# Cautions
• For details on changing the input source of the TV, refer to the TV’s instruction manual.
• Depending on the TV’s settings, the displayed images and information may become
cropped.
• If the camera is connected using both an AV and HDMI cables, it will assign priority to
HDMI.
• If the camera is connected via an HDMI cable, you will be able to choose the digital video
signal type. Choose a format that matches the input format selected with the TV.
1080i Priority is given to 1080i HDMI output.
720p Priority is given to 720p HDMI output.
480p/576p
480p/576p HDMI output. 576p is used when [PAL] is selected for
[Video Out] (P. 92).
• You cannot shoot pictures or movies when the HDMI cable is connected.
• Do not connect the camera to other HDMI output devices. Doing so may damage the
camera.
• HDMI output is not performed while connected via USB to a computer or printer.
Using the TV remote control
The camera can be operated by a TV remote control when connected to a TV that
supports HDMI control. g [HDMI] (P. 92)
$ Notes
• You can operate the camera by following the operation guide displayed on the TV.
• During single-frame playback, you can display or hide the information display by
pressing the “Red” button, and display or hide the index display by pressing the
“Green” button.
• Some televisions may not support all features.
103
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
7
Choosing the control panel displays (KControl Settings)
Sets whether or not to display control panels for option selection when shooting using
live view. When each screen is displayed, the displays can be switched as shown
below.
How to display control panels
1
Press the
u
button and select live view shooting mode.
250250 F5.6
01:02:0301:02:03
3838
L
N
ISO-A
200
Wi-Fi
j
0.00.0
FullHD
F
S-IS AUTOS-IS AUTO
u button
2
Press the Q button while the control panel is displayed, then press the INFO
button to switch the display.
Live guide
INFO
Art fi lter menu
Q
Q
Q
Change Color Saturation
Cancel
A
P/A/S/M
ART/SCN
INFO
INFO
Scene menu
1
Pop Art
1 Portrait
INFO
INFO
250250 F5.6
i
NORM
ISO
AUTO
AUTO
WB
AUTO
4:3
01:02:0301:02:03
10231023
WB
250250 F5.6
i
NORM
ISO
AUTO
AUTO
WB
AUTO
4:3
01:02:0301:02:03
10231023
WB
250250 F5.6
i
NORM
ISO
AUTO
AUTO
WB
AUTO
4:3
01:02:0301:02:03
10231023
WB
LV super control
panel (P. 104)
WB
AUTO
WBWBWB
AUTOAUTOAUTO
AUTOAUTO
L
N
4:3
WB
AUTO
WBWBWB
AUTOAUTOAUTO
WB Auto
AUTOAUTO
S-IS AUTOS-IS AUTO
FullHD
F
Live control
INFO
INFO
INFO
WB
AUTO
WBWBWB
AUTOAUTOAUTO
AUTOAUTO
L
N
4:3
WB
AUTO
WBWBWB
AUTOAUTOAUTO
P
WB Auto
AUTOAUTO
S-IS AUTOS-IS AUTO
FullHD
F
Live control
WB
AUTO
WBWBWB
AUTOAUTOAUTO
AUTOAUTO
L
N
4:3
WB
AUTO
WBWBWB
AUTOAUTOAUTO
WB Auto
AUTOAUTO
S-IS AUTOS-IS AUTO
FullHD
F
Live control
LV super control
panel (P. 104)
LV super control
panel (P. 104)
104
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
7
LV super control panel
This is the super control panel that is used for option setting when shooting using live
view. Shooting setting statuses are displayed in a list. Select options using the arrow
pad or touch operations to change the settings.
250250 F5.6
P
3838
i
Recommended ISO
NORM
ISO
AUTO
AUTO
WB
AUTO
4:3
0.00.0
2
1
6
7
8
9
a
0
cdfe b
5
3
4
Settings that can be modifi ed using super control panel
1 Currently selected option
2 ISO sensitivity .................................P. 57
3 Flash mode .....................................P. 50
4 Flash intensity control .....................P. 71
5 Sequential shooting/self-timer ........P. 55
6 White balance .................................P. 56
White balance compensation
7 Picture mode...................................P. 68
8 Sharpness N..................................P. 78
Contrast J .....................................P. 78
Saturation T .................................P. 78
Gradation z...................................P. 78
B&W Filter x .................................P. 78
Picture tone y ...............................P. 79
9 Color space.....................................P. 95
0 Button function assignment ............P. 99
a Face priority ....................................P. 53
b Metering mode ................................P. 72
c Aspect ratio .....................................P. 69
d Record mode ..................................P. 70
e AF mode .........................................P. 73
AF target .........................................P. 52
f Image stabilizer...............................P. 66
# Cautions
• Not displayed in movie record mode.
1
Press the Q button when shooting using
live view.
• Live control is displayed.
2
Press the INFO button to display the LV
super control panel.
• Each time you press the INFO button, the
display switches.
3
Touch the function you wish to set.
• The cursor appears over the touch function.
4
Press Q to select a settings value.
$ Notes
• Also available in the ART or SCN menu screens.
Touch the icon of the function you wish to select.
WB
AUTO
WBWBWB
AUTOAUTOAUTO
AUTOAUTO
L
N
4:3
WB
AUTO
WBWBWB
AUTOAUTOAUTO
P
WB Auto
AUTOAUTO
S-IS AUTOS-IS AUTO
FullHD
F
250250 F5.6
i
NORM
ISO
AUTO
AUTO
WB
AUTO
4:3
01:02:0301:02:03
10231023
Recommended ISO
Cursor
250250 F5.6
i
NORM
ISO
AUTO
AUTO
WB
AUTO
4:3
01:02:0301:02:03
10231023
WB
105
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
7
Adding information displays (G/Info Settings)
LV-Info (Shooting information displays)
Use [LV-Info] to add the following shooting information displays. The added displays are
displayed by repeatedly pressing the INFO button during shooting. You can also choose to
not show displays that appear at the default setting.
Highlight & Shadow
display
Histogram display
01:02:0301:02:03
3838
250250 F5.6
P
0.00.0
RR
Wi-Fi
L
N
S-IS AUTO
S-IS AUTO
FullHDFullHD
ISO-A
200
L
N
01:02:0301:02:03
3838
250250 F5.6
P
0.00.0
ISO
200
HD
Highlight & Shadow display
Areas above the upper limit of brightness for the image are shown in red, those below the
lower limit in blue. g [Histogram Settings] (P. 92)
q Info (Playback information displays)
Use [q Info] to add the following playback information displays. The added displays are
displayed by repeatedly pressing the INFO button during playback. You can also choose to
not show displays that appear at the default setting.
Highlight & Shadow display Light box displayHistogram display
1615
15
Shadow
Highlight
2013.10.01 12:30 15
×10×10
Light box display
Compare two images side-by-side. Press Q to select the image on the opposite side of the
display.
• The base image is displayed on the right. Use HI to select an image and press Q to
move the image to the left. The image to be compared to the image on the left can be
selected on the right. To choose a different base image, highlight the right frame and
press Q.
• Press Fn1 to zoom in on the current image. To change the zoom ratio, turn the rear dial.
When zooming in, you can use FGHI to scroll to other areas of the image, and the
front dial to select between images.
2x
2x
53 54
2x
Fn1 Fn1 Fn1
106
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
7
G Settings (Index/calendar display)
You can add an index display with a different number of frames and calendar display
using [G Settings]. The additional screens are displayed by turning the rear dial
during playback.
Q
Q
p
q
Index display
p
q
p
q
4 frames
2013.10.01 12:30 20
9–100 frames
2013.10.01 12:30 20
2013.10.01 12:30 20
Single-frame
playback
2013.10.01 12:30 20
100-0020
L
N
Calendar display
2013.10
Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat
29 30 1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9 10 11 12
13 14 15 16 17 18 19
20 21 22 23 24 25 26
27 28 29 30 31 1 2
3 4 5 6 7
29 30 1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9 10 11 12
13 14 15 16 17 18 19
20 21 22 23 24 25 26
27 28 29 30 31 1 2
3 4 5 6 7
Shutter speeds when the fl ash fi res automatically [# X-Sync.]
[# Slow Limit]
You can set shutter speed conditions for when the fl ash fi res.
Shooting
mode
Flash timing
(synchronous)
Upper limit Lower limit
P
The slower of 1/(lens focal
length×2) and the
[# X-Sync.] settings
[# X-Sync.] setting*
[# Slow Limit] setting
A
S
The set shutter speed No lower limit
M
* 1/320 sec when using the supplied external fl ash FL-LM2, and 1/125 sec when using a
commercially available specialty fl ash.
107
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
7
AF focus adjustments
You can adjust the phase contrast AF focal point in a range of ±20 steps (–: Near
distance, +: Far distance). Normally there is no need to change the settings.
1
Select [AF Focus Adj.] using the k tab in the c custom menu and press
the Q button.
• Select a setting and press I.
[OFF]: AF minute adjustments are not performed.
[Default Data]: Minute adjustments for all lenses are registered and applied.
Adjustments are not applied to individually registered lenses.
[Lens Data]: Adjustments are made for each lens; adjustment values for a
maximum of 20 lenses can be registered.
When [Default Data] is selected
2
Select adjustment values using FG.
• Registration is ended when Q is pressed.
• Before pressing Q, press the shutter button and confi rm the settings by shooting an
actual photograph.
When [Lens Data] is selected
2
Select [Create Lens Data Set] and press Q.
• If data is already registered, [Lens Data] will be displayed. You can confi rm or delete
information by selecting it using FG and pressing I.
3
Select an AF target to be minutely adjusted and set the adjustment
values using FG.
• Repeat your AF target selection and input of adjustment values; when fi nished, press
Q.
• When using the zoom lens, you can record the adjustment values for each of Far
distance and Near distance.
• Before pressing Q, press the shutter button and confi rm the settings by shooting an
actual photograph.
4
Press the MENU button to return to the c custom menu, select [Lens
Data] in [AF Focus Adj.] on the k tab, and press Q.
% Tips
• On the screen displaying the actual photograph shot to confi rm the settings, you can
check by turning the front dial to zoom in on the image.
# Cautions
• Depending on the adjustments and the lens, the camera may not be able to focus at far or
near distances.
108
EN
Menu functions (Accessory port menus)
7
Using the accessory port menus
You can make settings relating to devices connected via the accessory port.
Before using the accessory port menus
The Accessory Port menu is only available when the appropriate option is selected for the
[c/# Menu Display] item in the setup menu.
1
Press the MENU button to display the menus, and display the d (Setup
Menu) tab.
2
Select [c/# Menu Display] and set [# Menu Display] to [On].
• The # (Accessory Port Menu) tab will be displayed in the menu.
Accessory Port Menu
A
OLYMPUS PENPAL Share (P. 110)
#
2
1
c
OLYMPUS PENPAL Share
OLYMPUS PENPAL Album
Electronic Viewfinder
Back
Accessory Port Menu
Set
B
OLYMPUS PENPAL Album (P. 111)
C
Electronic Viewfi nder (P. 111)
109
EN
Menu functions (Accessory port menus)
7
Using OLYMPUS PENPAL
The optional OLYMPUS PENPAL can be used to upload pictures to, and receive
pictures from, Bluetooth devices or other cameras connected to an OLYMPUS
PENPAL. Visit the OLYMPUS website for more information on Bluetooth devices.
Sending images
Resize and upload JPEG images to another device. Before sending images, make
sure that the receiving device is set to the mode for receiving data.
1
Display the picture you wish to send full frame and
press Q.
2
Select [Send A Picture] and press Q.
• Select [Search] and press Q in the next dialog. The
camera searches for and displays Bluetooth devices in
range or in [Address Book].
3
Select the destination and press Q.
• The image will be uploaded to the receiving device.
• If prompted to provide a PIN code, enter 0000 and
press Q.
JPEG
<
Erase
Send A Picture
Back
Set
Send Picture
Sending
Cancel
Receiving images/adding a host
Connect to the transmitting device and download JPEG images.
1
Select [OLYMPUS PENPAL Share] in # Accessory
Port Menu (P. 108).
2
Select [Please Wait] and press Q.
• Perform operations for sending images on the sending
device.
• Transmission will start and a [Receive Picture Request]
dialog will be displayed.
#
2
1
c
OLYMPUS PENPAL Share
OLYMPUS PENPAL Album
Electronic Viewfinder
Back
Accessory Port Menu
Set
3
Select [Accept] and press Q.
• The image will be downloaded to the camera.
• If prompted to provide a PIN code, enter 0000 and
press Q.
Receive Picture
Receiving
Cancel
110
EN
Menu functions (Accessory port menus)
7
Editing the address book
The OLYMPUS PENPAL can store host information. You can assign names to hosts or
delete host information.
1
Select [OLYMPUS PENPAL Share] in # Accessory
Port Menu (P. 108).
2
Select [Address Book] and press Q.
3
Select [Address List] and press Q.
• The names of existing hosts are listed.
1
Please Wait
Address Book
My OLYMPUS PENPAL
Picture Send Size
Back
A. OLYMPUS PENPAL Share
Set
4
Select the host you wish to edit and press Q.
Deleting hosts
Select [Yes] and press Q.
Editing host information
Press Q to display host information. To change the host name, press Q again and edit
the current name in the rename dialog.
Creating albums
Your favorite JPEG pictures can be resized and copied to an OLYMPUS PENPAL.
1
Display the picture you wish to copy full frame and
press Q.
2
Select [z] and press Q.
• To copy images from an OLYMPUS PENPAL to the
memory card, select [y] and press Q.
JPEG
Erase
Back
Send A Picture
Set
<
# Cautions
• The OLYMPUS PENPAL can be used only in the region in which it was purchased.
Depending on the areas, the usage may infringe the wave regulations and may be subject
to its penalty.
A OLYMPUS PENPAL Share
Option Description
g
Please Wait Receive images and add hosts to the address book. 109
Address Book [Address List]: View the hosts that have been saved to the
address book.
[New Pairing]: Add a host to the address book.
[Search Timer]: Choose how long the camera searches for a
host.
110
My OLYMPUS
PENPAL
Display information for your OLYMPUS PENPAL, including
the name, address, and supported services. Press Q to edit
the device name.
110
Picture Send Size Choose the size at which images are transmitted.
[Size 1: Small]: Images are sent at a size equivalent to
640 × 480.
[Size 2: Large]: Images are sent at a size equivalent to
1920 × 1440.
[Size 3: Medium]: Images are sent at a size equivalent to
1280 × 960.
109
MENU
#
A
111
EN
Menu functions (Accessory port menus)
7
B OLYMPUS PENPAL Album
Option Description
g
Copy All All images and sound fi les are copied between the SD
card and OLYMPUS PENPAL. Copied images are resized
according to the option selected for picture copy size.
110
Reset Protect Remove protection from all pictures in the OLYMPUS
PENPAL album.
110
Album Mem. Usage Show the number of pictures currently in the album and the
number of additional pictures that can be stored at [Size 2:
Medium].
110
Album Mem. Setup [All Erase]: Delete all pictures in the album.
[Format Album]: Format the album.
110
Picture Copy Size Choose the size at which images are copied.
[Size 1: Large]: Copied images are not resized.
[Size 2: Medium]: Images are copied at a size equivalent to
1920 × 1440.
110
C Electronic Viewfi nder
Option Description
g
EVF Adjust Adjust the brightness and the
color temperature of optional
external viewfi nders. The
selected color temperature
is also used in the monitor
during playback. Use HI to
select color temperature (j) or
brightness (k) and use FG
to choose from values between
[+7] and [–7].
-
5
j
+2
k
EVF Adjust
Back
Set
—
EVF Auto Switch Sets whether to automatically switch the display away from the
monitor when using the VF-4 external electronic viewfi nder.
When set to [Off], pressing the u button on the external
viewfi nder switches the display between the viewfi nder and
the monitor. When set to [On], the display automatically
switches to VF-4 when you look through it.
134
MENU
#
B
MENU
#
C
112
EN
Printing pictures
8
8
Print reservation (DPOF)
You can save digital “print orders” to the memory card listing the pictures to be printed
and the number of copies of each print. You can then have the pictures printed at a
print shop that supports DPOF or print the pictures yourself by connecting the camera
directly to a DPOF printer. A memory card is required when creating a print order.
Creating a print order
1
Press Q during playback and select [<].
2
Select [<] or [
U
] and press Q.
Individual picture
Press HI to select the frame that you want to set as print
reservation, then press FG to set the number of prints.
• To set print reservation for several pictures, repeat this
step. Press Q when all the desired pictures have been
selected.
<
ALL
Print Order Setting
Back
Set
All pictures
Select [U] and press Q.
3
Select the date and time format and press Q.
No
The pictures are printed without the date
and time.
Date
The pictures are printed with the shooting
date.
Time
The pictures are printed with the shooting
time.
4
Select [Set] and press Q.
# Cautions
• The camera cannot be used to modify print orders created with other devices. Creating a
new print order deletes any existing print orders created with other devices.
• Print orders cannot include 3D photos, RAW images, or movies.
Removing all or selected pictures from the print order
You can reset all print reservation data or just the data for selected pictures.
1
Press Q during playback and select [<].
No
Date
Time
X
Back Set
Printing pictures
113
EN
Printing pictures
8
2
Select [<] and press Q.
• To remove all pictures from the print order, select [Reset] and press Q.
To exit without removing all pictures, select [Keep] and press Q.
3
Press HI to select images you wish to remove from the print order.
• Use G to set the number of prints to 0. Press Q once you have removed all the
desired pictures from the print order.
4
Select the date and time format and press Q.
• This setting is applied to all frames with print reservation data.
5
Select [Set] and press Q.
Direct printing (PictBridge)
By connecting the camera to a PictBridge-compatible printer with the USB cable, you
can print out recorded pictures directly.
1
Connect the camera to the printer using the supplied USB cable and turn
the camera on.
USB port
Smaller terminal
USB cable
Multi-connector
• Use a fully charged battery for printing.
• When the camera is turned on, a dialog should be displayed in the monitor prompting
you to choose a host. If it is not, select [Auto] for [USB Mode] (P. 93) in the camera
custom menus.
2
Use FG to select [Print].
• [One Moment] will be displayed, followed by a print-
mode selection dialog.
• If the screen is not displayed after a few minutes,
disconnect the USB cable and start again from Step 1.
USB
MTP
Storage
Print
Exit
Set
Proceed to “Custom printing” (P. 114).
# Cautions
• 3D photos, RAW images, and movies cannot be printed.
114
EN
Printing pictures
8
Easy printing
Use the camera to display the picture you wish to print before connecting the printer
via the USB cable.
1
Use HI to display the pictures you want to print
on the camera.
2
Press I.
• The picture selection screen appears when printing is
completed. To print another picture, use HI to select
the image and press Q.
• To exit, unplug the USB cable from the camera while the
picture selection screen is displayed.
PC/Custom Print
Easy Print Start
Custom printing
1
Follow the operation guide to set a print option.
Selecting the print mode
Select the type of printing (print mode). The available print modes are as shown below.
Print Prints selected pictures.
All Print
Prints all the pictures stored in the card and makes one print for
each picture.
Multi Print
Prints multiple copies of one image in separate frames on a single
sheet.
All Index Prints an index of all the pictures stored in the card.
Print Order
Prints according to the print reservation you made. If there is no
picture with print reservation, this is not available.
Setting the print paper items
This setting varies with the type of printer. If only the printer’s STANDARD setting is
available, you cannot change the setting.
Size Sets the paper size that the printer supports.
Borderless
Selects whether the picture is printed on the entire page or inside a
blank frame.
Pics/Sheet
Selects the number of pictures per sheet. Displayed when you have
selected [Multi Print].
115
EN
Printing pictures
8
Selecting pictures you want to print
Select pictures you want to print. The selected pictures can
be printed later (single-frame reservation) or the picture
you are displaying can be printed right away.
Print More
Select Single Print
2013.10.01 12:30 15
123-3456
Print (f)
Prints the currently displayed picture. If there is a picture that [Single
Print] reservation has already been applied to, only that reserved
picture will be printed.
Single Print
(t)
Applies print reservation to the currently displayed picture. If you
want to apply reservation to other pictures after applying [Single
Print], use HI to select them.
More (u)
Sets the number of prints and other items for the currently displayed
picture, and whether or not to print it. For operation, refer to “Setting
printing data” in the next section.
Setting printing data
Select whether to print printing data such as the date and time or fi le name on the picture
when printing. When the print mode is set to [All Print] and [Option Set] is selected, the
following options appears.
<×
Sets the number of prints.
Date Prints the date and time recorded on the picture.
File Name Prints the fi le name recorded on the picture.
P
Trims the picture for printing. Use the dial to choose the crop size
and FGHI to position the crop.
2
Once you have set the pictures for printing and printing data, select [Print],
then press Q.
• To stop and cancel printing, press Q. To resume printing, select [Continue].
Cancelling printing
To cancel printing, highlight [Cancel] and press Q. Note that any changes to the print order
will be lost; to cancel printing and return to the previous step, where you can make changes
to the current print order, press MENU.
9
Connecting the camera to a computer and a smartphone
9
116
EN
Connecting the camera to a computer
and a smartphone
Installing the PC software
Windows
1
Insert the supplied CD in a CD-ROM drive.
Windows XP
• A “Setup” dialog will be displayed.
Windows Vista/Windows 7/Windows 8
• An Autorun dialog will be displayed. Click “OLYMPUS
Setup” to display the “Setup” dialog.
# Cautions
• If the “Setup” dialog is not displayed, select “My Computer” (Windows XP) or
“Computer” (Windows Vista/Windows 7) from the start menu. Double-click the
CD-ROM (OLYMPUS Setup) icon to open the “OLYMPUS Setup” window and then
double-click “LAUNCHER.EXE”.
• If a “User Account Control” dialog is displayed, click “Yes” or “Continue”.
2
Follow the on-screen instructions on your computer.
# Cautions
• If nothing is displayed on the camera screen even after connecting the camera to the
computer, the battery may be exhausted. Use a full-charged battery.
Multi-connector
Smaller terminal
USB cable
Look for this
mark.
USB port
# Cautions
• When the camera is connected to another device via USB, a message will be
displayed prompting you to choose a connection type. Select [Storage].
117
EN
Connecting the camera to a computer and a smartphone
9
3
Register your Olympus product.
• Click the “Registration” button and follow the on-screen instructions.
4
Install OLYMPUS Viewer 3.
• Check the system requirements before beginning installation.
• Click the “OLYMPUS Viewer 3” button and follow the on-screen instructions to install
the software.
Operating
System
Windows XP (Service Pack 2 or later) / Windows Vista /
Windows 7 / Windows 8
Processor
Pentium 4 1.3 GHz or better
(Core2Duo 2.13 GHz or better required for movies)
RAM 1 GB or more (2 GB or more recommended)
Free Hard
Drive Space
3 GB or more
Monitor
Settings
1024 × 768 pixels or more
Minimum 65,536 colors (16,770,000 colors recommended)
• See online help for information on using the software.
Macintosh
1
Insert the supplied CD in a CD-ROM drive.
• The disk contents should automatically be displayed in
the Finder. If they are not, double-click the CD icon on
the desktop.
• Double-click the “Setup” icon to display the “Setup”
dialog.
2
Install OLYMPUS Viewer 3.
• Check the system requirements before beginning
installation.
• Click the “OLYMPUS Viewer 3” button and follow the
on-screen instructions to install the software.
Operating
System
Mac OS X v10.5–v10.8
Processor
Intel Core Solo/Duo 1.5 GHz or better
(Core2Duo 2 GHz or better required for movies)
RAM 1 GB or more (2 GB or more recommended)
Free Hard
Drive Space
3 GB or more
Monitor
Settings
1024 × 768 pixels or more
Minimum 32,000 colors (16,770,000 colors recommended)
• Other languages can be selected from the language combo box. For information on
using the software, see online help.
118
EN
Connecting the camera to a computer and a smartphone
9
Copying pictures to a computer without
OLYMPUS Viewer 3
Your camera supports the USB Mass Storage Class. You can transfer images to a
computer by connecting the camera to the computer with the provided USB cable. The
following operating systems are compatible with the USB connection:
Windows: Windows XP Home Edition/
Windows XP Professional/
Windows Vista/Windows 7/Windows 8
Macintosh: Mac OS X v.10.3 or later
1
Turn the camera off and connect it to the computer.
• The location of the USB port varies with the computer. For details, refer to your
computer’s manual.
2
Turn on the camera.
• The selection screen for the USB connection is
displayed.
3
Press FG to select [Storage]. Press Q.
USB
MTP
Storage
Print
Exit
Set
4
The computer recognizes the camera as a new device.
# Cautions
• If you are using Windows Photo Gallery for Windows Vista, Windows 7 or Windows 8,
choose [MTP] in Step 3.
• Data transfer is not guaranteed in the following environments, even if your computer is
equipped with a USB port.
Computers with a USB port added by means of an extension card, etc.
Computers without a factory-installed OS
Home-built computers
• Camera controls cannot be used while the camera is connected to a computer.
• If the dialog shown in Step 2 is not displayed when the camera is connected to a
computer, select [Auto] for [USB Mode] (P. 93) in the camera custom menus.
119
EN
Connecting the camera to a computer and a smartphone
9
Using the camera wireless LAN function
You can use the camera wireless LAN function to connect to a smartphone over a
wireless network.
• View and transfer images stored on the camera card.
• Add position information to image using the smartphone position information.
• Operate the camera using your smartphone.
For these operations, a smartphone with the smartphone app installed is necessary.
See the Olympus website for details on “OI.Share”, the smartphone app.
# Cautions
• Before using the wireless LAN function, read “Precautions when using the
wireless LAN function” (P. 153).
• If using the wireless LAN function in a country outside the region where the camera
was purchased, there is a risk that the camera will not conform to the wireless
communication regulations of that country. Olympus will not be held responsible for
any failure to meet such regulations.
• As with any wireless communication, there is always a risk of interception by a third
party.
• The wireless LAN function on the camera cannot be used to connect to a home or
public access point.
Preparing your smartphone
Install “OI.Share”, the smartphone app, and then start OI.Share on your smartphone.
Preparing your camera
There are 2 methods for the wireless LAN connection.
Private Connects using a preset password every time. Use this method
when you always connect to the same devices, such as your
smartphone to transfer images.
One-Time Connects using a different password each time. Use this method
for one-time connection, such as when you wish to share selected
images among a number of friends.
Select the wireless LAN connection method in advance. g “Setting up a wireless
LAN connection (Wi-Fi Settings)” (P. 89)
Private connection
The following procedure can be used to connect.
1
Select [Connection to Smartphone] in the q Playback Menu, and press
Q.
2
Follow the operation guide displayed on the monitor, pressing Q to
proceed.
• The SSID, password and QR code are displayed on the monitor.
3
Enter the SSID and password into your smartphone.
• If you use OI.Share on your smartphone to read the QR code, the SSID and
password are entered automatically.
• From the second time you connect, connection will be performed automatically.
• An index of images on the camera is displayed in OI.Share on your smartphone.
120
EN
Connecting the camera to a computer and a smartphone
9
One-time connection
1
Select [Connection to Smartphone] in the q Playback Menu, and press
Q.
• The SSID, password and QR code are displayed on the monitor.
2
Enter the SSID and password into your smartphone.
• If you use OI.Share on your smartphone to read the QR code, the SSID and
password are entered automatically.
• From the second time you connect, a confi rmation message fi rst will be displayed
asking if you wish to change your password.
To end the connection
1
Press MENU on the camera or touch [Stop] on the monitor screen.
• You can also end the connection with OI.Share or by turning off your camera.
• The connection ends.
# Cautions
• Combination of the wireless LAN function with OLYMPUS PENPAL, an Eye-Fi card,
or similar may result in a signifi cant reduction in camera performance.
• The wireless LAN antenna is contained in the camera grip. Where possible, avoid
covering the antenna with your hands.
• During wireless LAN connection, the battery will run down faster. If the battery is
running low, the connection may be lost during a transfer.
• Connection may be diffi cult or slow in proximity to devices that generate magnetic
fi elds, static electricity or radio waves, such as near microwaves, cordless telephone.
121
EN
Connecting the camera to a computer and a smartphone
9
Things you can do with OI.Share
Synchronize the time and date on your camera with your
smartphone
Synchronize the time and date on your smartphone and camera to allow position
information to be added to images on your camera. Start time synchronization in
OI.Share.
• It may take a minute or so for the camera time to synchronize.
Adding smartphone position information to images
1
Start position information recording in OI.Share.
• Your smartphone will log position information at a predetermined interval.
2
End the connection.
• The camera is now ready for shooting.
3
Stop position information recording in OI.Share when position
information is no longer required.
4
Start [Connection to Smartphone] in your camera.
5
Start sending position information in OI.Share.
• The position information will be added to images on the memory card. g is displayed
on images to which position information has been added.
# Cautions
• Position information cannot be added to movies.
Sharing images
To share images, set a [Share Order] on the images you wish to share.
1
Playback images and set [Share Order] (P. 62).
2
Use [One-Time] to set up a Wi-Fi connection.
Operating the camera
You can shoot pictures with the camera by performing operations on your smartphone.
This function is only available when connected with [Private].
1
Start [Connection to Smartphone] in your camera.
• You can also connect by touching w on the shooting screen.
• Shooting modes P/A/S/M/A can be used.
2
Shoot pictures using your smartphone.
# Cautions
• Log position information is only available when using a smartphone with a GPS
function.
• Not all camera functions are available over the wireless LAN connection.
122
EN
Battery, battery charger, and card
10
10
Battery and charger
• Use the single Olympus lithium-ion battery. Use only genuine OLYMPUS rechargeable
batteries.
• The camera’s power consumption varies widely with usage and other conditions.
• As the following consume a lot of power even without shooting, the battery will be drained
quickly.
• Performing auto focus repeatedly by pressing the shutter button halfway in shooting
mode.
• Displaying images on the monitor for a prolonged period.
• When connected to a computer or printer.
• When using a drained battery, the camera may turn off without the low battery warning
being displayed.
• The battery will not be fully charged at the time of purchase. Charge the battery using the
provided charger before use.
• The normal charging time using the provided charger is approximately 3 hours 30 minutes
(estimated).
• Do not attempt to use chargers not specifi cally designated for use with the supplied
battery, or to use batteries not specifi cally designated for use with the supplied charger.
# Cautions
• There is a risk of explosion if the battery is replaced with the incorrect battery type.
Dispose of the used battery following the instructions “Battery Handling Precautions” (P. 152).
Using an optional AC adapter
The camera can be connected to an optional AC-3 AC adapter via a power battery
holder (HLD-7). Other adapters can not be used. The power cable supplied with the AC
adapter can not be used with other products.
Using your charger abroad
• The charger can be used in most home electrical sources within the range of 100 V to
240 V AC (50/60 Hz) around the world. However, depending on the country or area you
are in, the AC wall outlet may be shaped differently and the charger may require a plug
adapter to match the wall outlet. For details, ask at your local electrical shop or travel
agent.
• Do not use commercially available travel adapters as the charger may malfunction.
Battery, battery charger, and card
123
EN
Battery, battery charger, and card
10
Usable cards
In this manual, all storage devices are referred to as “cards.” The
following types of SD memory card (commercially available) can be
used with this camera: SD, SDHC, SDXC, and Eye-Fi. For the latest
information, please visit the Olympus website.
SD card write protect switch
The SD card body has a write protect switch. If you set the switch to
the “LOCK” side, you will not be able to write to the card, delete data or
format. Return the switch to the unlock position enable writing.
LOCK
# Cautions
• The data in the card will not be erased completely even after formatting the card or
deleting the data. When discarding, destroy the card to prevent leakage of personal
information.
• Use the Eye-Fi card in compliance with the laws and regulations of the country where the
camera is used. Remove the Eye-Fi card from the camera or disable the card functions in
airplanes and other locations where use is prohibited. g [Eye-Fi] (P. 98)
• The Eye-Fi card may become hot during use.
• When using an Eye-Fi card, the battery may run out faster.
• When using an Eye-Fi card, the camera may function more slowly.
124
EN
Battery, battery charger, and card
10
Record mode and fi le size/number of storable still pictures
The fi le size in the table is approximate for fi les with a 4:3 aspect ratio.
Record
mode
Number of pixels
(Pixel Count)
Compression
File
format
File size
(MB)
Number of
storable still
pictures*
RAW
4608×3456
Loss-less compression ORF Approx. 17 41
YSF
1/2.7
JPEG
Approx. 11 79
YF
1/4 Approx. 7.5 114
YN
1/8 Approx. 3.5 248
YB
1/12 Approx. 2.4 369
XSF
3200×2400
1/2.7 Approx. 5.6 155
XF
1/4 Approx. 3.4 257
XN
1/8 Approx. 1.7 508
XB
1/12 Approx. 1.2 753
XSF
2560×1920
1/2.7 Approx. 3.2 271
XF
1/4 Approx. 2.2 398
XN
1/8 Approx. 1.1 782
XB
1/12 Approx. 0.8 1151
XSF
1920×1440
1/2.7 Approx. 1.8 476
XF
1/4 Approx. 1.3 701
XN
1/8 Approx. 0.7 1356
XB
1/12 Approx. 0.5 1968
XSF
1600×1200
1/2.7 Approx. 1.3 678
XF
1/4 Approx. 0.9 984
XN
1/8 Approx. 0.5 1906
XB
1/12 Approx. 0.4 2653
WSF
1280×960
1/2.7 Approx. 0.9 1034
WF
1/4 Approx. 0.6 1488
WN
1/8 Approx. 0.4 2773
WB
1/12 Approx. 0.3 3813
WSF
1024×768
1/2.7 Approx. 0.6 1564
WF
1/4 Approx. 0.4 2260
WN
1/8
Approx. 0.3 4068
W
B
1/12 Approx. 0.2 5547
WSF
640×480
1/2.7 Approx. 0.3 3589
WF
1/4 Approx. 0.2 5085
WN
1/8 Approx. 0.2 7627
WB
1/12 Approx. 0.1 10170
*Assumes a 1GB SD card.
# Cautions
• The number of storable still pictures may change according to the subject, whether or not
print reservations have been made, and other factors. In certain instances, the number
of storable still pictures displayed on the monitor will not change even when you take
pictures or erase stored images.
• The actual fi le size varies according to the subject.
• The maximum number of storable still pictures displayed on the monitor is 9999.
• For the available recording time for movies, see the Olympus website.
125
EN
Interchangeable lenses
11
11
Choose a lens according to the scene and your creative intent. Use
lenses designed exclusively for the Micro Four Thirds system and
bearing the M.ZUIKO DIGITAL label or the symbol shown at right.
With an adapter, you can also use Four Thirds System and OM System
lenses.
# Cautions
• When you attach or remove the body cap and lens from the camera, keep the lens mount
on the camera pointed downward. This helps prevent dust and other foreign matter from
getting inside the camera.
• Do not remove the body cap or attach the lens in dusty places.
• Do not point the lens attached to the camera toward the sun. This may cause the camera
to malfunction or even ignite due to the magnifying effect of sunlight focusing through the
lens.
• Be careful not to lose the body cap and rear cap.
• Attach the body cap to the camera to prevent dust from getting inside when no lens is
attached.
M.ZUIKO DIGITAL lens specifi cations
Names of parts
1 Front cap
2 Filter mount thread
3 Focus ring
4 Zoom ring (zoom lenses only)
5 Mount index
6 Rear cap
7 Electrical contacts
8 UNLOCK switch (only retractable
lenses)
9 Decoration ring (only some lenses,
remove when attaching a lens hood)
Interchangeable lenses
126
EN
Interchangeable lenses
11
Using power zoom lenses with macro functions
(ED12-50mm f3.5-6.3EZ)
Lens operation is determined by the position of the zoom ring.
While pressing
MACRO
+
Zoom ringMACRO button
E-ZOOM (Power Zoom)
Rotate the zoom ring for power zoom.
Zoom speed is determined by the amount of rotation.
M-ZOOM (Manual Zoom) Rotate the zoom ring to zoom in and out.
MACRO (Macro Photography)
To photography subjects at a range of 0.2 to 0.5 m,
press the MACRO button and slide the zoom ring
forward. Zoom is not available.
• The role of the L-Fn button can be selected in the camera custom menu.
MF (manual focus) control
(17mm f1.8, ED12mm f2.0 (Snapshot focus), ED12-40mm f2.8PRO)
Slide the focus ring in the direction of the arrow to change the focus method.
AF/MF MF, Snapshot focus
Focus ring
With snapshot focus, a distance is set using the focus ring based on the shooting
distance. The camera focuses over a depth of fi eld corresponding to the set aperture
value.
• We recommend setting the aperture to F5.6 or above with a 17mm f1.8 or an ED12mm
f2.0.
• You can shoot at the selected distance irrespective of the AF mode on the camera.
• Use the distance scale only as a guide.
127
EN
Interchangeable lenses
11
Cap lens control (BCL-1580)
Use the MF lever to open and close the lens barrier, and adjust the focus between
infi nity and close-up.
• There is no data communication between camera and lens.
• Some functions of the camera cannot be used.
• Set the focal distance to 15 mm for the image stabilization function.
MF lever
Closing the
lens barrier
Infi nity focus
Distant focus
Close focus
Lens and camera combinations
Lens Camera Attachment AF Metering
Micro Four Thirds
system lens
Micro Four Thirds
system camera
Yes Yes Yes
Four Thirds system
lens
Attachment
possible with
mount adapter
Yes*
1
Yes
OM System lenses No Yes*
2
Micro Four Thirds
system lens
Four Thirds System
Camera
No No No
*1 When recording movies, you cannot use [C-AF] or [C-AF+TR] in [AF mode]. Also, AF is
not operational when recording movies.
*2 Accurate metering is not possible.
128
EN
Interchangeable lenses
11
Main lens specifi cations
Items
ED12-40mm
f2.8PRO
ED40-150mm
f4.0-5.6R
ED14-150mm
f4.0-5.6
Mount Micro Four Thirds mount
Focal length 12 – 40 mm 40 – 150 mm 14 – 150 mm
Max. aperture f/2.8 f/4.0 – 5.6 f/4.0 – 5.6
Image angle 84.1° – 30.3° 30.3° – 8.2° 75° – 8.2°
Lens confi guration
9 groups,
14 lenses
10 groups,
13 lenses
11 groups,
15 lenses
Iris control f/2.8 – 22 f/4.0 – 22 f/4.0 – 22
Shooting range
(Focal length)
0.2 m – ) 0.9 m – ) 0.5 m – )
Focus adjustment
AF/MF, snapshot
focus
AF/MF switching
Weight (excluding hood and
cap)
382 g 190 g 260 g
Dimensions
(Max. diameter × length)
l69.9×84 mm l63.5×83 mm l63.5×83 mm
Filter mount thread diameter 62 mm 58 mm 58 mm
Lens hood Supplied* LH-61D LH-61C
Items
ED12-50mm
f3.5-6.3EZ
17mm f1.8
BCL-1580
(15mm f8)
Mount Micro Four Thirds mount
Focal length 12 – 50 mm 17 mm 15 mm
Max. aperture f/3.5 – 6.3 f/1.8 f/8
Image angle 84° – 24° 64° 72°
Lens confi guration
9 groups,
10 lenses
6 groups,
9 lenses
3 groups,
3 lenses
Iris control f/3.5 – 22 f/1.8 – 22 Fixed to f/8
Shooting range
(Focal length)
0.35 m – )
0.2 m – 0.5 m
(macro mode)
0.25 m – ) 0.30 m – )
Focus adjustment AF/MF switching
AF/MF, snapshot
focus
MF
Weight (excluding hood and
cap)
212 g 120 g 22 g
Dimensions
(Max. diameter × length)
l57×83 mm l57.5×35.5 mm l56×9 mm
Filter mount thread diameter 52 mm 46 mm –
Lens hood LH-55B LH-48B –
* To remove the ED12-40mm lens hood, turn the lens hood while pressing in the buttons on
both sides.
# Cautions
• Edges of pictures may be cut off if more than one fi lter is used or if a thick fi lter is used.
129
EN
Using separately sold accessories
12
12
Using separately sold accessories
Power Battery Holder (HLD-7)
You can extend camera usage time by using the power battery holder with the
camera’s battery. You can assign functions to the camera’s custom menu using the dial
and Fn button. You can use an AC adaptor (sold separately) via the HLD-7.
Be sure to turn off the camera’s power when attaching or removing the power battery
holder.
Names of parts
Shutter button
Front dial
Camera mount knob
Vertical operation lock knob
B-Fn2 button
B-Fn1 button
Rear dial
AC connector cover
Attaching the HLD-7
Remove the PBH cover (a) on the
bottom of the camera and attach the
HLD-7. Once the HLD-7 is attached,
turn the release wheel fi rmly. Be
sure to put the PBH cover on the
camera when the HLD-7 is not
attached.
Inserting the battery
Use a BLN-1 battery. After inserting the
battery, be sure to lock the battery cover.
a
a
1
2
130
EN
Using separately sold accessories
12
Using the AC adaptor
When using the AC adaptor, open the AC connector
cover and plug in the AC connector.
Using the dial and button
Set the functions for the HLD-7 dial and B-Fn button using [Button Function] on the
camera’s c custom menu. g “Button Function” (P. 99)
Main Specifi cations (HLD-7)
Power supply Battery: Li-ion Battery BLN-1 ×1
AC power supply: AC adapter AC-3
Dimensions Approx. 128.5 mm (W) × 48.2 mm (H) × 57.3 mm (D) (5.1” ×
1.9” × 2.3”)
Weight Approx. 235 g (0.5 lb.) (excluding the battery and connector
cap)
Splash resistance
(when attached to a
camera)
Type Equivalent to IEC Standard publication 529 IPX1
(under OLYMPUS test conditions)
# Cautions
• Do not use batteries or AC adaptors other than those specifi ed. Doing so may cause an
injury or may cause the device to fail or explode.
• Do not use your fi ngernails to turn the release knob. Doing so may cause an injury.
• Use the camera only within the guaranteed operation temperature range.
• Do not use or store this device in locations with a lot of dust or high humidity.
• Do not touch the contact points of this device.
• If the main body or contacts become dirty, wipe them with a soft, dry cloth. Do not use a
damp cloth or organic solvents such as paint thinner or benzene.
External fl ash units designated for use with this camera
With this camera, you can use one of the separately sold external fl ash units to
achieve a fl ash suited to your needs. The external fl ashes communicate with the
camera, allowing you to control the camera’s fl ash modes with various available fl ash
control modes, such as TTL-AUTO and Super FP fl ash. An external fl ash unit specifi ed
for use with this camera can be mounted on the camera by attaching it to the camera’s
hot shoe. You can also attach the fl ash to the fl ash bracket on the camera using the
bracket cable (optional). Refer to the documentation provided with the external fl ash
units as well.
The upper limit of the shutter speed is 1/250 sec. when using a fl ash.
131
EN
Using separately sold accessories
12
Functions available with external fl ash units
Optional fl ash Flash control mode GN (Guide number) (ISO100) RC mode
FL-600R
TTL-AUTO, AUTO, MANUAL,
FP TTL AUTO, FP MANUAL
GN36 (85 mm*) GN20 (24 mm*)
FL-300R TTL-AUTO, MANUAL GN20 (28 mm*)
FL-14 TTL-AUTO, AUTO, MANUAL GN14 (28 mm*) –
RF-11
TTL-AUTO, MANUAL
GN11 –
TF-22 GN22 –
* The focal length of the lens that can be used (Calculated based on 35 mm fi lm camera).
Wireless remote control fl ash photography
External fl ash units that are designated for use with this camera and have a remote
control mode can be used for wireless fl ash photography. The camera can separately
control each of three groups of remote fl ash units, and the supplied external fl ash. See
the instruction manuals provided with the external fl ash units for details.
1
Set the remote fl ash units to RC mode and place them as desired.
• Turn the external fl ash units on, press the MODE button, and select RC mode.
• Select a channel and group for each external fl ash unit.
2
Select [On] for [# RC Mode] in X Shooting Menu 2 (P. 76).
• The super control panel switches to RC mode.
• You can choose the super control panel display by repeatedly pressing the INFO
button.
• Select a fl ash mode (note that red-eye reduction is not available in RC mode).
3
Adjust the settings for each group in the super control panel.
250250 F5.6
P
3838
A Mode
TTL
M
Off
+5.0
TTL +3.0
1/8
–
LO
1
Ch
Flash intensity value
Group
• Select the fl ash control
mode and adjust the fl ash
intensity separately for
each group. For MANUAL,
select the fl ash intensity.
Normal fl ash/Super FP fl ash
• Switch between normal
fl ash and Super FP fl ash.
Communication light level
• Set the communication
light level to [HI], [MID],
or [LO].
Channel
• Set the communication
channel to the same
channel used on the fl ash.
Flash intensityFlash control
mode
Adjust settings for the camera
fl ash unit.
4
Attach the supplied external fl ash to the camera and raise the fl ash head.
• After confi rming that the built-in and remote fl ash units have charged, take a test shot.
132
EN
Using separately sold accessories
12
Wireless fl ash control range
Position the wireless fl ash units with
their remote sensors facing the camera.
The following illustration shows the
approximate ranges at which the fl ash
units can be positioned. The actual control
range varies with local conditions.
7m
5m
100°100°
50°
50°
50°
50°
60°
60°
30°
30°
30°
30°
# Cautions
• We recommend using a single group of up to three remote fl ash units.
• Remote fl ash units cannot be used for second curtain slow synchronization or anti-shock
exposures longer than 4 seconds.
• If the subject is too close to the camera, the control fl ashes emitted by the camera fl ash
may affect exposure (this effect can be reduced by reducing the output of the camera
fl ash by, for example, using a diffuser).
• The upper limit of fl ash synchronization timing is 1/250 sec. when using the fl ash in
remote control mode.
Other external fl ash units
Use after connecting the synchro cord to the hot shoe
or external fl ash jack. When not using an external fl ash
terminal, be sure to attach the cap.
When attaching a third-party fl ash to the camera’s hot shoe
or external fl ash jack, be careful of the following points.
Cap
• Using obsolete fl ash units that apply currents of more than about 250 V to the X-contact
will damage the camera.
• Connecting fl ash units with signal contacts that do not conform to Olympus specifi cations
may damage the camera.
• Set the Shooting mode to M, set the shutter speed to a value no higher than fl ash
synchronous speed, and set ISO sensitivity to a setting other than [AUTO].
• Flash control can only be performed by manually setting the fl ash to the ISO sensitivity
and aperture values selected with the camera. Flash brightness can be adjusted by
adjusting either ISO sensitivity or aperture.
• Use a fl ash with an angle of illumination suited to the lens. Angle of illumination is usually
expressed using 35-mm format equivalent focal lengths.
133
EN
Using separately sold accessories
12
Principal Accessories
Four Thirds lens adapter (MMF–2/MMF–3)
The camera requires a Four Thirds lens adapter to attach Four Thirds lenses. Since
the AF method differs when using a Micro Four Thirds system lens, the AF operational
area is narrower.
Remote cable (RM–UC1)
Use when the slightest camera movement can result in blurred pictures, for example
for macro or bulb photography. The remote cable attaches via the camera multi-
connector.
Converter lenses
Converter lenses attach to the camera lens for quick and easy fi sh-eye or macro
photography. See the OLYMPUS website for information on the lenses that can be
used.
• Use the appropriate lens attachment for SCN mode (f, w, or m).
Macro arm light (MAL–1)
Use to illuminate subjects for macro photography, even at ranges at which vignetting
would occur with the fl ash.
Microphone set (SEMA–1)
The microphone can be placed at a distance from the camera to avoid recording
ambient sounds or wind noise. Third-party commercial microphones can also be used
depending on your creative intent. We recommend that you use the supplied extension
cord. (power supplied via l3.5 mm stereo mini-plug)
Eyecup (EP-13)
You can exchange this for a larger eyecup.
Removing
134
EN
Using separately sold accessories
12
Power Supply
BCN-1
Li-ion Battery Charger
BLN-1
Li-ion Battery
Software
OLYMPUS Viewer
Digital Photo Managing Software
Remote Operation
RM-UC1
Remote Cable
SD/SDHC/
SDXC/Eye-Fi
Memory Card*
4
Connection Cable
USB Cable/
AV Cable/
HDMI Cable
Case / Strap
Shoulder Strap
Camera Case
Underwater
System
Underwater case
HLD-7
Power Battery
Holder
AC-3
AC adapter
System chart
*1 Not all lenses can be used with adapter. For details, refer to the Olympus Official Web Site. Also, please
note that manufacture of OM System Lenses has been discontinued.
*2 For compatible lens, refer to the Olympus Official Web Site.
Viewfinder
EP-13
Eyecup
VF-3/VF-4
Electronic View Finder
Accessory port devices
MAL-1
MACRO ARM
LIGHT
OLYMPUS PENPAL PP-1
*3
Communication Unit
SEMA-1
Microphone Set 1
135
EN
Using separately sold accessories
12
: E-M1 compatible products
Lens
MF-2 *
1
OM Adapter 2
For the latest information, please visit the Olympus website.
M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED 12-50mm f3.5-6.3 EZ
M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED 12-40mm f2.8 PRO
M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED 12mm f2.0
M.ZUIKO DIGITAL 17mm f1.8
M.ZUIKO DIGITAL 17mm f2.8
M.ZUIKO DIGITAL 45mm f1.8
M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED 75mm f1.8
M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED 60mm f2.8 Macro
M.ZUIKO DIGITAL 14-42mm f3.5-5.6 II R
M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED 9-18mm f4.0-5.6
M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED 14-150mm f4.0-5.6
M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED 40-150mm f4.0-5.6 R
M.ZUIKO DIGITAL 75-300mm f4.8-6.7 II
Flash
STF-22
Twin Flash Set
FC-1
Macro Flash Controller
FL-600R
Electronic Flash
FL-14
Electronic Flash
FL-300R
Electronic Flash
Converter Lens*
2
FCON-P01
Fisheye
WCON-P01
Wide
MCON-P01
Macro
MMF-2/MMF-3 *
1
Four Thirds Adapter
: Commercially available products
*3 The OLYMPUS PENPAL can be used only in the region in which it was purchased. Depending on the
areas, the usage may infringe the wave regulations and may be subject to its penalty.
*4 Use the Eye-Fi card in compliance with the laws and regulations of the country where the camera is used.
RF-11*
2
Ring Flash
TF-22 *
2
Twin Flash
SRF-11
Ring Flash Set
OM System Lenses
Four Thirds System Lenses
136
EN
Information
13
13
Shooting tips and information
The camera does not turn on even when a battery is loaded
The battery is not fully charged
• Charge the battery with the charger.
The battery is temporarily unable to function because of the cold
• Battery performance drops at low temperatures. Remove the battery and warm it by
putting it in your pocket for a while.
No picture is taken when the shutter button is pressed
The camera has turned off automatically
• The camera automatically enters sleep mode to reduce the drain on the battery if no
operations are performed for a set period of time. g [Sleep] (P. 93)
If no operations are performed for a set time (4 hours) after the camera has entered sleep
mode, the camera will turn off automatically.
The fl ash is charging
• On the monitor, the # mark blinks when charging is in progress. Wait for the blinking to
stop, then press the shutter button.
Unable to focus
• The camera cannot focus on subjects that are too close to the camera or that are not
suited to autofocus (the AF confi rmation mark will blink in the monitor). Increase the
distance to the subject or focus on a high contrast object at the same distance from the
camera as your main subject, compose the shot, and shoot.
Subjects that are diffi cult to focus on
It may be diffi cult to focus with auto focus in the following situations.
AF confi rmation
mark is blinking.
These subjects
are not focused.
Subject with low
contrast
Excessively bright
light in center of
frame
Subject containing no
vertical lines
AF confi rmation
mark lights up but
the subject is not
focused.
Subjects at different
distances
Fast-moving subject Subject not inside
AF area
Information
137
EN
Information
13
Noise reduction is activated
• When shooting night scenes, shutter speeds are slower and noise tends to appear in
images. The camera activates the noise-reduction process after shooting at slow shutter
speeds. During which, shooting is not allowed. You can set [Noise Reduct.] to [Off].
g [Noise Reduct.] (P. 93)
The number of AF targets is reduced
The number and size of AF targets varies with aspect ratio, group target settings, and the
option selected for [Digital Tele-converter]. When using a Four Thirds system lens, there are
37 targets.
The date and time has not been set
The camera is used with the settings at the time of purchase
• The date and time of the camera is not set when purchased. Set the date and time before
using the camera. g “Setting the date/time” (P. 17)
The battery has been removed from the camera
• The date and time settings will be returned to the factory default settings if the camera is
left without the battery for approximately 1 day. The settings will be cancelled more quickly
if the battery was only loaded in the camera for a short time before being removed. Before
taking important pictures, check that the date and time settings are correct.
Set functions are restored to their factory default settings
When you rotate the mode dial or turn off the power in a shooting mode other than P, A,
S, or M, functions with changes made to their settings are restored to the factory default
settings.
Image taken appears whitish
This may occur when the picture is taken in backlight or semi-backlight conditions. This is
due to a phenomenon called fl are or ghosting. As far as possible, consider a composition
where strong light source is not taken in the picture. Flare may occur even when a light
source is not present in the picture. Use a lens hood to shade the lens from the light source.
If a lens hood does not have effect, use your hand to shade the lens from the light.
g “Interchangeable lenses” (P. 125)
Unknown bright dot(s) appear on the subject in the picture taken
This may be due to stuck pixel(s) on the image pickup device. Perform [Pixel Mapping].
If the problem persists, repeat pixel mapping a few times. g “Pixel Mapping - Checking the
image processing functions” (P. 141)
Functions that cannot be selected from menus
Some items may not be selectable from the menus when using the arrow pad.
• Items that cannot be set with the current shooting mode.
• Items that cannot be set because of an item that has already been set:
Combination of [T] and [Noise Reduct.], etc.
138
EN
Information
13
Error codes
Monitor
indication
Possible cause Corrective action
No Card
The card is not inserted, or it
cannot be recognized.
Insert a card or insert a different
card.
Card Error
There is a problem with the card.
Insert the card again. If the
problem persists, format the card.
If the card cannot be formatted, it
cannot be used.
Write Protect
Writing to the card is prohibited.
The card write-protect switch is
set to the “LOCK” side. Release
the switch. (P. 123)
Card Full
• The card is full. No more
pictures can be taken or no
more information such as print
reservation can be recorded.
• There is no space in the card
and print reservation or new
images cannot be recorded.
Replace the card or erase
unwanted pictures.
Before erasing, download
important images to a PC.
Clean the contact area of
the card with a dry cloth.
Clean Card
Format
Card Setup
Set
Card cannot be read. Card may
not have been formatted.
• Select [Clean Card], press
Q and turn off the camera.
Remove the card and wipe dry
the metallic surface with a soft,
dry cloth.
• Select [Format][Yes], and then
press Q to format the card.
Formatting the card erases all
data on the card.
No Picture
There are no pictures on the
card.
The card contains no pictures.
Record pictures and play back.
Picture Error
The selected picture cannot be
displayed for playback due to
a problem with this picture. Or
the picture cannot be used for
playback on this camera.
Use image processing software to
view the picture on a PC.
If that cannot be done, the image
fi le is damaged.
The Image Cannot
Be Edited
Pictures taken with another
camera cannot be edited on this
camera.
Use image processing software to
edit the picture.
Picture Error
Images cannot be transferred
between devices that are
currently receiving or transmitting
data.
Increase the amount of memory
available on the card, for example
by deleting unwanted images,
or choose a smaller size for the
images being transmitted.
139
EN
Information
13
Monitor
indication
Possible cause Corrective action
m
The internal temperature of
the camera has risen due to
sequential shooting.
Turn off the camera and wait for
the internal temperature to cool.
Internal camera
temperature is too
high. Please wait
for cooling before
camera use.
Wait a moment for the camera to
turn off automatically.
Allow the internal temperature
of the camera to cool before
resuming operations.
Battery Empty
The battery is drained. Charge the battery.
No Connection
The camera is not correctly
connected to a computer, printer,
HDMI display, or other device.
Reconnect the camera.
No Paper
There is no paper in the printer. Load some paper in the printer.
No Ink
The printer has run out of ink.
Replace the ink cartridge in the
printer.
Jammed
The paper is jammed. Remove the jammed paper.
Settings Changed
The printer’s paper cassette has
been removed or the printer has
been manipulated while making
settings on the camera.
Do not manipulate the printer
while making settings on the
camera.
Print Error
There is a problem with the
printer and/or camera.
Turn off camera and printer.
Check the printer and remedy any
problems before turning the power
on again.
Cannot Print
Pictures recorded on other
cameras may not be printed on
this camera.
Use a personal computer to print.
The lens is locked.
Please extend the
lens.
The lens of the retractable lens
stays retracted.
Extend the lens. (P. 14)
Please check the
status of a lens.
An abnormality has occurred
between the camera and the
lens.
Turn off the camera, check the
connection with the lens, and turn
the power on again.
140
EN
Information
13
Cleaning and storing the camera
Cleaning the camera
Turn off the camera and remove the battery before cleaning the camera.
Exterior:
• Wipe gently with a soft cloth. If the camera is very dirty, soak the cloth in mild soapy water
and wring well. Wipe the camera with the damp cloth and then dry it with a dry cloth. If you
have used the camera at the beach, use a cloth soaked in clean water and well wrung.
Monitor:
• Wipe gently with a soft cloth.
Lens:
• Blow dust off the lens with a commercially available blower. For the lens, wipe gently with
a lens cleaning paper.
Storage
• When not using the camera for a prolonged period, remove the battery and card. Store
the camera in a cool, dry place that is well ventilated.
• Insert the battery periodically and test the camera’s functions.
• Remove dust and other foreign matter from the body and rear caps before attaching them.
• Attach the body cap to the camera to prevent dust from getting inside when no lens is
attached. Be sure to replace the front and rear lens caps before putting the lens away.
• Clean the camera after use.
• Do not store with insect repellent.
Cleaning and checking the image pickup device
This camera incorporates a dust reduction function to keep dust from getting on the
image pickup device and to remove any dust or dirt from the image pickup device
surface with ultrasonic vibrations. The dust reduction function operates when the
camera is turned on.
The dust reduction function operates at the same time as the pixel mapping, which
checks the image pickup device and image processing circuitry. Since dust reduction
is activated every time the camera’s power is turned on, the camera should be held
upright for the dust reduction function to be effective.
# Cautions
• Do not use strong solvents such as benzene or alcohol, or a chemically treated cloth.
• Avoid storing the camera in places where chemicals are treated, in order to protect the
camera from corrosion.
• Mold may form on the lens surface if the lens is left dirty.
• Check each part of the camera before use if it has not been used for a long time. Before
taking important pictures, be sure to take a test shot and check that the camera works
properly.
141
EN
Information
13
Pixel Mapping - Checking the image processing functions
The pixel mapping feature allows the camera to check and adjust the image pickup
device and image processing functions. After using the monitor or taking continuous
shots, wait for at least one minute before using the pixel mapping function to ensure
that it operates correctly.
1
Select [Pixel Mapping] in c Custom Menu (P. 98) tab k.
2
Press I, then press Q.
• The [Busy] bar is displayed when pixel mapping is in progress. When pixel mapping
is fi nished, the menu is restored.
# Cautions
• If you accidentally turn the camera off during pixel mapping, start again from Step 1.
142
EN
Information
13
Menu directory
*1: Can be added to [Myset].
*2: Default can be restored by selecting [Full] for [Reset].
*3: Default can be restored by selecting [Basic] for [Reset].
K Shooting Menu
Tab Function Default *1 *2 *3
g
W
Card Setup ― 76
Reset/Myset ―
77
Picture Mode
jNatural
68
K
Still Picture
YN
70
Movie
X
Image Aspect 4:3
69
Digital Tele-converter Off
84
X j/Y o
55
Image Stabilizer
Still Picture S-I.S. Auto
66
Movie M-I.S. On
Bracketing
Off
80
AE BKT 3f 1.0EV
WB BKT
A – B
― 81
G – M
FL BKT ― 81
ISO BKT ― 81
ART BKT ― 81
HDR Off
59
Multiple Exposure
Frame Off
82Auto Gain Off
Overlay Off
Time Lapse Settings Off
83
Frame 99
Start Waiting Time 00:00:01
Interval Time 00:00:01
Time Lapse Movie Off
# RC Mode
Off
131
143
EN
Information
13
q Playback Menu
Tab Function Default *1 *2 *3
g
q
m
Start ―
65
BGM Joy
Slide All
Slide Interval 3 sec
Movie Interval Short
R
On
85
Edit
Sel. Image
RAW Data Edit ― 85
JPEG Edit ― 86
R
― 87
Image Overlay ― 87
Print Order ― 112
Reset Protect ― 87
Connection to Smartphone ― 87
d Setup Menu
Tab Function Default *1 *2 *3
g
d
X
― 17
W *
― 88
i
j ±0, k ±0,
Natural
88
Rec View 0.5 sec
88
Wi-Fi Settings
Wi-Fi Connect
Settings
Private
88
Private Password ―
Reset share
Order
―
Reset Wi-Fi
Settings
―
c/# Menu Display
c Menu Display
On
88
# Menu Display
Off
Firmware ― 88
* Settings differ depending on the region where the camera is purchased.
144
EN
Information
13
c Custom Menu
Tab Function Default *1 *2 *3
g
cR
AF/MF
AF Mode
Still Picture S-AF
90
Movie C-AF
Full-time AF Off
AEL/AFL
S-AF mode1
C-AF mode2
MF mode1
Reset Lens On
BULB/TIME Focusing On
Focus Ring
b
MF Assist
Magnify Off
Peaking Off
P Set Home o
AF Illuminat. On
91
I Face Priority
K
AF Area Pointer On
C-AF Lock Off
S
Button/Dial/Lever
Button
Function
UFunction P
91
VFunction
Multi Function
RFunction
RREC
tFunction
AEL/AFL
YFunction
k
ZFunction
z
IFunction
#
*
GFunction
j/Y
*
nFunction P
mFunction
AEL/AFL
nFunction
P
lFunction
AF Stop
Dial
Function
P
Ps/F
A
FNo./F
S
Shutter/F
M Shutter/FNo.
Menu
FG/HI
q Prev/Next/G/U
Dial Direction
Exposure Dial1
Ps Dial1
Mode Dial Function Off
t Lever Function
mode1
u+v
On
* When [nFunction] is set to [Direct Function]
145
EN
Information
13
Tab Function Default *1 *2 *3
g
c
T
Release/j
Rls Priority S Off
91
Rls Priority C On
j L fps
6 fps
j H fps
10 fps
j + IS Off
On
Half Way Rls With IS On
Lens I.S. Priority Off
92
Release Lag-Time Normal
U
Disp/8/PC
HDMI
HDMI Out 1080i
92
HDMI Control Off
Video Out ―
KControl
Settings
iAUTO Live Guide
P/A/S/M Live Control
ART Art Menu
SCN Scene Menu
G/Info
Settings
q Info
Image Only, Overall
LV-Info
Image Only, u, Level
Gauge
G Settings O, Calendar
Displayed Grid Off
Picture Mode Settings All On
Histogram
Settings
Highlight 255
Shadow 0
Mode Guide On
Live View Boost Off
Frame Rate Normal
Art LV Mode mode1
Expand LV Dyn. Range On
Flicker reduction Auto
93
LV Close Up Mode mode2
Peaking Settings White
Backlit LCD Hold
Sleep 1 min
Auto Power Off 4h
8
On
USB Mode Auto
146
EN
Information
13
Tab Function Default *1 *2 *3
g
c
V
Exp/p/ISO
EV Step 1/3EV
93
Noise Reduct. Auto
Noise Filter Standard
94
ISO Auto
ISO Step 1/3EV
ISO-Auto Set
High Limit: 1600
Default: 200
ISO-Auto P/A/S
Metering
p
AEL Metering Auto
BULB/TIME Timer 8 min
BULB/TIME Monitor -7
Live BULB Off
Live TIME 0.5 sec
Anti-Shock z
Off
W
# Custom
# X-Sync.
1/320
94
# Slow Limit
1/60
w+F
Off
X
K/Color/WB
K Set
K1 YF, K2 YN, K3 XN,
K4 WN
95
Pixel
Count
Xiddle
2560×1920
Wmall
1280×960
Shading Comp. Off
WB Auto A : 0, G : 0
All >
All Set —
All Reset —
W Keep Warm Color
On
#+WB
WB Auto
Color Space sRGB
Y
Record/Erase
Quick Erase Off
96
RAW+JPEG Erase RAW+JPEG
File Name Reset
Edit Filename Off
Priority Set No
dpi Settings 350dpi
Copyright
Settings
Copyright Info. Off
Artist Name —
Copyright Name —
147
EN
Information
13
Tab Function Default *1 *2 *3
g
cZ
Movie
nMode
P
97
Movie R
On
Movie Effect On
Wind Noise Reduction Off
Recording Volume
Built-In R
Standard
External R
Standard
Line-In R
Standard
b
Built-In EVF
Built-in EVF Style Style 3
97
V Info Settings
u, Level Gauge, Basic
Information
V Displayed Grid
Off
EVF Auto Switch On
EVF Adjust
EVF Auto
Luminance
On
V Half Way Level
On
k
K Utility
Pixel Mapping —
98
Exposure
Shift
p
±0
J
5
AF Focus Adj. Off
: Warning Level
±0
: Battery Priority
PBH Battery
Level Adjust —
Touch Screen Settings On
Eye-Fi On
# Accessory Port Menu
Tab Function Default *1 *2 *3
g
#A
OLYMPUS PENPAL Share
Please Wait —
109, 110
Address
Book
Address List —
110
Search Timer 30 sec
New Pairing —
My OLYMPUS PENPAL —
Picture Send Size Size 1: Small
B
OLYMPUS PENPAL Album
Copy All —
111
Reset Protect —
Album Mem. Usage —
Album Mem. Setup —
Picture Copy Size Size 2: Medium
C
Electronic Viewfi nder
EVF Adjust
j ±0, k ±0
111
EVF Auto Switch On
148
EN
Information
13
Specifi cations
Camera
Product type
Product type Digital camera with interchangeable Micro Four Thirds Standard lens
system
Lens M.Zuiko Digital, Micro Four Thirds System Lens
Lens mount Micro Four Thirds mount
Equivalent focal length on
a 35 mm fi lm camera
Approx. twice the focal length of the lens
Image pickup device
Product type 4/3" Live MOS sensor
No. of total pixels Approx. 17,200,000 pixels
No. of effective pixels Approx. 16,280,000 pixels
Screen size 17.3 mm (H) × 13.0 mm (V)
Aspect ratio 1.33 (4:3)
Viewfi nder
Type Electronic viewfi nder with eye sensor
No. of pixels 2,360,000 pixels
Magnifi cation 100%
Eye point Approx. 21.0 mm (–1 m
-1
)
Live view
Sensor Uses Live MOS sensor
Field of view 100%
Monitor
Product type 3.0" TFT color LCD, Vari-angle, touch screen
Total no. of pixels Approx. 1,040,000 dots (aspect ratio 3 : 2)
Shutter
Product type Computerized focal-plane shutter
Shutter 1/8000 - 60 sec., bulb photography, time photography
Auto focus
Product type Hi-Speed Imager AF
Focusing points 81 points
Selection of focusing point Auto, Optional
Exposure control
Metering system TTL metering system (imager metering)
Digital ESP metering/Center weighted averaging metering/Spot metering
Metered range EV –2 - 20 (Equivalent to M.ZUIKO DIGITAL 17mm f2.8, ISO100)
Shooting modes
A: iAUTO/P: Program AE (Program shift can be performed)/
A: Aperture priority AE/S: Shutter priority AE/M: Manual/
J: PHOTO STORY/ART: Art fi lter/SCN: Scene/
n
: Movie
ISO sensitivity LOW, 200 - 25600 (1/3, 1 EV step)
Exposure compensation ±5 EV (1/3, 1/2, 1 EV step)
White balance
Product type Image pickup device
Mode setting Auto/Preset WB (7 settings)/Customized WB/One-touch WB
149
EN
Information
13
Recording
Memory SD, SDHC, SDXC and Eye-Fi
UHS-I compatible
Recording system Digital recording, JPEG (in accordance with Design rule for Camera File
system (DCF)), RAW Data, MP format
Applicable standards Exif 2.3, Digital Print Order Format (DPOF), PRINT Image Matching III,
PictBridge
Sound with still pictures Wave format
Movie MPEG-4 AVC/H.264 / Motion JPEG
Audio Stereo, PCM 48kHz
Playback
Display format Single-frame playback/Close-up playback/Index display/Calendar display
Drive
Drive mode Single-frame shooting/Sequential shooting/Self-timer
Sequential shooting
Up to 10 fps (T)
Self-timer Operation time: 12 sec./2 sec./Customized
Energy saving function Switch to sleep mode: 1 minute, Power OFF: 4 hours
(This function can be customized.)
External fl ash
Flash control mode TTL-AUTO (TTL pre-fl ash mode)/MANUAL
Sync speed 1/320 s or slower (FL-LM2)
Wireless LAN
Compatible standard IEEE 802.11b/g/n
External connector
Multi-connector (USB connector, AV connector)/HDMI micro-connector (type D)/ Accessory port/
External fl ash connector/Microphone connector
Power supply
Battery Li-ion Battery ×1
Dimensions/weight
Dimensions 130.4 mm (W) × 93.5 mm (H) × 63.1 mm (D) (5.1" × 3.7" × 2.5")
(excluding protrusions)
Weight Approx. 497 g (0.9 lb.) (including battery and memory card)
Operating environment
Temperature –10 °C - 40 °C (14 °F - 104 °F) (operation)/–20 °C - 60 °C (–4 °F - 140
°F) (storage)
Humidity 30% - 90% (operation)/10% - 90% (storage)
Splash resistance
Type Equivalent to IEC Standard publication 529 IPX1 (under OLYMPUS test
conditions)
HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Defi nition
Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered
trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.
150
EN
Information
13
FL-LM2
Guide number 7 (ISO100), 10 (ISO200)
Firing angle Covers the angle of view of a 14 mm lens (28 mm in 35 mm format)
Dimensions Approx. 44.3 mm (W) × 33.5 mm (H) × 52.5 mm (D) (1.7" × 1.3" × 2.1")
Weight Approx. 31 g (0.07 Ib.)
Splash resistance Type Equivalent to IEC Standard publication 529 IPX1 (under OLYMPUS test
conditions)
Lithium ion battery
MODEL NO. BLN-1
Product type Rechargeable Lithium ion battery
Nominal voltage DC 7.6 V
Nominal capacity 1220 mAh
No. of charge and discharge times Approx. 500 times (varies with usage conditions)
Ambient temperature 0 °C - 40 °C (32 °F - 104 °F) (charging)
Dimensions Approx. 36.0 mm (W) × 15.4 mm (H) × 50.2 mm (D)
(1.4" × 0.6" × 2.0")
Weight Approx. 52 g (0.1 Ib.)
Lithium ion charger
MODEL NO. BCN-1
Rated input AC 100 V - 240 V (50/60 Hz)
Rated output DC 8.7 V, 600 mA
Charging time Approx. 4 hours (room temperature)
Ambient temperature 0 °C - 40 °C (32 °F - 104 °F) (operation)/
–20 °C - 60 °C (–4 °F - 140 °F) (storage)
Dimensions Approx. 67 mm (W) × 26 mm (H) × 95.5 mm (D) (2.6" × 1.0" × 3.8")
Weight (without AC cable) Approx. 77 g (0.2 Ib.)
• The AC cable supplied with this device is for use only with this device and should not be
used with other devices. Do not use cables for other devices with this device.
SPECIFICATIONS ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT ANY NOTICE OR
OBLIGATION ON THE PART OF THE MANUFACTURER.
151
EN
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
14
14
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK, DO NOT
REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE.
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED OLYMPUS SERVICE PERSONNEL.
An exclamation mark enclosed in a triangle alerts you to important operating
and maintenance instructions in the documentation provided with the
product.
DANGER
If the product is used without observing the information given under this
symbol, serious injury or death may result.
WARNING
If the product is used without observing the information given under this
symbol, injury or death may result.
CAUTION
If the product is used without observing the information given under this
symbol, minor personal injury, damage to the equipment, or loss of valuable
data may result.
WARNING!
TO AVOID THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRICAL SHOCK, NEVER DISASSEMBLE, EXPOSE
THIS PRODUCT TO WATER OR OPERATE IN A HIGH HUMIDITY ENVIRONMENT.
General Precautions
Read All Instructions — Before you use the
product, read all operating instructions. Save all
manuals and documentation for future reference.
Cleaning — Always unplug this product from
the wall outlet before cleaning. Use only a damp
cloth for cleaning. Never use any type of liquid or
aerosol cleaner, or any type of organic solvent to
clean this product.
Attachments — For your safety, and to avoid
damaging the product, use only accessories
recommended by Olympus.
Water and Moisture — For precautions on
products with weatherproof designs, read the
weatherproofi ng sections.
Location — To avoid damage to the product,
mount the product securely on a stable tripod,
stand, or bracket.
Power Source — Connect this product only to
the power source described on the product label.
Foreign Objects — To avoid personal injury,
never insert a metal object into the product.
Heat — Never use or store this product near
any heat source such as a radiator, heat register,
stove, or any type of equipment or appliance that
generates heat, including stereo amplifi ers.
Product Handling Precautions
WARNING
• Do not use the camera near fl ammable or
explosive gases.
• Do not use the fl ash and LED on people
(infants, small children, etc.) at close
range.
You must be at least 1 m (3 ft.) away from
the faces of your subjects. Firing the fl ash
too close to the subject’s eyes could cause
a momentary loss of vision.
152
EN
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
14
• Keep young children, infants, and animals
such as pets away from the camera.
Always use and store the camera out of
the reach of young children and infants to
prevent the following dangerous situations
which could cause serious injury:
• Becoming entangled in the camera strap,
causing strangulation.
• Accidentally swallowing the battery, cards
or other small parts.
• Accidentally fi ring the fl ash into their own
eyes or those of another child.
• Accidentally being injured by the moving
parts of the camera.
• Do not look at the sun or strong lights
with the camera.
• Do not use or store the camera in dusty or
humid places.
• Do not cover the fl ash with a hand while
fi ring.
CAUTION
• Stop using the camera immediately if
you notice any unusual odors, noise, or
smoke around it.
Never remove the batteries with bare
hands, which may cause a fi re or burn your
hands.
• Never hold or operate the camera with
wet hands.
• Do not leave the camera in places where
it may be subject to extremely high
temperatures.
Doing so may cause parts to deteriorate
and, in some circumstances, cause the
camera to catch fi re.
Do not use the charger if it is covered (such
as a blanket). This could cause overheating,
resulting in fi re.
• Handle the camera with care to avoid
getting a low-temperature burn.
When the camera contains metal parts,
overheating can result in a low-temperature
burn. Pay attention to the following:
• When used for a long period, the camera
will get hot. If you hold on to the camera
in this state, a low temperature burn may
be caused.
• In places subject to extremely cold
temperatures, the temperature of the
camera’s body may be lower than the
environmental temperature. If possible,
wear gloves when handling the camera in
cold temperatures.
• Be careful with the strap.
Be careful with the strap when you carry
the camera. It could easily catch on stray
objects - and cause serious damage.
Battery Handling Precautions
Follow these important guidelines to prevent
batteries from leaking, overheating, burning,
exploding, or causing electrical shocks or burns.
DANGER
• The camera uses a lithium ion battery
specifi ed by Olympus. Charge the battery
with the specifi ed charger. Do not use any
other chargers.
• Never heat or incinerate batteries.
• Take precautions when carrying or storing
batteries to prevent them from coming into
contact with any metal objects such as
jewelry, pins, fasteners, etc.
• Never store batteries where they will be
exposed to direct sunlight, or subjected to
high temperatures in a hot vehicle, near a
heat source, etc.
• To prevent causing battery leaks or damaging
their terminals, carefully follow all instructions
regarding the use of batteries. Never attempt
to disassemble a battery or modify it in any
way, by soldering, etc.
• If battery fl uid gets into your eyes, fl ush
your eyes immediately with clear, cold
running water and seek medical attention
immediately.
• Always store batteries out of the reach of
small children. If a child accidentally swallows
a battery, seek medical attention immediately.
• Should you notice that the charger is emitting
smoke, heat, or an unusual noise or smell,
immediately cease use and unplug the
charger from the power outlet, and then
contact an authorized distributor or service
center.
WARNING
• Keep batteries dry at all times.
• To prevent batteries from leaking,
overheating, or causing a fi re or explosion,
use only batteries recommended for use with
this product.
• Insert the battery carefully as described in the
operating instructions.
• If rechargeable batteries have not been
recharged within the specifi ed time, stop
charging them and do not use them.
• Do not use a battery if it is cracked or broken.
• If a battery leaks, becomes discolored or
deformed, or becomes abnormal in any other
way during operation, stop using the camera.
• If a battery leaks fl uid onto your clothing
or skin, remove the clothing and fl ush the
affected area with clean, running cold water
immediately. If the fl uid burns your skin, seek
medical attention immediately.
• Never subject batteries to strong shocks or
continuous vibration.
153
EN
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
14
CAUTION
• Before loading, always inspect the battery
carefully for leaks, discoloration, warping, or
any other abnormality.
• The battery may become hot during
prolonged use. To avoid minor burns, do not
remove it immediately after using the camera.
• Always unload the battery from the camera
before storing the camera for a long period.
• This camera uses a lithium ion battery
specifi ed by Olympus. Do not use any other
type of battery. For safe and proper use, read
the battery's instruction manual carefully
before using it.
• If the battery's terminals get wet or greasy,
camera contact failure may result. Wipe the
battery well with a dry cloth before use.
• Always charge a battery when using it for
the fi rst time, or if it has not been used for a
long period.
• When operating the camera with battery
power at low temperatures, try to keep
the camera and spare battery as warm as
possible. A battery that has run down at
low temperatures may be restored after it is
warmed at room temperature.
• The number of pictures you can take may
vary depending on the shooting conditions
or battery.
• Before going on a long trip, and especially
before traveling abroad, purchase extra
batteries. A recommended battery may be
diffi cult to obtain while traveling.
• When the camera will not be used for an
extended period, store it in a cool place.
• Please recycle batteries to help save our
planet’s resources. When you throw away
dead batteries, be sure to cover their
terminals and always observe local laws and
regulations.
Precautions when using the
wireless LAN function
WARNING
• Turn off the camera in hospitals and other
locations where medical equipment is
present.
The radio waves from the camera may
adversely affect medical equipment,
causing a malfunction that results in an
accident.
• Turn off the camera when onboard
aircraft.
Using wireless devices onboard may hinder
safe operation of the aircraft.
Caution for Usage Environment
• To protect the high-precision technology
contained in this product, never leave the
camera in the places listed below, no matter if
in use or storage:
• Places where temperatures and/or
humidity are high or go through extreme
changes. Direct sunlight, beaches, locked
cars, or near other heat sources (stove,
radiator, etc.) or humidifi ers.
• In sandy or dusty environments.
• Near fl ammable items or explosives.
• In wet places, such as bathrooms or
in the rain. When using products with
weatherproof designs, read their manuals
as well.
• In places prone to strong vibrations.
• Never drop the camera or subject it to severe
shocks or vibrations.
• When mounted on a tripod, adjust the
position of the camera with the tripod head.
Do not twist the camera.
• Do not leave the camera pointed directly
at the sun. This may cause lens or shutter
curtain damage, color failure, ghosting on
the image pickup device, or may possibly
cause fi res.
• Do not touch electric contacts on cameras
and interchangeable lenses. Remember to
attach the body cap when removing the lens.
• Before storing the camera for a long period,
remove the battery. Select a cool, dry location
for storage to prevent condensation or
mold from forming inside the camera. After
storage, test the camera by turning it on and
pressing the shutter release button to make
sure that it is operating normally.
• The camera may malfunction if it is used in
a location where it is subject to a magnetic/
electromagnetic fi eld, radio waves, or high
voltage, such as near a TV set, microwave,
video game, loud speakers, large monitor
unit, TV/radio tower, or transmission towers.
In such cases, turn the camera off and on
again before further operation.
• Always observe the operating environment
restrictions described in the camera’s
manual.
• Do not directly touch or wipe the image
pickup device of the camera.
154
EN
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
14
Monitor
The display on the rear of the camera is an LCD
monitor.
• In the unlikely event that the monitor
breaks, do not put the liquid crystal in your
mouth. Any of the material adhering to your
hands, feet, or clothing should be rinsed off
immediately.
• A strip of light may appear on the top/bottom
of the monitor, but this is not a malfunction.
• When a subject is viewed diagonally in the
camera, the edges may appear zigzagged on
the monitor. This is not a malfunction; it will
be less noticeable in playback mode.
• In places subject to low temperatures, the
monitor may take a long time to turn on or its
color may change temporarily.
When using the camera in extremely cold
places, it is a good idea to occasionally place
it in a warm place. An monitor exhibiting poor
performance due to low temperatures will
recover in normal temperatures.
• The monitor is made with high-precision
technology. However, black spots or bright
spots of light may appear constantly on the
monitor.
Due to its characteristics or the angle at
which you are viewing the monitor, the spot
may not be uniform in color and brightness.
This is not a malfunction.
Lens
• Do not immerse in water or splash with water.
• Do not drop or exert strong force on the lens.
• Do not hold at the moving part of the lens.
• Do not touch the lens surface directly.
• Do not touch the contact points directly.
• Do not subject to abrupt temperature
changes.
Legal and Other Notices
• Olympus makes no representations or
warranties regarding any damages, or
benefi t expected by using this unit lawfully,
or any request from a third person, which
are caused by the inappropriate use of this
product.
• Olympus makes no representations or
warranties regarding any damages or any
benefi t expected by using this unit lawfully
which are caused by erasing picture data.
Disclaimer of Warranty
• Olympus makes no representations or
warranties, either expressed or implied, by
or concerning any content of these written
materials or software, and in no event
shall be liable for any implied warranty of
merchantability or fi tness for any particular
purpose or for any consequential, incidental
or indirect damages (including but not limited
to damages for loss of business profi ts,
business interruption and loss of business
information) arising from the use or inability
to use these written materials or software
or equipment. Some countries do not allow
the exclusion or limitation of liability for
consequential or incidental damages, so the
above limitations may not apply to you.
• Olympus reserves all rights to this manual.
Warning
Unauthorized photographing or use of
copyrighted material may violate applicable
copyright laws. Olympus assumes no
responsibility for unauthorized photographing,
use or other acts that infringe upon the rights of
copyright owners.
Copyright Notice
All rights reserved. No part of these written
materials or this software may be reproduced
or used in any form or by any means, electronic
or mechanical, including photocopying and
recording or the use of any type of information
storage and retrieval system, without the prior
written permission of Olympus. No liability
is assumed with respect to the use of the
information contained in these written materials
or software, or for damages resulting from
the use of the information contained therein.
Olympus reserves the right to alter the features
and contents of this publication or software
without obligation or advance notice.
155
EN
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
14
FCC Notice
This equipment has been tested and found
to comply with the limits for a Class B digital
device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide reasonable
protection against harmful interference in
a residential installation. This equipment
generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency
energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instructions, may cause
harmful interference to radio communications.
However, there is no guarantee that interference
will not occur in a particular installation. If this
equipment does cause harmful interference
to radio or television reception, which can be
determined by turning the equipment off and
on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the
interference by one or more of the following
measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the
equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a
circuit different from that to which the receiver
is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/
TV technician for help.
• Only the OLYMPUS-supplied USB cable
should be used to connect the camera to
USB enabled personal computers.
FCC Caution
Changes or modifi cations not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
This transmitter must not be co-located or
operated in conjunction with any other antenna
or transmitter.
This equipment complies with FCC/IC radiation
exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled
environment and meets the FCC radio frequency
(RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to
OET65 and RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency
(RF) Exposure rules. This equipment has very
low levels of RF energy that are deemed to
comply without testing of specifi c absorption
ratio (SAR).
Use Only Dedicated
Rechargeable Battery and
Battery Charger
We strongly recommend that you use only the
genuine Olympus dedicated rechargeable battery
and battery charger with this camera.
Using a non-genuine rechargeable battery and/
or battery charger may result in fi re or personal
injury due to leakage, heating, ignition or damage
to the battery. Olympus does not assume any
liability for accidents or damage that may result
from the use of a battery and/or battery charger
that are not genuine Olympus accessories.
156
EN
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
14
For customers in North and South America
For customers in USA
Declaration of Conformity
Model Number : E-M1
Trade Name : OLYMPUS
Responsible Party :
Address : 3500 Corporate Parkway, P. O. Box 610, Center Valley, PA 18034-0610, USA
Telephone Number : 484-896-5000
Tested To Comply With FCC Standards
FOR HOME OR OFFICE USE
This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules and Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference.
(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
For customers in Canada
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. CAN ICES-3(B)
OLYMPUS WORLDWIDE LIMITED WARRANTY
- IMAGING PRODUCTS
Olympus warrants that the enclosed Olympus®
imaging product(s) and related Olympus®
accessories (individually a “Product” and
collectively the “Products”) will be free from
defects in materials and workmanship under
normal use and service for a period of one (1)
year from the date of purchase.
If any Product proves to be defective within the
one-year warranty period, the customer must
return the defective Product to any of Olympus
Service Centers, following the procedure
set forth below (See “WHAT TO DO WHEN
SERVICE IS NEEDED”).
Olympus, at its sole discretion, will repair,
replace, or adjust the defective Product, provided
that Olympus investigation and factory inspection
disclose that (a) such defect developed under
normal and proper use and (b) the Product is
covered under this limited warranty.
Repair, replacement, or adjustment of defective
Products shall be Olympus’s sole obligation and
the customer’s sole remedy hereunder.
The customer is liable and shall pay for shipment
of the Products to the Olympus Service Center.
Olympus shall not be obligated to perform
preventive maintenance, installation,
deinstallation, or maintenance.
Olympus reserves the right to (i) use
reconditioned, refurbished, and/or serviceable
used parts (that meet Olympus’s quality
assurance standards) for warranty or any other
repairs and (ii) make any internal or external
design and/or feature changes on or to its
products without any liability to incorporate such
changes on or to the Products.
WHAT IS NOT COVERED BY THIS LIMITED
WARRANTY
Excluded from this limited warranty and not
warranted by Olympus in any fashion, either
express, implied, or by statute, are:
(a) products and accessories not manufactured
by Olympus and/or not bearing the
“OLYMPUS” brand label (the warranty
coverage for products and accessories
of other manufacturers, which may be
distributed by Olympus, is the responsibility
of the manufacturers of such products
and accessories in accordance with the
terms and duration of such manufacturers’
warranties);
(b) any Product which has been disassembled,
repaired, tampered with, altered, changed,
or modifi ed by persons other than Olympus’s
own authorized service personnel unless
repair by others is made with the written
consent of Olympus;
(c) defects or damage to the Products resulting
from wear, tear, misuse, abuse, negligence,
sand, liquids, impact, improper storage,
nonperformance of scheduled operator
and maintenance items, battery leakage,
use of non-“OLYMPUS” brand accessories,
consumables, or supplies, or use of the
Products in combination with non-compatible
devices;
(d) software programs;
(e) supplies and consumables (including but
not limited to lamps, ink, paper, fi lm, prints,
negatives, cables and batteries); and/or
(f) Products which do not contain a validly
placed and recorded Olympus serial number,
unless they are a model on which Olympus
does not place and record serial numbers.
157
EN
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
14
EXCEPT FOR THE LIMITED WARRANTY SET
FORTH ABOVE, OLYMPUS MAKES NO AND
DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER REPRESENTATIONS,
GUARANTIES, CONDITIONS, AND
WARRANTIES CONCERNING THE
PRODUCTS, WHETHER DIRECT OR
INDIRECT, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, OR
ARISING UNDER ANY STATUTE, ORDINANCE,
COMMERCIAL USAGE OR OTHERWISE,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY
WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION AS TO
THE SUITABILITY, DURABILITY, DESIGN,
OPERATION, OR CONDITION OF THE
PRODUCTS (OR ANY PART THEREOF)
OR THE MERCHANTABILITY OF THE
PRODUCTS OR THEIR FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OR RELATING
TO THE INFRINGEMENT OF ANY PATENT,
COPYRIGHT, OR OTHER PROPRIETARY
RIGHT USED OR INCLUDED THEREIN.
IF ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES APPLY AS
A MATTER OF LAW, THEY ARE LIMITED IN
DURATION TO THE LENGTH OF THIS LIMITED
WARRANTY.
SOME STATES MAY NOT RECOGNIZE
A DISCLAIMER OR LIMITATION OF
WARRANTIES AND/OR LIMITATION OF
LIABILITY SO THE ABOVE DISCLAIMERS AND
EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY.
THE CUSTOMER MAY ALSO HAVE
DIFFERENT AND/OR ADDITIONAL RIGHTS
AND REMEDIES THAT VARY FROM STATE
TO STATE.
THE CUSTOMER ACKNOWLEDGES AND
AGREES THAT OLYMPUS SHALL NOT BE
RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY DAMAGES THAT
THE CUSTOMER MAY INCUR FROM DELAYED
SHIPMENT, PRODUCT FAILURE, PRODUCT
DESIGN, SELECTION, OR PRODUCTION,
IMAGE OR DATA LOSS OR IMPAIRMENT
OR FROM ANY OTHER CAUSE, WHETHER
LIABILITY IS ASSERTED IN CONTRACT, TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE AND STRICT
PRODUCT LIABILITY) OR OTHERWISE. IN NO
EVENT SHALL OLYMPUS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL
OR SPECIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND
(INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION LOSS
OF PROFITS OR LOSS OF USE), WHETHER
OR NOT OLYMPUS SHALL BE OR SHOULD
BE AWARE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
POTENTIAL LOSS OR DAMAGE.
Representations and warranties made by any
person, including but not limited to dealers,
representatives, salespersons, or agents of
Olympus, which are inconsistent or in confl ict
with or in addition to the terms of this limited
warranty, shall not be binding upon Olympus
unless reduced to writing and approved by an
expressly authorized offi cer of Olympus.
This limited warranty is the complete and
exclusive statement of warranty which
Olympus agrees to provide with respect to the
Products and it shall supersede all prior and
contemporaneous oral or written agreements,
understandings, proposals, and communications
pertaining to the subject matter hereof.
This limited warranty is exclusively for the
benefi t of the original customer and cannot be
transferred or assigned.
WHAT TO DO WHEN SERVICE IS NEEDED
The customer must transfer any image or other
data saved on a Product to another image or
data storage medium and/or remove any fi lm
from the Product prior to sending the Product to
Olympus for service.
IN NO EVENT SHALL OLYMPUS BE
RESPONSIBLE FOR SAVING, KEEPING OR
MAINTAINING ANY IMAGE OR DATA SAVED
ON A PRODUCT RECEIVED BY IT FOR
SERVICE, OR ON ANY FILM CONTAINED
WITHIN A PRODUCT RECEIVED BY IT
FOR SERVICE, NOR SHALL OLYMPUS BE
RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY DAMAGES IN
THE EVENT ANY IMAGE OR DATA IS LOST
OR IMPAIRED WHILE SERVICE IS BEING
PERFORMED (INCLUDING, WITHOUT
LIMITATION, DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
CONSEQUENTIAL OR SPECIAL DAMAGES,
LOSS OF PROFITS OR LOSS OF USE),
WHETHER OR NOT OLYMPUS SHALL BE OR
SHOULD BE AWARE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH POTENTIAL LOSS OR IMPAIRMENT.
Package the Product carefully using ample
padding material to prevent damage in transit
and either deliver it to the Authorized Olympus
Dealer that sold you the Product or ship it
postage prepaid and insured to any of our
Olympus Service Centers.
When returning Products for service, your
package should include the following:
1 Sales receipt showing date and place of
purchase.
2 Copy of this limited warranty bearing the
Product serial number corresponding to
the serial number on the Product (unless it
is a model on which Olympus does not place
and record serial numbers).
3 A detailed description of the problem.
158
EN
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
14
4 Sample prints, negatives, digital prints (or
fi les on disk) if available and related to the
problem.
When service is completed, the Product will be
returned to you postage prepaid.
WHERE TO SEND PRODUCT FOR SERVICE
See “WORLDWIDE WARRANTY” for the nearest
service center.
INTERNATIONAL WARRANTY SERVICE
International warranty service is available under
this warranty.
For customers in Europe
“CE” mark indicates that this
product complies with the
European requirements for safety,
health, environment and customer
protection. “CE” mark cameras
are intended for sales in Europe.
Hereby, Olympus Imaging Corp.
and Olympus Europa SE & Co.
KG declare that this E-M1 is in
compliance with the essential
requirements and other relevant
provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.
For details visit: http://olympus-
europa.com/
This symbol [crossed-out
wheeled bin WEEE Annex IV]
indicates separate collection of
waste electrical and electronic
equipment in the EU countries.
Please do not throw the
equipment into the domestic
refuse.
Please use the return and
collection systems available in
your country for the disposal of
this product.
This symbol [crossed-out wheeled
bin Directive 2006/66/EC Annex
II] indicates separate collection
of waste batteries in the EU
countries.
Please do not throw the batteries
into the domestic refuse.
Please use the return and
collection systems available in
your country for the disposal of
the waste batteries.
Provisions of warranty
1
If this product proves to be defective, although
it has been used properly (in accordance
with the written Handling Care and Operating
instructions supplied with it), during the
applicable national warranty period and has
been purchased from an authorized Olympus
distributor within the business area of
Olympus Europa SE & Co. KG as stipulated
on the website: http://www.olympus.com this
product will be repaired, or at Olympus’s
option replaced, free of charge. To claim
under this warranty the customer must take
the product before the end of the applicable
national warranty period to the dealer where
the product was purchased or any other
Olympus service station within the business
area of Olympus Europa SE & Co. KG as
stipulated on the website: http://www.olympus.
com. During the one year period of the World
Wide Guarantee the customer may turn the
product in at any Olympus service station.
Please notice that not in all countries such
Olympus service station exists.
2 The customer shall transport the product
to the dealer or Olympus authorized
service station at his own risk and shall
be responsible for any costs incurred in
transporting the product.
Provisions of Guarantee
1 “OLYMPUS IMAGING CORP.” grants a one
year World Wide Guarantee. This worldwide
Guarantee must be presented at an Olympus
authorized repair service station before any
repair can be made under conditions of this
Guarantee. This Guarantee is valid only if the
Guarantee Certifi cate and proof of purchase
are presented at the Olympus repair service
station. Please note that this Guarantee is in
addition to and does not affect the customer’s
legal warranty rights under the applicable
national legislation governing the sale of
consumer goods mentioned above.
2 This Guarantee does not cover the following
and the customer will be required to pay
repair charge, even for defects occurring
within the Guarantee period referred to
above.
(a) Any defect that occurs due to mishandling
(such as an operation performed that is
not mentioned in the Handling Care or
other sections of the instructions, etc.)
(b) Any defect that occurs due to repair,
modifi cation, cleaning, etc. performed
by anyone other than Olympus or an
Olympus authorized service station.
159
EN
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
14
(c) Any defect or damage that occurs due to
transport, a fall, shock, etc. after purchase
of the product.
(d) Any defect or damage that occurs due
to fi re, earthquake, fl ood damage,
thunderbolt, other natural disasters,
environmental pollution and irregular
voltage sources.
(e) Any defect that occurs due to careless
or improper storage (such as keeping
the product under conditions of high
temperature and humidity, near insect
repellents such as naphthalene or harmful
drugs, etc.), improper maintenance, etc.
(f) Any defect that occurs due to exhausted
batteries, etc.
(g) Any defect that occurs due to sand, mud,
etc. entering the inside of the product
casing.
(h) When the Guarantee Certifi cate is not
returned with the product.
(i) When any alterations whatsoever are
made to the Guarantee Certifi cate
regarding the year, month and date of
purchase, the customer’s name, the
dealer’s name, and the serial number.
(j) When proof of purchase is not presented
with this Guarantee Certifi cate.
3 This Guarantee applies to the product only;
the Guarantee does not apply to any other
accessory equipment, such as the case,
strap, lens cap and batteries.
4 Olympus’s sole liability under this Guarantee
shall be limited to repairing or replacing the
product. Any liability under the Guarantee
for indirect or consequential loss or damage
of any kind incurred or suffered by the
customer due to a defect of the product,
and in particular any loss or damage caused
to any lenses, fi lms, other equipment or
accessories used with the product or for any
loss resulting from a delay in repair or loss of
data, is excluded. Compelling regulations by
law remain unaffected by this.
Notes regarding Guarantee
maintenance
1 This Guarantee will only be valid if the
Guarantee Certifi cate is duly completed
by Olympus or an authorized dealer or
other documents contain suffi cient proof.
Therefore, please make sure that your name,
the name of the dealer, the serial number and
the year, month and date of purchase are all
completed or the original invoice or the sales
receipt (indicating the dealer’s name, the date
of purchase and product type) is attached to
this Guarantee Certifi cate. Olympus reserves
the right to refuse free-of-charge service if
neither Guarantee Certifi cate is completed
nor the above document is attached or if the
information contained in it is incomplete or
illegible.
2 Since this Guarantee Certifi cate will not be
re-issued, keep it in a safe place.
• Please refer to the list on the web site:
http://www.olympus.com for the authorized
international Olympus service network.
For customers in Thailand
This telecommunication equipment conforms to
technical standard NTC TS 1012-2551.
This telecommunication equipment conforms to
NTC technical requirement.
For customers in Mexico
The operation of this equipment is subject to the
following two conditions:
(1) it is possible that this equipment or device
may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this equipment or device must accept any
interference, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
For customer in Singapore
160
EN
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
14
Trademarks
• Microsoft and Windows are registered
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
• Macintosh is a trademark of Apple Inc.
• SDXC Logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
• Eye-Fi is a trademark of Eye-Fi, Inc.
• “Shadow Adjustment Technology”
function contains patented
technologies from Apical Limited.
• Micro Four Thirds, Four Thirds,
and the Micro Four Thirds
and Four Thirds logos are trademarks or
registered trademarks of the OLYMPUS
IMAGING Corporation in Japan, the United
States, the countries of the European Union,
and other countries.
• “PENPAL” is used in reference to the
OLYMPUS PENPAL.
• Wi-Fi is a registered trademark of the Wi-Fi
Alliance.
• The Wi-Fi CERTIFIED
logo is a certifi cation mark
of the Wi-Fi Alliance.
• The standards for camera
fi le systems referred to in this manual are the
“Design Rule for Camera File System/DCF”
standards stipulated by the Japan Electronics
and Information Technology Industries
Association (JEITA).
• All other company and product names are
registered trademarks and/or trademarks of
their respective owners.
THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE
AVC PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE
PERSONAL AND NONCOMMERCIAL USE
OF A CONSUMER TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO IN
COMPLIANCE WITH THE AVC STANDARD (“AVC
VIDEO”) AND/OR (ii) DECODE AVC VIDEO THAT
WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED
IN A PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL
ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A
VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE
AVC VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR
SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINED
FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C. SEE HTTP://WWW.
MPEGLA.COM
The software in this camera may include third
party software. Any third party software is subject
to the terms and conditions, imposed by the
owners or licensors of that software, under which
software is provided to you.
Those terms and other third party software
notices, if any, may be found in the software
notice PDF fi le stored within the accompanying
CD-ROM or at
http://www.olympus.co.jp/en/support/imsg/
digicamera/download/notice/notice.cfm
161
EN
Index
Symbols
# RC Mode .......................................131
W (Language selection) .................88
c/# Menu Display .............................88
P Set Home .....................................90
I Face Priority .............................53, 91
j H fps..............................................91
j L fps ..............................................91
j + IS Off ..........................................91
G/Info Settings ..................................92
K Control Settings .............................92
# Slow Limit........................................94
# X-Sync. ...........................................94
w+F .................................................94
#+WB .................................................95
8 Warning Level .............................98
I/H (Underwater wide/underwater
macro) ...........................................100
G (Index display) ...............................61
U (Close-up playback) .......................61
n (Movie mode) .................................42
n Mode ..............................................97
(Single-frame erase) .......................33
v (Picture selection) ..........................33
0 (Protecting).............................32, 64
P (AF Area)......................................52
W Keep Warm Color .........................95
R (Image rotation) .............................85
K Set ................................................95
8 (Beep sound) .................................93
R (Audio recording) .............................64
i (Monitor brightness adjustment) ....88
m (Slideshow) ...................................65
t Lever Function ..............................91
A
A (Aperture priority mode) ..................39
Address Book ....................................110
AEL/AFL ........................................90, 98
AEL Metering .......................................94
AF Illuminat..........................................91
AF Mode ........................................73, 90
Album Mem. Usage ........................... 111
All > ...............................................95
Anti-Shock z .....................................94
ART (Art fi lter mode) ............................44
Art Fade ...............................................42
Art LV Mode .........................................93
Aspect..................................................69
B
Backlit LCD ..........................................93
Bracketing............................................80
BULB ...................................................41
BULB/TIME Focusing ..........................90
BULB/TIME Monitor.............................94
BULB/TIME Timer ................................94
Button Function ...................................91
C
Card Setup ..........................................76
Color Space .........................................95
Connection to Smartphone ..................87
Copy All ............................................. 111
Copyright Settings ...............................96
D
Date/time setting X.............................17
Dial Direction .......................................91
Dial Function........................................91
Digital Tele-converter ...................84, 100
Displayed Grid .....................................92
dpi Settings ..........................................96
E
Edit Filename.......................................96
162
EN
Erase Selected ....................................33
EVF Adjust ......................................... 111
EV Step ...............................................93
Exposure Shift .....................................98
Eye-Fi ..................................................98
F
File Name ............................................96
Firmware ..............................................88
Flash intensity control w ....................71
Flicker reduction ..................................93
Focus Ring ..........................................90
Full-time AF .........................................90
H
Half Way Rls With IS ...........................91
HDMI ...................................................92
HDR ..................................................... 59
Highlight&Shadow Control...................49
Histogram Settings ..............................92
I
A (iAuto mode) ..................18, 22, 26
Image Aspect .......................................69
Image Overlay .....................................87
Image Stabilizer ...................................66
INFO button .............................37, 49, 60
ISO ................................................57, 94
ISO-Auto .............................................. 94
ISO-Auto Set .......................................94
ISO Step ..............................................94
J
JPEG Edit ............................................86
L
Lens I.S. Priority ..................................92
Level Adjust .........................................98
Live BULB............................................94
Live Control .........................................30
Live Guide ...................................28, 100
Live TIME ............................................94
LIVE TIME ...........................................41
Live View Boost ...................................92
LV super control panel .......................103
M
M (Manual shooting) ...........................41
Metering...............................................72
MF .....................................................100
MF Assist .......................................90, 99
Mode Dial Function..............................91
Mode Guide .........................................92
Movie R .........................................74, 97
Movie Play ...........................................63
Movie Tele-converter ...........................43
MTP ................................................... 118
Multi Echo ............................................42
Multi Function ..............................23, 100
Multiple Exposure a ..........................82
My OLYMPUS PENPAL .....................110
N
Noise Filter ..........................................94
Noise Reduct. ......................................93
O
OLYMPUS PENPAL Album ............... 111
OLYMPUS PENPAL Share ........109, 110
One Shot Echo ....................................42
P
P (Program shooting) ..........................38
Peaking Settings..................................93
Picture Copy Size .............................. 111
Picture Mode .................................68, 78
Picture Mode Settings .........................92
Pixel Count ..........................................95
Pixel Mapping ....................................141
Print ................................................... 113
Print reservation < ...........................112
Priority Set ...........................................96
Q
Quick Erase .........................................96
R
RAW Data Edit ....................................85
RAW+JPEG Erase ..............................96
Recording Volume ...............................97
163
EN
Rec View .............................................88
Release Lag-Time ...............................92
Reset Lens ..........................................90
Reset/Myset.........................................77
Reset Protect ............................... 87, 111
Rls Priority C ........................................91
Rls Priority S ........................................91
Rotate .................................................. 64
S
S (Shutter priority shooting) ................40
Shading Comp. ....................................95
Sleep .............................................16, 93
Storage ..............................................118
Super Control Panel ............................24
T
Time Lapse Settings ............................83
Touch Screen Settings.........................98
U
USB Mode ...........................................93
V
Video Out .............................................92
W
WB ................................................. 56, 95
Wi-Fi Settings ......................................89
Authorized Distributors
United Kingdom:
/Eire
Olympus Service Department
Olympus Imaging & Audio
KeyMed House
Stock Road
Southend-on-Sea
Essex
SS2 5QH
United Kingdom
South Africa: Tudortech (Pty) Ltd.
Ground floor, Building 1A,
Wedgefield Office Park,
17 Muswell Road,
Bryanston 219
South Africa
Tel: +27 (0) 11 803 2226
Fax: +27 (0) 86 639 5359
Service - 0800 111 4888
Fax: +44 (0) 1702 452763
E-mail: [email protected]
www.olympus.co.uk
Premises:
Goods delivery:
Letters:
Consumer Product Division
Wendenstrasse 14 – 18, 20097 Hamburg, Germany
Tel.: +49 40 - 23 77 3-0 / Fax: +49 40 - 23 07 61
Modul H, Willi-Bleicher Str. 36, 52353 Düren, Germany
Postfach 10 49 08, 20034 Hamburg, Germany
European Technical Customer Support:
Please visit our homepage
http://www.olympus-europa.com
or call our TOLL FREE NUMBER*:
00800 - 67 10 83 00
* Please note some (mobile) phone services / provider do not permit access or request an
additional prefix to +800 numbers.
For all not listed European Countries and in case that you can’t get connected
to the above mentioned number please make use of the following
CHARGED NUMBERS:
for Austria, Belgium, Czech Republic, Denmark, Finland, France, Germany, Luxemburg,
Netherlands, Norway, Poland, Portugal, Russia, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland,
United Kingdom.
+49 40 - 237 73 899.
Our Technical Customer Support is available from Monday to Thursday 9 am to 6 pm,
Friday 9 am to 3:30 pm CET.
WC182501
Documenttranscriptie
Table of Contents Quick task index DIGITAL CAMERA Instruction Manual 1. Preparing the camera and flow of operations 2. Shooting using the viewfinder 3. Shooting using live view 4. Viewing photographs and movies 5. Basic operations 6. Using shooting options 7. Menu functions 8. Printing pictures 9. Connecting the camera to a computer and a smartphone 10. Battery, battery charger, and card 11. Interchangeable lenses 12. Using separately sold accessories 13. Information 14. SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Thank you for purchasing an Olympus digital camera. Before you start to use your new camera, please read these instructions carefully to enjoy optimum performance and a longer service life. Keep this manual in a safe place for future reference. We recommend that you take test shots to get accustomed to your camera before taking important photographs. The screen and camera illustrations shown in this manual were produced during the development stages and may differ from the actual product. The contents in this manual are based on firmware version 1.0 for this camera. If there are additions and/or modifications of functions due to firmware update for the camera, the contents will differ. For the latest information, please visit the Olympus website. This notice concerns the supplied flash unit and is chiefly directed to users in North America. Information for Your Safety IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS When using your photographic equipment, basic safety precautions should always be followed, including the following: • Read and understand all instructions before using. • Close supervision is necessary when any flash is used by or near children. Do not leave flash unattended while in use. • Care must be taken as burns can occur from touching hot parts. • Do not operate if the flash has been dropped or damaged - until it has been examined by qualified service personnel. • Let flash cool completely before putting away. • To reduce the risk of electric shock, do not immerse this flash in water or other liquids. • To reduce the risk of electric shock, do not disassemble this flash, but take it to qualified service personnel when service or repair work is required. Incorrect reassembly can cause electric shock when the flash is used subsequently. • The use of an accessory attachment not recommended by the manufacturer may cause a risk of fire, electric shock, or injury to persons. SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS Indications used in this manual The following symbols are used throughout this manual. # Cautions Important information on factors which may lead to a malfunction or operational problems. Also warns of operations that should be absolutely avoided. $ Notes Points to note when using the camera. % Tips Useful information and hints that will help you get the most out of your camera. g 2 EN Reference pages describing details or related information. Table of Contents 7 Unpack the box contents.............9 Preparing the camera and flow of operations 10 Names of parts ...........................10 Charging and inserting the battery .........................................12 Inserting and removing cards ...13 Attaching a lens to the camera .........................................14 Attaching the flash unit .............15 Power on .....................................16 Setting the date/time ..................17 Setting the shooting mode ........18 Selecting a shooting method ....19 Shooting using the viewfinder 20 Shooting ......................................20 Shooting still pictures................20 Recording movies .....................22 Setting shooting functions ........23 Using the Multi-function button........................................23 Using the super control panel ...24 Shooting using live view 25 Shooting ......................................25 Shooting still pictures................25 Recording movies .....................26 Using the touch screen..............27 Selecting a focusing method ....27 Using the wireless LAN function .....................................27 Setting shooting functions ........28 Using live guides ......................28 Using live control .......................30 Viewing photographs and movies 31 Viewing photographs and movies .........................................31 Index display/Calendar display ......................................31 Viewing still images ..................32 Watching movies ......................32 Volume......................................32 Protecting images .....................32 Erasing images .........................33 Selecting images ......................33 Table of Contents Quick task index Using the touch screen..............34 Selecting and protecting images ......................................34 Basic operations 35 Information displays while shooting ......................................35 Viewfinder display when shooting using the viewfinder ..................35 Monitor display when shooting using live view ..........................36 Switching the information display ......................................37 Using the shooting modes ........38 “Point-and-shoot” photography (P program mode) ....................38 Choosing aperture (A aperture-priority mode) .......39 Choosing shutter speed (S shutter-priority mode) ..........40 Choosing aperture and shutter speed (M manual mode) ..........41 EN 3 Table of Contents Using movie mode (n) ............42 Adding effects to a movie [Movie Effect] ............................42 Using art filters..........................44 Shooting in scene mode ...........45 Using PHOTO STORY .............47 Commonly used shooting options ........................................49 Controlling exposure (exposure compensation) .........49 Changing the brightness of highlights and shadows ............49 Locking the exposure (AE Lock) ..................................49 Using a flash (flash photography)...................50 Choosing a focus target (AF Area) ..................................52 Setting the AF target .................52 Face priority AF/pupil detection AF .............................................53 Zoom frame AF/zoom AF..........54 Sequential shooting/using the self timer ...................................55 Adjusting color (white balance) .........................56 ISO sensitivity ...........................57 Controlling color (Color Creator)..........................58 HDR photography .....................59 Information display during playback ......................................60 Playback image information .....60 Switching the information display ......................................60 Changing the playback information display method.......61 Sharing images over Wi-Fi connection (Share Order) .........62 Manipulating playback images ......................................63 4 EN Using shooting options 66 Reducing camera shake (image stabilizer) ......................66 Processing options (picture mode) ..........................68 Adding effects to a movie .........69 Setting the image aspect ..........69 Image quality (record mode).....70 Adjusting flash output (flash intensity control)..............71 Choosing how the camera measures brightness (metering) .................................72 Choosing a focus mode (AF mode).................................73 Movie sound options (recording sound with movies) ...................74 Menu functions 75 Basic menu operations ..............75 Using Shooting Menu 1/ Shooting Menu 2 ........................76 Formatting the card (Card Setup) .............................76 Restoring default settings (Reset/Myset) ...........................77 Processing options (Picture Mode) ..........................78 Image quality (K) ...................79 Setting the self timer (j/Y) ...79 Varying settings over a series of photographs (bracketing)......80 Recording multiple exposures in a single image (multiple exposure)..................................82 Shooting automatically with a fixed interval (time lapse shooting) ...................................83 Wireless remote control flash photography..............................84 Digital Zoom (Digital Tele-converter) .............84 HDR photography .....................84 Using the setup menu ................88 X (Date/time setting) ...............88 W (Changing the display language)..................................88 i (Monitor brightness adjustment) ...............................88 Rec View ..................................88 Wi-Fi Settings ...........................88 c/# Menu Display ..................88 Firmware...................................88 Setting up a wireless LAN connection (Wi-Fi Settings) ......89 Using the custom menus...........90 R AF/MF ..................................90 S Button/Dial/Lever .................91 T Release/j .........................91 U Disp/8/PC ..........................92 V Exp/p/ISO..........................93 W # Custom ............................94 X K/Color/WB .......................95 Y Record/Erase .......................96 Z Movie ...................................97 b Built-In EVF ..........................97 k K Utility ..............................98 AEL/AFL ...................................98 MF Assist ..................................99 Button Function ........................99 t Lever Function.................101 Viewing camera images on TV ...........................................101 Choosing the control panel displays (KControl Settings) .................................103 Adding information displays (G/Info Settings) ...................105 Shutter speeds when the flash fires automatically [# X-Sync.] [# Slow Limit].........................106 AF focus adjustments .............107 Using the accessory port menus ........................................108 Before using the accessory port menus .....................................108 Using OLYMPUS PENPAL .....109 A OLYMPUS PENPAL Share ...................................... 110 B OLYMPUS PENPAL Album ..................................... 111 C Electronic Viewfinder ......... 111 Printing pictures Table of Contents Using the playback menu ..........85 Displaying images rotated (R) ..........................................85 Editing still images ....................85 Canceling all protections ..........87 Using the Smartphone connection option (Connection to Smartphone) .........................87 112 Print reservation (DPOF) ......... 112 Creating a print order.............. 112 Removing all or selected pictures from the print order ... 112 Direct printing (PictBridge) ..... 113 Easy printing ........................... 114 Custom printing ...................... 114 Connecting the camera to a computer and a smartphone 116 Installing the PC software ....... 116 Copying pictures to a computer without OLYMPUS Viewer 3..... 118 Using the camera wireless LAN function ............................. 119 Things you can do with OI.Share.....................................121 EN 5 Battery, battery charger, and card 122 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 151 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ..........151 Battery and charger .................122 Table of Contents Using an optional AC adapter....122 Using your charger abroad .....122 Usable cards .............................123 Record mode and file size/ number of storable still pictures .....................................124 Interchangeable lenses 125 M.ZUIKO DIGITAL lens specifications ..........................125 Using separately sold accessories 129 Power Battery Holder (HLD-7) ......................................129 External flash units designated for use with this camera ..........130 Wireless remote control flash photography............................131 Other external flash units ........132 Principal Accessories ..............133 System chart .............................134 Information 136 Shooting tips and information................................136 Error codes ...............................138 Cleaning and storing the camera .......................................140 Cleaning the camera ..............140 Storage ...................................140 Cleaning and checking the image pickup device ...............140 Pixel Mapping - Checking the image processing functions ....141 Menu directory..........................142 6 EN Specifications ...........................148 Index 161 Quick task index Taking pictures with automatic settings iAUTO (A) Easy photography with special effects Art filter (ART) 44 Choosing an aspect ratio Aspect ratio 69 Quickly matching settings to the scene Scene mode (SCN) 45 Pro-level photography made simple Live Guide 28 Adjusting the brightness of a photograph Exposure compensation 49 Taking pictures with a blurred background Taking pictures that stop the subject in motion or convey a sense of motion Taking pictures with the correct color Processing pictures to match the subject/ Taking monotone pictures 18 Live Guide 28 Aperture priority shooting 39 Live Guide 28 Shutter priority shooting 40 White balance 56 One-touch white balance 57 Picture Mode 68 Art filter (ART) 44 Using the touch screen 27 AF Area 52 Zoom frame AF/zoom AF 54 Focusing on a small spot in the frame/ confirming focus before shooting Zoom frame AF/zoom AF 54 Recomposing photographs after focusing C-AF+TR (AF tracking) 73 Turning off the beep speaker 8 (Beep sound) Taking photos without the flash ISO/DIS Mode When the camera will not focus on your subject/Focusing on one area Reducing camera shake Taking pictures of a subject against backlight Photographing fireworks Reducing image noise (mottling) Taking pictures without white subjects appearing too white or black subjects appearing too dark Optimizing the monitor/ adjusting monitor hue Quick task index g Shooting 93 57/45 Image Stabilizer 66 Anti-Shock z 94 Self-timer 55 Remote cable 133 Flash shooting 50 Gradation (Picture Mode) 78 Bulb/time photography 41 Scene mode (SCN) 45 Noise Reduct. 93 Gradation (Picture Mode) 78 Histogram/ Exposure compensation 37/49 Highlight&Shadow Control 49 Monitor brightness adjustment 88 Live View Boost 92 EN 7 Preview function 100 Test Picture 100 Checking horizontal or vertical orientation before shooting Level gauge 37 Shooting with deliberate composition Displayed Grid 92 Zooming in on photos to check focus Autoq (Rec View) 88 Self-portraits Self-timer 55 Sequential shooting Sequential shooting 55 Extending the useful life of the battery Sleep 93 Increasing the number of pictures that can be taken Record mode 70 Checking set effect before taking a picture Quick task index g Playback/Retouch HDMI/Video Out 92 Playback on TV 101 Viewing slideshows with background music Slideshow 65 Viewing images on a TV Brightening shadows Shadow Adj (JPEG Edit) 86 Dealing with red-eye Redeye Fix (JPEG Edit) 86 Printing made easy Direct printing 113 Commercial prints Creating a print order 112 Simple photo sharing Share Order 62 Using the camera wireless LAN function 119 OLYMPUS PENPAL 109 Connection to Smartphone 87 g Camera Settings 8 EN Restoring default settings Reset 77 Saving the settings Myset 77 Changing the menu display language W 88 Unpack the box contents Camera • • • • Body cap Strap USB cable CB-USB6 Flash case Computer software CD-ROM Instruction manual Warranty card Flash FL-LM2 Lithium ion battery BLN-1 Unpack the box contents The following items are included with the camera. If anything is missing or damaged, contact the dealer from whom you purchased the camera. Lithium ion charger BCN-1 Attaching the strap 1 Thread the strap in the direction of the arrows. 1 2 3 2 4 Lastly, pull the strap tight making sure that it is fastened securely. 5 • Attach the other end of the strap to the other eyelet in the same way. EN 9 1 1 Preparing the camera and flow of operations Names of parts Preparing the camera and flow of operations 1 2 3 4 5 b 6 7 8 f g h i 9 0 a c d e j m n o k l 1 Mode dial lock .................................P. 18 2 Rear dial*1 (o) .......................P. 23, 38 – 41, 56, 58, 105 3 Fn2 button ................................P. 23, 49 4 H/R (Movie) button ........P. 33/P. 22, 99 5 Front dial*1 (r) .................P. 31, 38 – 41 6 Shutter button .................................P. 21 7 Self-timer lamp/AF illuminator ...............................................P. 55/P. 91 8 Lens attachment mark ....................P. 14 9 Y (One-touch white balance) button ........................................................P. 57 0 Z (Preview) button .........................P. 39 a Mount (Remove the body cap before attaching the lens.) b Mode dial ........................................P. 18 c Stereo microphone .............P. 64, 74, 87 d ON/OFF lever ................................P. 16 e AFm (AF/Metering mode) button (#/w settings*2) ..........P. 50, 71, 72, 73 f jYHDR (Sequential shooting/Selftimer/HDR) button (Bracket settings*2) .............P. 55, 37, 80 g External flash connector ...............P. 132 h Microphone connector cover i Strap eyelet.......................................P. 9 j Connector cover k Lens release button ........................P. 14 l Lens lock pin m Microphone connector (Third-party commercial microphones can be used. l3.5 stereo mini-plug) n HDMI connector (Type D) .............P. 101 o Multi-connector ............. P. 101, 113, 116 *1 In this manual, the r and o icons represent operations performed using the front dial and rear dial. *2 When the lever is set to 2 10 EN 8 1 3 c d e 4 5 f 6 g h 7 i n j m k l 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 a b Accessory port ..............................P. 108 Diopter adjustment dial ...................P. 20 u (LV) button ..............................P. 19 Monitor (Touch screen) ................................P. 16, 27, 34, 36, 60 Viewfinder ..........................P. 19, 20, 39 Eye sensor Eyecup ..........................................P. 133 Hot shoe .......................................P. 130 AEL/AFL button..................P. 32, 49, 98 Lever ..................................P. 38 – 41, 91 INFO button .............................P. 37, 60 Fn1 button ......................................P. 52 c d e f g h i j k l m n 1 Preparing the camera and flow of operations 9 0 a b 2 Q button ..................................P. 30, 75 Arrow pad* ......................................P. 31 MENU button .................................P. 75 q (Playback) button................P. 31, 61 Speaker (Erase) button ............................P. 33 Tripod socket PBH cover.....................................P. 129 Battery compartment cover.............P. 12 Battery compartment lock ...............P. 12 Card slot cover................................P. 13 Card slot .........................................P. 13 * In this manual, the FGHI icons represent operations performed using the arrow pad. EN 11 Charging and inserting the battery 1 1 Charging the battery. Direction indicating mark () Charging indicator Preparing the camera and flow of operations BCN-1 Charging in progress Charging complete Charging error Lithium ion charger Lights orange Off 3 1 AC wall outlet Charging indicator Blinks orange Lithium ion battery 2 AC cable (Charging time: Up to approximately 4 hours) # Cautions • Unplug the charger when charging is complete. 2 Loading the battery. Battery compartment cover Direction indicating mark 2 3 1 Battery compartment lock 3 Closing the battery cover. Removing the battery Turn off the camera before opening or closing the battery compartment cover. To remove the battery, first push the battery lock knob in the direction of the arrow and then remove. # Cautions • Contact an authorized distributor or service center if you are unable to remove the battery. Do not use force. $ Notes • It is recommended to set aside a backup battery for prolonged shooting in case the battery in use drains. • Also read “Battery, battery charger, and card” (P. 122). 12 EN Inserting and removing cards 1 Loading the card. 1 # Cautions • Turn off the camera before loading or removing the card. 1 3 2 2 Closing the card slot cover. • Close firmly until you hear a click. # Cautions • Be sure the card slot cover is closed before using the camera. Removing the card Press the inserted card lightly and it will be ejected. Pull out the card. # Cautions • Do not remove the battery or card while the card write indicator (P. 36) is displayed. Preparing the camera and flow of operations • Open the card slot cover. • Slide the card in until it is locked into place. g “Usable cards” (P. 123) Eye-Fi Cards Read “Usable cards” (P. 123) before use. EN 13 Attaching a lens to the camera 1 1 Attach a lens to the camera. Preparing the camera and flow of operations 1 2 1 Rear cap 2 • Align the lens attachment mark (red) on the camera with the alignment mark (red) on the lens, then insert the lens into the camera’s body. • Rotate the lens in the direction indicated by the arrow until you hear it clicks. # Cautions • Make sure the camera is turned off. • Do not press the lens release button. • Do not touch internal portions of the camera. 2 1 Remove the lens cap. 2 1 Using lenses with an UNLOCK switch Retractable lenses with an UNLOCK switch cannot be used while retracted. Turn the zoom ring in the direction of arrow (1) to extend the lens (2). To store, turn the zoom ring in the direction of arrow (4) while sliding the UNLOCK switch (3). 1 4 3 2 Removing the lens from the camera Lens release button While pressing the lens release button, rotate the lens in the direction of the arrow. 2 1 Interchangeable lenses Read “Interchangeable lenses” (P. 125). 14 EN Attaching the flash unit 1 Remove the terminal cover from the flash unit and attach the flash to the camera. UNLOCK switch 1 2 3 2 2 1 To use the flash, raise the flash head. • Lower the flash head when the flash is not in use. 1 Preparing the camera and flow of operations • Slide the flash unit all the way in, stopping when it contacts the back of the shoe and is securely in place. # Cautions • When not using the accessory port, be sure to attach the cover. Removing the Flash Unit Press the UNLOCK switch while removing the flash unit. UNLOCK switch 2 1 EN 15 Power on 1 1 Move the ON/OFF lever to the ON position to turn on the camera. • When the camera is turned on, the monitor will turn on. • To turn off the camera, return the lever to the OFF position. Preparing the camera and flow of operations ON/OFF lever Monitor Battery level ; (green): Camera ready to shoot. : (green): Low battery ] (blinks red): Charge the battery. R Wi-Fi 2013.10.01 12:30 ISO AUTO WB AUTO NORM AUTO i 4:3 250 F5.6 01:02:03 1023 Using the monitor 1 2 You can adjust the angle of the monitor. Camera sleep operation If no operations are performed for a minute, the camera enters “sleep” (stand-by) mode to turn off the monitor and to cancel all actions. The camera activates again when you touch any button (the shutter button, q button, etc.). The camera will turn off automatically if left in sleep mode for 4 hours. Turn the camera on again before use. 16 EN Setting the date/time Date and time information is recorded on the card together with the images. The file name is also included with the date and time information. Be sure to set the correct date and time before using the camera. Display the menus. • Press the MENU button to display the menus. Shooting Menu 1 1 2 MENU button Card Setup Reset/Myset Picture Mode D Image Aspect Digital Tele-converter Set Back 2 Setup Menu Select [X] in the [d] (setup) tab. 1 • Use FG on the arrow pad to select [d] and press I. • Select [X] and press I. 2 X W Rec View Wi-Fi Settings c/# Menu Display Firmware [d] tab Back 3 --.--.-- --:-English j±0 k±0 0.5sec Set X Set the date and time. • Use HI to select items. • Use FG to change the selected item. • Use FG to select the date format. h 4:3 Off Y 2013 M D Time Preparing the camera and flow of operations 1 1 Y/M/D Cancel The time is displayed using a 24-hour clock. 4 Save settings and exit. • Press Q to set the camera clock and exit to the main menu. • Press the MENU button to exit the menus. EN 17 Setting the shooting mode Use the mode dial to select the shooting mode. Indicator Mode icon 1 Preparing the camera and flow of operations A full auto mode in which the camera automatically optimizes settings for the A current scene. The camera does all the work, which is convenient for beginners. Aperture and shutter speed are automatically adjusted for optimal results. P You control aperture. You can sharpen or soften background details. A S You control shutter speed. You can express the motion of moving subjects, or freeze motion without any blur. M You control aperture and shutter speed. You can shoot with long exposures for fireworks or other dark scenes. ART SCN J n Select an art filter. Select a scene according to the subject. You can shoot a PHOTO STORY. Shoot with selected PHOTO STORY type. Shoot movies using shutter speed and aperture effects and movie special effects. First, try taking photographs in full auto mode. 1 Press the mode dial lock to release the lock and set the mode dial to A. • When the mode dial lock has been pressed down, the mode dial is locked. Each time you press the mode dial lock, it switches between locked/released. Mode dial lock Monitor R Wi-Fi 2013.10.01 12:30 ISO sensitivity ISO AUTO WB AUTO NORM AUTO i 4:3 250 F5.6 Shutter speed 18 EN 01:02:03 1023 Aperture value Available recording time Number of storable still pictures Selecting a shooting method Shooting using the viewfinder Monitor Viewfinder Monitor Lights up when you move your eye away from the viewfinder. R Wi-Fi 2013.10.01 12:30 ISO AUTO Shooting using live view u button Automatically lights up when your eye moves close. When the viewfinder is lit up, the monitor turns off. Wi-Fi S-IS AUTO j ISO-A 200 LN FullHD F 250 F5.6 WB AUTO Q i 4:3 250 F5.6 01:02:03 0.0 1023 Super control panel 250 F5.6 0.0 Q S-IS AUTO 01:02:03 e ISO-A 200 1023 Q WB WB AUTO AUTO 4:3 LN Cursor WB Auto S-IS AUTO ISO ISO AUTO 38 Live view display NORM AUTO 0.0 01:02:03 1 Preparing the camera and flow of operations With this camera, you can select between two shooting methods: Shooting using the viewfinder and shooting using live view with the monitor. Press the u button to switch between shooting methods. In addition, you can set various shooting functions using the super control panel, live control, and LV super control panel, depending on the shooting method. WB AUTO WB AUTO 4:3 LN NORM AUTO WB Auto i FullHD F AUTO AUTO 4:3 01:02:03 250 F5.6 1023 When setting shooting functions, if you press the Q button, a cursor will appear on the super control panel. Touch the function you want to set. If you press the Q button while the viewfinder is lit up, Live Control will be displayed in the viewfinder. (During A mode, a live guide is displayed.) P FullHD F AUTO AUTO When setting shooting functions, if you press the Q button, live control will be displayed and you can select a function by turning the rear dial. WB ISO AUTO WB AUTO NORM AUTO i 4:3 250 F5.6 01:02:03 1023 EN 19 2 Shooting using the viewfinder Shooting 2 Each time you press the u button, you can switch between shooting with the viewfinder and shooting with live view. When shooting with the viewfinder, the super control panel will be displayed on the monitor. Shooting using the viewfinder u button R Wi-Fi 2013.10.01 12:30 ISO AUTO WB AUTO NORM AUTO i 4:3 01:02:03 250 F5.6 Viewfinder 1023 Super control panel If the display in the viewfinder looks blurry Look through the viewfinder and rotate the diopter adjustment dial until the display is in sharp focus. Shooting still pictures 1 Set up the camera and decide on the composition. • The viewfinder turns on and the monitor turns off automatically when you put your eye to the viewfinder. • Be careful that your fingers or the camera strap do not obstruct the lens. Horizontal grip 20 EN Vertical grip 2 Lightly press the shutter button down to the first position. (Press halfway.) • The AF confirmation mark (() will be displayed, and a green frame (AF target) will be displayed in the focus location. AF target 2 250 F5.6 01:02:03 e ISO-A 200 1023 Aperture value AF confirmation mark Shutter speed • The ISO sensitivity, shutter speed and aperture value that have been set automatically by the camera are displayed. • If the AF confirmation mark blinks, the subject is not in focus. (P. 136) 3 Press the shutter button again to take a picture. (Press all the way down.) • The shutter sounds and the picture is taken. • The shot image will be displayed on the monitor. Pressing the shutter button halfway and all the way down The shutter button has two positions. The act of lightly pressing the shutter button to the first position and holding it there is called “pressing the shutter button halfway,” that of pressing it all the way down to the second position “pressing the shutter button all (or the rest of) the way down.” Press halfway Shooting using the viewfinder Press the shutter button halfway. Press the rest of the way down # Cautions • You can change the viewfinder display style. In this manual, [Style 1] is used. • If the angle of the monitor has been changed, the viewfinder will not light up automatically. • If you press and hold down the u button, a menu is displayed that allows you to change the settings for automatically lighting up the viewfinder. EN 21 Recording movies You can record movies in all shooting modes except J (PHOTO STORY). First, try recording in full auto mode. 2 1 Set the mode dial to A. 2 Press the R button to begin recording. R button Shooting using the viewfinder • The image being shot is displayed on the monitor. • If you look through the viewfinder, the image being recorded will be displayed. • You can change the focus location by touching the screen while recording (P. 27). 3 Press the R button again to end recording. R • When shooting is complete, the super control panel will be displayed on the monitor. 00:02:18 Displayed during recording Recording time # Cautions • When using a camera with a CMOS image sensor, moving objects may appear distorted due to the rolling shutter phenomenon. This is a physical phenomenon whereby distortion occurs in the filmed image when shooting a fast-moving subject or due to camera shaking. In particular, this phenomenon becomes more noticeable when using a long focal length. • If the camera is used for extended periods, the temperature of the image pickup device will rise and noise and colored fog may appear in images. Turn off the camera for a short time. Noise and colored fog may also appear in images recorded at high ISO sensitivity settings. If the temperature rises further, the camera will turn off automatically. • When using a Four Thirds system lens, the AF will not operate while recording movies. Taking photographs during movie recording • Press the shutter button during movie recording to pause movie recording and take a photograph. Movie recording restarts after the photograph is taken. Press the R button to end recording. Three files will be recorded to the memory card: the movie footage preceding the photograph, the photograph itself, and the movie footage following the photograph. • Only one photograph can be taken at a time during movie recording; the self-timer and flash cannot be used. # Cautions • Image size and quality for photographs are independent of movie frame size. • The autofocus and metering used in movie mode may differ from that used to take photographs. • The R button cannot be used to record movies in the following instances: Multiple exposure (still photography also ends.)/shutter button pressed halfway/during bulb or time photography/sequential shooting/Panorama/SCN mode (e-Portrait, HandHeld Starlight, 3D)/time lapse shooting 22 EN Setting shooting functions Using the Multi-function button When framing pictures in the viewfinder, you can adjust settings quickly using the multi-function button. At default settings, the Fn2 button is assigned the role of the multi-function button. 1 Press and hold the Fn2 button and rotate the dial. • The menus are displayed. 2 Keep rotating the dial to select the desired function. • Release the button when the desired function is selected. Using multifunction options Press the Fn2 button. An option selection dialog will be displayed. [a] assigned to Fn2 button Press and hold Q/Fn2 Fn2 Fn2 01:02:03 e ISO-A 200 1023 250 F5.6 250 F5.6 Shooting display 01:02:03 e ISO-A 200 1023 2 Shooting using the viewfinder Choosing a function 01:02:03 e ISO-A 200 1023 250 F5.6 Zoom AF Zoom frame AF Fn2 Other option assigned to Fn2 button HI LIGHT 4:3 SHADOW P 250 F5.6 0.0 01:02:03 e ISO-A 200 1023 Highlight and shadow control options Color Creator option Function b (Highlight and shadow control) (P.49) c (Color Creator) (P.58) a (Zoom frame AF/zoom AF) (P.54) d (Image Aspect) (P.69) Aspect ratio options Front dial (r) Rear dial (o) Highlight control Shadow control Hue Saturation Zoom frame AF: Exposure compensation Zoom AF: Zoom in or out Select an option EN 23 Using the super control panel When shooting using the viewfinder, the super control panel will be displayed on the monitor. Set your main shooting functions using the super control panel. Super control panel display R 1 2 2 Shooting using the viewfinder 3 6 ISO ISO AUTO 7 WB AUTO NORM AUTO 8 9 i 4 5 4:3 01:02:03 250 F5.6 +2.0 f e d c ba 1023 0 Settings that can be modified using the super control panel 1 2 3 4 5 6 Currently selected option ISO sensitivity .................................P. 57 Flash mode .....................................P. 50 Flash intensity control .....................P. 71 Sequential shooting/self-timer ........P. 55 White balance .................................P. 56 White balance compensation 7 Picture mode...................................P. 68 8 Sharpness N..................................P. 78 Contrast J .....................................P. 78 Saturation T .................................P. 78 Gradation z...................................P. 78 B&W Filter x .................................P. 78 Picture tone y ...............................P. 79 9 0 a b c d e Color space.....................................P. 95 Button function assignment ......P. 91, 99 Face priority ....................................P. 53 Metering mode ................................P. 72 Aspect ratio .....................................P. 69 Record mode ..................................P. 70 AF mode .........................................P. 73 AF target .........................................P. 52 f Image stabilizer...............................P. 66 # Cautions • Not displayed in SCN, J, or n modes. 1 Press the Q button. Cursor • The cursor appears. 2 Touch the function you wish to set. • The cursor appears over the function you touched. 3 ISO ISO AUTO WB AUTO NORM AUTO i Turn the front dial and select a setting value. 4:3 250 F5.6 $ Notes • You can display menus for each function by selecting a function and pressing Q. 24 EN 01:02:03 1023 3 Shooting using live view Shooting You can switch between shooting using the viewfinder and shooting using live view by pressing the u button. When shooting using live view, the subject is displayed on the monitor. u button Shooting using live view R Wi-Fi ISO-A 200 01:02:03 250 F5.6 38 Monitor Shooting still pictures 1 3 Set up the camera and decide on the composition. • Be careful not to cover the lens with a finger or the camera strap. 2 • The camera focuses on the area you touched and automatically takes a photograph. • The recorded image is displayed on the monitor. R Wi-Fi Touch the area of the subject you want to focus on. ISO-A 200 250 F5.6 01:02:03 38 $ Notes • You can also use the shutter button to take a photograph, just as you would when shooting using the viewfinder. • You can also press the shutter button after the camera focuses on the area you touched to take a photograph. g “Using the touch screen” (P. 27) EN 25 Recording movies You can record movies in all shooting modes except J (PHOTO STORY). First, try recording in full auto mode. 1 Set the mode dial to A. 2 Press the R button to begin recording. R button • You can change the focus location by touching the screen while recording (P. 27). 3 Shooting using live view 3 Press the R button again to end recording. R 00:02:18 Displayed during recording Recording time # Cautions • When using a camera with a CMOS image sensor, moving objects may appear distorted due to the rolling shutter phenomenon. This is a physical phenomenon whereby distortion occurs in the filmed image when shooting a fast-moving subject or due to camera shaking. In particular, this phenomenon becomes more noticeable when using a long focal length. • If the camera is used for extended periods, the temperature of the image pickup device will rise and noise and colored fog may appear in images. Turn off the camera for a short time. Noise and colored fog may also appear in images recorded at high ISO sensitivity settings. If the temperature rises further, the camera will turn off automatically. • When using a Four Thirds system lens, the AF will not operate while recording movies. Taking photographs during movie recording • Press the shutter button during movie recording to pause movie recording and take a photograph. Movie recording restarts after the photograph is taken. Press the R button to end recording. Three files will be recorded to the memory card: the movie footage preceding the photograph, the photograph itself, and the movie footage following the photograph. • Only one photograph can be taken at a time during movie recording; the self-timer and flash cannot be used. # Cautions • Image size and quality for photographs are independent of movie frame size. • The autofocus and metering used in movie mode may differ from that used to take photographs. • The R button cannot be used to record movies in the following instances: Multiple exposure (still photography also ends.)/shutter button pressed halfway/during bulb or time photography/sequential shooting/Panorama/SCN mode (e-Portrait, HandHeld Starlight, 3D)/time lapse shooting 26 EN Using the touch screen When shooting using live view, touch panel functions can be used. Selecting a focusing method You can focus and shoot by tapping the monitor. Tap T to cycle through touch screen settings. U T 3 R Wi-Fi ISO-A 200 01:02:03 250 F5.6 30 Previewing Your Subject ( V ) S-IS AUTO 1 Tap the subject in the display. • An AF target will be displayed. • Use the slider to choose the size of the frame. 14 10 ISO-A 200 7 Shooting using live view V Touch screen operations disabled. Tap a subject to focus and automatically release the shutter. This function is not available in n mode. Tap to display an AF target and focus on the subject in the selected area. You can use the touch screen to choose the position and size of the focus frame. Photographs can be taken by pressing the shutter button. 5x 250 F5.6 2 Use the slider to choose the size of the target frame, and then tap Y to zoom in on the subject of the target frame. • Use your finger to scroll the display when the picture is zoomed in. • Tap Z to cancel the zoom display. # Cautions • When using a Four Thirds system lens, the range within which auto focus is possible decreases. If you touch the screen outside of the possible range, the camera shoots without using AF. Using the wireless LAN function You can connect the camera to a smartphone and control the camera over Wi-Fi. To use this function, you must have the relevant app installed on the smartphone. g “Using the camera wireless LAN function” (P. 119), “Things you can do with OI.Share” (P. 121) Wi-Fi R Wi-Fi ISO-A 200 250 F5.6 01:02:03 30 EN 27 Setting shooting functions Using live guides Live guides are available in iAUTO (A) mode. While iAUTO is a full auto mode, live guides make it easy to access a variety of advanced photographic techniques. 3 1 2 Set the mode dial to A. Touch the tab to display live guides. • Select a guide item and touch it to set that item. Shooting using live view Guide item Tab R Wi-Fi Change Color Saturation ISO-A 200 250 F5.6 3 01:02:03 38 Cancel Use your finger to position the sliders. • Tap a to enter the setting. • To cancel the live guide setting, tap k on the screen. • If [Shooting Tips] is selected, highlight an item and press Q to view a description. • The effect of the selected level is visible in the display. If [Blur Background] or [Express Motions] is selected, the display will return to normal, but the selected effect will be visible in the final photograph. 4 $ Level bar/selection Clear & Vivid 0 Flat & Muted Cancel Set Shoot. • To clear the live guide from the display, press the MENU button. Notes • Live guides can also be used when shooting using the viewfinder. When shooting using the viewfinder, settings are made using the dial and buttons. If you press the Q button, the live guide is displayed, and the rear dial is used to select items and operate the sliders. 28 EN # Cautions • If [RAW] is currently selected for image quality, image quality will automatically be set to [YN+RAW]. • Live guide settings are not applied to the RAW copy. • Pictures may appear grainy at some live guide setting levels. • Changes to live guide setting levels may not be visible in the monitor. • Frame rates drop when [Blurred Motion] is selected. • The flash cannot be used with the live guide. • Changes to live guide options cancel previous changes. • Choosing live guide settings that exceed the limits of the camera exposure meters may result in pictures that are over or underexposed. 3 Shooting using live view EN 29 Using live control When shooting using live view, live control can be used to set functions in P, A, S, M, n, and J modes. Using live control allows you to preview the effects of different settings in the monitor. S-IS AUTO WB WB AUTO AUTO 3 Functions 4:3 Shooting using live view LN FullHD WB Auto P F AUTO AUTO Settings Available settings Record mode ........................................P. 70 Flash mode ...........................................P. 50 Flash intensity control ...........................P. 71 Metering mode......................................P. 72 AF mode ...............................................P. 73 ISO sensitivity .......................................P. 57 Face priority ..........................................P. 53 Movie sound record ..............................P. 74 Image stabilizer ....................................P. 66 Picture mode ........................................P. 68 Scene mode .........................................P. 45 Art filter mode .......................................P. 44 n mode ...............................................P. 69 White balance .......................................P. 56 Sequential shooting/self-timer ..............P. 55 Aspect ratio...........................................P. 69 1 Press Q to display the live control. 2 Use the rear dial to select the settings, use the front dial to change the selected setting, and press Q. • To hide the live control, press Q again. • The selected settings take effect automatically if no operations are performed for about 8 seconds. Displays the selected function name Cursor S-IS AUTO WB WB AUTO AUTO 4:3 Arrow pad LN WB Auto Cursor P FullHD F AUTO AUTO Arrow pad # Cautions • Some items are not available in some shooting modes. $ Notes • Live control can also be used when shooting using the viewfinder. If you press the Q button during viewfinder display, live control will be displayed in the viewfinder. If the viewfinder is switched off while shooting is in progress, live control will also be canceled. 30 EN 4 Viewing photographs and movies Viewing photographs and movies 1 Press the q button. • Your most recent photograph or movie will be displayed. • Select the desired photograph or movie using the front dial or arrow pad. Front dial 4 Displays the next frame L N 100-0020 2013.10.01 12:30 20 Still image HI WB AUTO P 100-0004 HD 2013.10.01 12:30 q button 4 Movie Index display/Calendar display • To start index playback, turn the rear dial to G during single-frame playback. To start calendar playback, turn the dial a little further. • Turn the rear dial to a to return to single-frame playback. Viewing photographs and movies Displays the previous frame Q q L N 100-0020 2013.10.01 12:30 20 p q 2013.10.01 12:30 Index display 21 p 2013.10 Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat 29 30 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Calendar display EN 31 Viewing still images Close-up playback In single-frame playback, turn the rear dial to a to zoom in. Turn to G to return to singleframe playback. L N 100-0020 2013.10.01 12:30 4 20 2x Rear dial Viewing photographs and movies Watching movies Select a movie and press the Q button to display the playback menu. Select [Movie Play] and press the Q button to begin playback. To interrupt movie playback, press MENU. Movie Movie Play Share Order m Erase Set Back Volume Volume can be adjusted by pressing F or G during singleframe and movie playback. 00:00:02/00:00:14 Protecting images 0 (protect) icon Protect images from accidental deletion. Display an image you wish to protect and press the AEL/AFL button; a 0 (protect) icon will appear on the image. Press the AEL/AFL button again to remove protection. You can also protect multiple selected images. 4:3 # Cautions 2013.10.01 12:30 • Formatting the card erases all images even if they have been protected. 32 EN L N 100-0020 20 Erasing images Display an image you want to delete and press the button. Select [Yes] and press the Q button. Erase Yes No button Back Set 4 Selecting images 2013.10.01 12:30 21 Viewing photographs and movies Select the image. You can also select multiple images for protection or deletion. Press the H button to select an image; a v icon will appear on the image. Press the H button again to cancel the selection. Press Q to display the delete or protect selection menu. EN 33 Using the touch screen You can use the touch panel to manipulate images. Full-frame playback Viewing additional images • Slide your finger to the left to view later frames, right to scroll view earlier frames. 4 Viewing photographs and movies Playback zoom • Slide the bar up or down to zoom in or out. • Use your finger to scroll the display when the picture is zoomed in. • Tap P to display index playback. Tap Q again for calendar playback. Index/Calendar Playback Page ahead/Page back • Slide your finger up to view the next page, down to view the previous page. • Use Q or R to choose the number of images displayed. • Tap R several times to return to single-frame playback. S Viewing images • Tap an image to view it full frame. Selecting and protecting images In single-frame playback, lightly touch the screen to display the touch menu. You can then perform the desired operation by touching the icons in the touch menu. H Select an image. You can select multiple images for protection. h You can set the images you wish to share over Wi-Fi connection. g [Share Order] (P. 62) 0 Protects an image. # Cautions • The situations in which touch screen operations are not available include the following. Panorama/3D/e-portrait/multiple exposure/during bulb or time photography/one-touch white balance dialog/when buttons or dials are in use • Do not touch the display with your fingernails or other sharp objects. • Gloves or monitor covers may interfere with touch screen operation. • You can also use the touch screen with the ART, SCN and J menus. Tap an icon to select it. 34 EN 5 Basic operations Information displays while shooting Viewfinder display when shooting using the viewfinder PBH 2 PBH fe d PBH Hi +7 Sh-3 250 F5.6 +2.0 5 01:02:03 e ISO-A 200 1023 3 MY1 AEL 4 c b MY1 AEL Hi +7 -3 Sh-3 Sh 250 F5.6 +2.0 a 0 9 8 Hi +7 -3 Sh-3 Sh 250 F5.6 +2.0 01:02:03 e ISO-A 200 1023 7 6 Basic operations 1 MY1 AEL 5 01:02:03 e ISO-A 200 1023 g 1 Battery check ; Lit up: Ready for use. : Lit up: Battery is running low. ] Blinks (red) : Charging required. 2 Shooting mode...................P. 18, 38 – 47 3 Myset ..............................................P. 77 4 Available recording time 5 Number of storable still pictures ...P. 124 6 ISO sensitivity .................................P. 57 7 White balance .................................P. 56 8 Highlight and shadow control..........P. 49 9 Top: Flash intensity control .............P. 71 Bottom: Exposure compensation indicator .............................P. 49 0 Exposure compensation value........P. 49 a Aperture value .........................P. 38 – 41 b Shutter speed ..........................P. 38 – 41 c AE Lock u ...................................P. 49 d AF confirmation mark......................P. 21 e Flash ...............................................P. 50 (blinks: charging in progress) f PBH (displayed when camera is receiving power from power battery holder)...........................................P. 129 g Level gauge (displayed by pressing the shutter button down halfway) ..........P. 37 You can change the viewfinder display style. In this manual, [Style 1] is used. g [Built-in EVF Style] (P. 97) EN 35 Monitor display when shooting using live view 1 2345 67 890a C B A z y x Wi-Fi FP RC BKT b cd 45 mm R FPS S-IS j S-AF ISO 400 -2.0 4:3 LN w v u Basic operations 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 a b c d e f g h i j k l q p Card write indicator .........................P. 13 Wi-Fi connection .....................P. 27, 119 Super FP flash ..............................P. 130 RC mode.......................................P. 131 Auto bracket/HDRf ...........P. 80/P. 59 Multiple exposure............................P. 82 High frame rate ...............................P. 93 Digital Tele-converter ......................P. 84 Time lapse shooting........................P. 83 Face priority ....................................P. 53 Movie sound ...................................P. 74 Focal length/Internal temperature warning m ................P. 128/P. 139 Flash ...............................................P. 50 (blinks: charging in progress, lights up: charging completed) AF confirmation mark......................P. 21 Image stabilizer...............................P. 66 Art filter ...........................................P. 44 Scene mode....................................P. 45 Picture mode...................................P. 68 White balance .................................P. 56 Sequential shooting/self-timer ........P. 55 Aspect ratio .....................................P. 69 Record mode (still images) .............P. 70 Record mode (movies) ...................P. 71 Available recording time +7 HD 01:02:03 250 F5.6 +2.0 ts r 5 36 EN -3 AEL P 1023 o e 1 fj g h i 3 j N k D l m n m Number of storable still pictures ...P. 124 n Highlight&Shadow Control ..............P. 49 o Top: Flash intensity control ......P. 71 Bottom: Exposure compensation indicator............................P. 49 p Exposure compensation value........P. 49 q Aperture value .........................P. 38 – 41 r Shutter speed ..........................P. 38 – 41 s Histogram .......................................P. 37 t AE Lock ..........................................P. 49 u Shooting mode...................P. 18, 38 – 47 v Myset ..............................................P. 77 w Shooting using touch screen operations .......................................P. 27 x Flash intensity control .....................P. 71 y ISO sensitivity .................................P. 57 z AF mode .........................................P. 73 A Metering mode ................................P. 72 B Flash mode .....................................P. 50 C Battery check ; Lit up (green): Ready for use (displayed for about ten seconds after the camera is turned on.) : Lit up (green): Battery is running low. ] Blinks (red): Charging required D Live guide recall ..............................P. 28 Switching the information display You can switch the information displayed in the monitor during shooting using the INFO button. When shooting using the viewfinder Monitor display INFO R Wi-Fi 2013.10.01 12:30 ISO AUTO INFO Wi-Fi INFO WB AUTO AUTO NORM ISO-A 01:02:03 P 200 i 4:3 250 F5.6 0.0 1023 Super control panel 250 F5.6 0.0 Level gauge display Image only Viewfinder display Can be switched while looking through the viewfinder. 5 R S-IS AUTO LN FullHD 250 F5.6 0.0 INFO 01:02:03 e ISO-A 200 1023 01:02:03 e ISO-A 200 1023 250 F5.6 0.0 Information display on Histogram display INFO INFO 250 F5.6 0.0 01:02:03 e ISO-A 200 1023 Basic operations INFO S-IS AUTO 01:02:03 e ISO-A 200 1023 250 F5.6 0.0 Image only Level gauge display When shooting using Live View R Wi-Fi S-IS AUTO ISO-A R Wi-Fi INFO S-IS AUTO ISO-A 200 200 LN LN FullHD FullHD F 250 F5.6 INFO 0.0 01:02:03 P 38 Information display on 250 F5.6 0.0 01:02:03 Histogram display 38 INFO INFO P 250 F5.6 0.0 Level gauge display Image only Histogram display Display a histogram showing the distribution of brightness in the image. The horizontal axis gives the brightness, the vertical axis the number of pixels of each brightness in the image. Areas above the upper limit at shooting are displayed in red, those below the lower limit in blue, and the area metered using spot metering in green. Level gauge display Indicate the orientation of the camera. The “tilt” direction is indicated on the vertical bar and the “horizon” direction on the horizontal bar. Use the indicators on the level gauge as a guide. EN 37 Using the shooting modes “Point-and-shoot” photography (P program mode) In mode P, the camera automatically adjusts shutter speed and aperture in response to subject brightness. Set the mode dial to P. R Wi-Fi S-IS AUTO ISO-A 200 Shutter speed LN FullHD F MY1 AEL PBH 5 250 F5.6 +2.0 Hi +7 -3 Sh Sh-3 01:02:03 e ISO-A 200 1023 When shooing using the viewfinder Shooting mode P 250 F5.6 Aperture value 01:02:03 0.0 38 When shooting using live view Basic operations • The functions you can set with the dials depend on the position of the lever. Front dial Position of the lever 1 2 Dial Lever Rear dial r Exposure compensation ISO o Program shift White balance • The shutter speed and aperture selected by the camera are displayed. • The shutter speed and aperture displays will blink if the camera is unable to achieve optimal exposure. Warning display example (blinking) Status Action 60" F2.8 The subject is too dark. • Use the flash. 8000 F22 The subject is too bright. • The metered range of the camera is exceeded. A commercially available ND filter (for adjusting the amount of light) is required. • The aperture value at the moment when its indication blinks varies with the lens type and focal length of the lens. • When using a fixed [ISO] setting, change the setting. g [ISO] (P. 57) Program shift (%) In P and ART modes, you can choose different combinations of aperture value and shutter speed without altering exposure. “s” appears next to the shooting mode during program shift. To cancel program shift, turn the rear dial until “s” is no longer displayed. # Cautions • Program shift is not available when you are using a flash. 38 EN R Wi-Fi 2013.10.01 12:30 ISO AUTO WB AUTO NORM AUTO i 4:3 Ps 250 F5.6 Program shift 0.0 01:02:03 1023 Choosing aperture (A aperture-priority mode) In mode A, you choose the aperture and let the camera automatically adjust shutter speed for optimal exposure. Rotate the mode dial to A. Front dial Position of the lever 1 2 Dial Lever Rear dial r Exposure compensation ISO o Aperture value White balance 5 ISO 400 LN FullHD F A 250 F5.6 0.0 01:02:03 38 Aperture value When shooting using live view Setting the aperture value Reducing aperture value Basic operations • Larger apertures (lower F-numbers) decrease depth of field (the area in front of or behind the focus point that appears to be in focus), softening background details. Smaller apertures (higher F-numbers) increase depth of field. Increasing aperture value F2 F3.5 F5.6 F8.0 F16 • The shutter speed display will blink if the camera is unable to achieve optimal exposure. Warning display example (blinking) 30" F5.6 8000 F5.6 Status Action The subject is underexposed. • Decrease the aperture value. The subject is overexposed. • Increase the aperture value. • If the warning display does not disappear, the metered range of the camera is exceeded. A commercially available ND filter (for adjusting the amount of light) is required. • The aperture value at the moment when its indication blinks varies with the lens type and focal length of the lens. • When using a fixed [ISO] setting, change the setting. g [ISO] (P. 57) Preview function You can preview the focus range (depth of field). While pressing the preview button, the aperture is stopped down to the set aperture value. EN 39 Choosing shutter speed (S shutter-priority mode) In mode S, you choose the shutter speed and let the camera automatically adjust aperture for optimal exposure. Rotate the mode dial to S. Front dial Position of the lever 1 2 Dial Lever Rear dial 5 r Exposure compensation ISO o Shutter speed White balance • A fast shutter speed can freeze a fast action scene without any blur. A slow shutter speed will blur a fast action scene. This blurring will give the impression of dynamic motion. ISO 400 Basic operations LN FullHD F S 250 F5.6 0.0 01:02:03 38 Shutter speed When shooting using live view Setting the shutter speed Slower shutter speed Faster shutter speed 2" 1" 15 60 100 400 1000 • The aperture value display will blink if the camera is unable to achieve optimal exposure. Warning display example (blinking) 2000 F2.8 125 F22 Status Action The subject is underexposed. • Set the shutter speed slower. The subject is overexposed. • Set the shutter speed faster. • If the warning display does not disappear, the metered range of the camera is exceeded. A commercially available ND filter (for adjusting the amount of light) is required. • The aperture value at the moment when its indication blinks varies with the lens type and focal length of the lens. • When using a fixed [ISO] setting, change the setting. g [ISO] (P. 57) 40 EN Choosing aperture and shutter speed (M manual mode) In mode M, you choose both the aperture and the shutter speed. At a speed of BULB, the shutter remains open while the shutter button is pressed. Set the mode dial to M. Front dial Position of the lever 1 2 Dial Lever Rear dial r Aperture value ISO o Shutter speed White balance • Shutter speed can be set to values between 1/8000 and 60 seconds or to [BULB] or [LIVE TIME]. 5 # Cautions Choosing when the exposure ends (bulb/time photography) Use for night landscapes and fireworks. Shutter speeds of [BULB] and [LIVE TIME] are available in mode M. Bulb photography (BULB): The shutter remains open while the shutter button is pressed. The exposure ends when the shutter button is released. Time photography (TIME): The exposure begins when the shutter button is pressed all the way down. To end the exposure, press the shutter button all the way down again. Basic operations • Exposure compensation is not available in M mode. • When using BULB or TIME, screen brightness is varied automatically. • When using [LIVE TIME], the progress of the exposure will be displayed in the monitor during shooting. The display can also be refreshed by pressing the shutter button halfway. • [Live BULB] (P. 94) can be used to display the image exposure during bulb photography. # Cautions • ISO sensitivity can be set to a value up to ISO 1600 for live bulb and live time photography. • To reduce camera blur during long exposures, mount the camera on a tripod and use a remote cable (P. 133). • The following features are not available during long exposures: Sequential shooting/self-timer shooting/AE bracket shooting/image stabilizer/ flash bracketing/multiple exposure* * An option other than [Off] is selected for [Live BULB] or [Live TIME] (P. 94). • Even when [Noise Reduct.] is in use, noise may be noticeable in the image displayed on the monitor during shooting. Noise in images While shooting at slow shutter speeds, noise may appear on screen. These phenomena occur when the temperature rises in the image pickup device or image pickup device internal drive circuit, causing current to be generated in those sections of the image pickup device that are not normally exposed to light. This can also occur when shooting with a high ISO setting in a high-temperature environment. To reduce this noise, the camera activates the noise reduction function. g [Noise Reduct.] (P. 93) EN 41 Using movie mode (n) Movie mode (n) can be used to film movies with special effects. You can create movies that take advantage of the effects available in still photography mode. Use live control to select the settings. g “Adding effects to a movie” (P. 69) You can also apply an after-image effect or zoom in on an area of the image during movie recording. Adding effects to a movie [Movie Effect] 5 1 2 Rotate the mode dial to n. 3 Touch the on-screen icon of the effect you wish to use. Press the R button to begin recording. • Press the R button again to end recording. • You can also use the buttons displayed on icons. Basic operations U Multi Echo Apply an after-image effect. After-images will appear behind moving objects. V One Shot Echo An after-image will appear for a short time after you press the button. The after-image will disappear automatically after a while. T Art Fade Film with the selected picture mode effect. The fade effect is applied to the transition between scenes. M Movie Teleconverter Zoom in on an area of the image without using the lens zoom. Zoom in on the selected position of the image even while the camera is kept fixed. Multi Echo Touch the icon to apply the effect. Touch again to cancel the effect. One Shot Echo Each touch of the icon adds to the effect. Art Fade Touch the icon. Touch the picture mode you wish to use. The effect will be applied when you release your finger. 42 EN Movie Tele-converter 1 Touch the icon to display the zoom frame. • You can change the position of the zoom frame by touching the screen or using FGHI. • Press and hold Q to return the zoom frame to a central position. 2 Touch K or press the Fn2 button to zoom in on the area in the zoom frame. • Touch L or press the Fn2 button to return to the zoom frame. 3 Touch O or press Q to cancel the zoom frame and exit Movie teleconverter mode. # Cautions 5 Basic operations • The frame rate will drop slightly during recording. • The 2 effects cannot be applied simultaneously. • Use a memory card with an SD speed class of 6 or better. Movie recording may end unexpectedly if a slower card is used. • Taking a photograph during movie recording cancels the effect; the effect does not appear in the photograph. • [e-Portrait], [Diorama] and [Color Creator] cannot be used at the same time as Art Fade. • Movie Tele-converter cannot be used when [Picture Mode] is set to [ART]. • The sound of touch operations and button operations may be recorded. • Besides using touch operations, you can apply effects using the buttons corresponding to the displayed icons. EN 43 Using art filters 1 Rotate the mode dial to ART. • A menu of art filters will be displayed. Select a filter using FG. • Press Q or press the shutter button halfway to select the highlighted item and exit the art filter menu. 1 Pop Art Types of art filters j k l m n o s 5 Basic operations 2 Pop Art Soft Focus Pale&Light Color Light Tone Grainy Film Pin Hole Diorama t u v Y Z u Cross Process Gentle Sepia Dramatic Tone Key Line Watercolor ART BKT (ART bracketing) Shoot. • To choose a different setting, press Q to display the art filter menu. ART bracketing When one shot is taken, images are recorded for each selected art filter. Press I to choose filters. Art effects Art filters can be modified and effects can be added. Pressing I in the art filter menu displays additional options. Modifying filters Option I is the original filter, while options II and on add effects that modify the original filter. Adding effects* Soft focus, pin-hole, frames, white edges, starlight, filter, tone, blur * The effects available vary with the selected filter. # Cautions • If [RAW] is currently selected for image quality, image quality will automatically be set to [YN+RAW]. The art filter will be applied to the JPEG copy only. • Depending on the subject, tone transitions may be ragged, the effect may be less noticeable, or the image may become more “grainy.” • Some effects may not be visible in live view or during movie recording. • Playback may differ according to the filters, effects, or movie quality settings applied. 44 EN Shooting in scene mode 1 Rotate the mode dial to SCN. • A menu of scene menu will be displayed. Select a scene using FG. • Press Q or press the shutter button halfway to select the highlighted item and exit the scene menu. 1 Portrait Types of scene modes 2 Portrait e-Portrait Landscape Landscape+Portrait Sport Hand-Held Starlight Night Scene Night+Portrait Children High Key Low Key DIS Mode J r Q R T s ( g f w m T Macro Nature Macro Candle Sunset Documents Panorama (P. 46) Fireworks Beach & Snow n Fisheye Effect n Wide-Angle n Macro 3D Photo 5 Basic operations O P L K J i G U G H I q Shoot. • To choose a different setting, press Q to display the scene menu. # Cautions • In [e-Portrait] mode, two images are recorded: an unmodified image and a second image to which [e-Portrait] effects have been applied. Recording may take some time. In addition, when the image quality mode is [RAW], the image is recorded in RAW+JPEG. • [n Fisheye Effect], [n Wide-Angle], and [n Macro] are for use with optional converter lenses. • Movies cannot be recorded in [e-Portrait], [Hand-Held Starlight], [Panorama], or [3D Photo] mode. • In [Hand-Held Starlight], 8 frames are shot at one time and then combined. When the image quality mode is [RAW], a JPEG image is combined with the first RAW image and recorded in RAW+JPEG. • [3D Photo] is subject to the following limitations. [3D Photo] can be used only with a 3D lens. The camera monitor cannot be used to playback images in 3D. Use a device that supports 3D display. Focus is locked. In addition, flash and self-timer also cannot be used. Image size is fixed at 1920 × 1080. RAW photography is not available. Frame coverage is not 100%. EN 45 Taking panoramas If you have installed the supplied computer software, you can use it to join pictures together to form a panorama. g “Connecting the camera to a computer and a smartphone” (P. 116) 5 1 Rotate the mode dial to SCN. 2 3 4 Select [Panorama] and press Q. Use FGHI to choose a pan direction. Take a picture, using the guides to frame the shot. Basic operations • Focus, exposure, and other settings are fixed at the values for the first shot. M 5 250 F5.6 38 Take the remaining images, framing each shot so that the guides overlap with the previous picture. M 250 F5.6 38 [2] Exit [3] Exit • A panorama may include up to 10 images. A warning indicator (g) is displayed after the tenth shot. 6 After taking the last shot, press Q to end the series. # Cautions • During panorama shooting, the image previously taken for position alignment will not be displayed. With the frames or other markers for display in the images as a guide, set the composition such that the edges of the overlapping images overlap within the frames. $ Notes • Pressing Q before shooting the first frame returns to the scene mode selection menu. Pressing Q in the midst of shooting ends the sequence of panorama shooting, and allows you to continue with the next one. 46 EN Using PHOTO STORY 1 Rotate the mode dial to J. 1 2 A Standard B Speed C Fun Frames Standard 1 • A PHOTO STORY menu will be displayed. 2 3 Use FG to choose the theme of the PHOTO STORY. • You can choose different effects, number of frames and aspect ratios for each theme. You can also change the aspect ratio, the division pattern and the frame effect of individual images. Changing between variations Original PHOTO STORY PHOTO STORY with effects and aspect ratios changed from the original PHOTO STORY. FGH The number of images and arrangement of image regions can be altered for each theme of the PHOTO STORY. • You can change the frame color and frame surrounding effect in each variation. • Every theme and variation provides a different PHOTO STORY. 3 After finishing the settings, press Q. • • • • 4 The monitor switches to PHOTO STORY display. The subject of current frame is displayed in live view. Touch any of the masked frames to switch the masked frame to the current frame. Press the MENU button to change the theme. Shoot an image for the first frame. • The image you have shot is displayed in the first frame. ISO-A 200 1 5 Basic operations E 5 250 F5.0 0.0 1023 250 F5.0 0.0 1023 Shoot an image for the next frame. • View and shoot the subject for the next frame. • Press to cancel the image in the directly preceding frame and retake the shot. • Touch any frame to cancel the image in it and retake the shot. Touch the frame, and then touch O. ISO-A 200 1 Shot image Next frame (Live view display) EN 47 6 Once you have shot all the frames, press Q to save the image. • Press the MENU button, and you can select other themes. $ Notes • During the shooting of a PHOTO STORY, the following operations are available. Exposure compensation/Program shift/Flash shooting (except when the theme is [Speed].)/Live control settings # Cautions 5 Basic operations 48 EN • If the camera is turned off during shooting, all the data for images up to that point is cancelled and nothing is recorded on the memory card. • If [RAW] is currently selected for image quality, image quality will automatically be set to [YN+RAW]. The PHOTO STORY image is saved as JPEG and the images in the frames as RAW. RAW images are saved in [4:3]. • From among the [AF Mode], [S-AF], [MF] and [S-AF+MF] can be set. Also, the AF target is fixed to a single central point. • The metering mode is fixed to digital ESP metering. • The following operations are not available in PHOTO STORY mode. MENU display/Movie/Sequential shooting/Self timer/INFO display/Face priority AF/ Digital Tele-converter/Picture mode • The following button operations are disabled. Fn1/Fn2/INFO etc. • During the shooting of a PHOTO STORY, the camera will not go into sleep mode. Commonly used shooting options Controlling exposure (exposure compensation) Rotate the front dial to choose exposure compensation. Choose positive (“+”) values to make pictures brighter, negative (“–”) values to make pictures darker. Exposure can be adjusted by ±5.0 EV. Negative (–) No compensation (0) Positive (+) 5 • Exposure compensation is not available in A, M, or SCN mode. • The viewfinder and live view display can only be changed up to ±3.0EV. If the exposure exceeds ±3.0EV, the exposure bar will begin flashing. • Movies can be corrected in a range up to ±3.0EV. Changing the brightness of highlights and shadows When the multi-function button is set to [Highlight&Shadow Control], a setting screen will be displayed when you press the Fn2 button. Adjust the shadow using the rear dial and the highlight using the front dial. HI LIGHT Basic operations # Cautions SHADOW Locking the exposure (AE Lock) You can lock just the exposure by pressing the AEL/AFL button. Use this when you want to adjust the focus and exposure separately or when you want to shoot several images at the same exposure. • If you press the AEL/AFL button once, the exposure is locked and u is displayed. g “AEL/AFL” (P. 98) • Press the AEL/AFL button once again to release the AE Lock. # Cautions • The lock will be released if you operate the mode dial, MENU button, or Q button. EN 49 Using a flash (flash photography) The flash can be set manually as required. The flash can be used for flash photography in a variety of shooting conditions. 1 Attach the flash to the camera and raise the light-emitting unit. • g “Attaching the flash unit” (P. 15) 2 Set the lever to position 2 and press the AFm button. 0 0.0 5 Basic operations P Lever 3 AUTO When shooting using live view Select a setting using the rear dial and press the Q button. • The options available and the order in which they are displayed vary depending on the shooting mode. g “Flash modes that can be set by shooting mode” (P. 51) AUTO Auto flash # Fill-in flash Flash off $ !/#! #SLOW !SLOW #SLOW2/ 2nd Curtain #FULL, #1/4 etc. 4 50 EN Flash Auto AFm button The flash fires automatically in low light or backlight conditions. The flash fires regardless of the light conditions. The flash does not fire. This function allows you to reduce the red-eye Red-eye reduction flash phenomenon. In S and M modes, the flash always fires. Slow synchronization (1st curtain) Slow synchronization (1st curtain)/Red-eye reduction flash Slow shutter speeds are used to brighten dimly-lit backgrounds. Combines slow synchronization with red-eye reduction. Slow synchronization (2nd curtain) The flash fires just before the shutter closes to create trails of light behind moving light sources. Manual For users who prefer manual operation. If you press the INFO button, you can use the dial to adjust the flash level. Press the shutter button all the way. # Cautions • In [!/#!(Red-eye reduction flash)], after the pre-flashes, it takes about 1 second before the shutter is released. Do not move the camera until shooting is complete. • [!/#!(Red-eye reduction flash)] may not work effectively under some shooting conditions. • When the flash fires, the shutter speed is set to 1/320 sec. or slower. When shooting a subject against a bright background with the fill-in flash, the background may be overexposed. Flash modes that can be set by shooting mode Shooting mode S/M Flash mode #AUTO Auto flash ! Auto flash (red-eye reduction) # Fill-in flash $ Flash off ! SLOW Slow synchronization (red-eye reduction) #SLOW Slow synchronization (1st curtain) # SLOW2 Slow synchronization (2nd curtain) # Fill-in flash #! Fill-in flash (red-eye reduction) Shutter speed limit Fires automatically in dark/backlit conditions 1/30 sec. – 1/320 sec.* Always fires 30 sec. – 1/320 sec.* k k Fires automatically in dark/backlit conditions 60 sec. – 1/320 sec.* 1st curtain Always fires 60 sec. – 1/320 sec.* k k Always fires 60 sec. – 1/320 sec.* 1st curtain k 1st curtain 2nd curtain $ Flash off k # Fill-in flash/Slow synchronization (2nd curtain) 2nd curtain 2nd-C * Conditions for firing the flash Flash timing 5 Basic operations P/A LV super control panel • #AUTO, $ can be set in A mode. 1/250 sec. when using an separately sold external flash unit Minimum range The lens may cast shadows over objects close to the camera, causing vignetting, or be too bright even at minimum output. Lens 14 – 42 mm 17 mm 40 – 150 mm 14 – 150 mm 12 – 50 mm 12 – 40 mm Approximate distance at which vignetting occurs 0.25 m 0.25 m 0.9 m 0.5 m 0.45 m 3.2 m (when focal length is 12 mm) 0.7 m (when focal length is 14 mm or above) • External flash units can be used to prevent vignetting. To prevent photographs from being overexposed, select mode A or M and choose a high f-number, or reduce ISO sensitivity. EN 51 Choosing a focus target (AF Area) Choose which of the 81 autofocus targets will be used for autofocus. 1 2 Press the arrow pad or Fn1 button to display the AF targets. Rotate the dial to choose the AF position. • “All targets” mode is restored if you move the cursor off the screen. 5 All Targets Single Target The camera automatically chooses from the full set of focus targets. Select the focus target manually. All Targets Basic operations Differences in target display depending on lens The target display will differ depending on the lens you are using. When using a Micro Four Thirds system lens, 81 AF targets will be displayed. When using a Four Thirds system lens, 37 AF targets will be displayed. Setting the AF target You can change the target selection method and target size. You can also select Face priority AF (P. 53). 1 Press the INFO button during AF target selection and choose a selection method using FG. INFO FG i i o o (All Targets) The camera automatically selects all AF targets. I (Single Target) You select a single AF target. K (Small Target) The AF target can be reduced in size. J (Group Target) The camera automatically chooses from the targets in the selected group. # Cautions • Reverts to “Single Target” when shooting movies. 52 EN Face priority AF/pupil detection AF The camera detects faces and adjusts focus and digital ESP. 1 2 Press the Fn1 button to display the AF target. Press the INFO button. • You can change the AF target selection method. 3 Use HI to select an option and press Q. i o Selection method J Face Priority Off Face priority off. I Face Priority On Face priority on. K Face & Eye Priority On The autofocus system selects the pupil of the eye closest to the camera for face-priority AF. L Face & R. Eye Priority On The autofocus system selects the pupil of the eye on the right for face-priority AF. M Face & L. Eye Priority On The autofocus system selects the pupil of the eye on the left for face-priority AF. • When shooting using the viewfinder, look through the viewfinder. • If a face is detected, it will be indicated by a white border. 5 Press the shutter button halfway to focus. • When the camera focuses on the face in the white border, the border will turn green. • If the camera is able to detect the subject’s eyes, it will display a green frame over the selected eye. (pupil detection AF) 6 Press the shutter button the rest of the way down to shoot. R Wi-Fi Point the camera at your subject. S-IS AUTO ISO-A 200 Basic operations 4 5 LN FullHD F P 250 F5.6 0.0 01:02:03 1023 R Wi-Fi S-IS AUTO ISO-A 200 LN FullHD F P 250 F5.6 0.0 01:02:03 1023 # Cautions • Face priority applies only to the first shot in each sequence taken during sequential shooting. • Depending on the subject and the art filter setting, the camera may not be able to correctly detect the face. • When set to [p (Digital ESP metering)], metering is performed with priority given to faces. • When using a Four Thirds system lens, even if a face is detected, if it is outside the AF area, the face priority AF will not operate. $ Notes • Face priority is also available in [MF]. Faces detected by the camera are indicated by white frames. EN 53 Zoom frame AF/zoom AF You can zoom in on a portion of the frame when adjusting focus. Choosing a high zoom ratio allows you to use autofocus to focus on a smaller area than is normally covered by the AF target. You can also position the focus target more precisely. Q/U R Wi-Fi S-IS AUTO ISO-A S-IS AUTO ISO-A 200 200 LN LN FullHD FullHD F 250 F5.6 0.0 Shooting display 5 U R Wi-Fi U (Press and hold) 01:02:03 30 F 250 F5.6 0.0 01:02:03 30 U Zoom frame AF Zoom AF Basic operations 1 Assign [U] to one of the buttons in advance using [Button Function] (P. 99). 2 Press the U button to display the zoom frame. • a can also be set as a multi-function button. • If the camera was focused using autofocus just before the button was pressed, the zoom frame will be displayed at the current focus position. • Use FGHI to position the zoom frame. • Press the INFO button and use FG to choose the zoom ratio. 5× 7× 10× 14× Comparison of AF and zoom frames 3 Press the U button again to zoom in on the zoom frame. 4 Press the shutter button halfway to initiate autofocus. • Use FGHI to position the zoom frame. • Rotate the dial to choose the zoom ratio. • The camera will focus using the subject in the frame at the center of the screen. To change the focus position, move it by touching the screen. $ Notes • You can also display and move the zoom frame using touch screen operations. # Cautions • Zoom is visible only in the monitor and has no effect on the resulting photographs. • When you are using a Four Thirds system lens, the AF will not operate with during zoom display. 54 EN Sequential shooting/using the self timer Keep the shutter button pressed all the way down to take a series of photos. Alternatively, you can take pictures using the self timer. 1 Set the lever to position 1 and press the jYHDR button to display the selection items. 2 Turn the rear dial and select an item. Single-frame shooting Shoots 1 frame at a time when the shutter button is pressed (normal shooting mode). T Sequential H Photographs are taken at about 10 frames per second (fps) while the shutter button is pressed all the way down. Focus, exposure, and white balance are fixed at the values for the first shot in each series ([S-AF], [MF]). Sequential L Photographs are taken at about 6.5 frames per second (fps) while the shutter button is pressed all the way down. Focus and exposure are fixed according to the options selected for [AF Mode] (P. 73) and [AEL/AFL] (P. 98). Y12s Self-timer 12 SEC Press the shutter button halfway to focus, the rest of the way down to start the timer. First, the self-timer lamp lights up for approximately 10 seconds, then it blinks for approximately 2 seconds and the picture is taken. Y2s Self-timer 2 SEC Press the shutter button halfway to focus, the rest of the way down to start the timer. The self-timer lamp blinks for approximately 2 seconds, and then the picture is taken. YC Self-timer Custom Set the number of frames to be shot. Select g, press the INFO button, and rotate the dial. S 5 Basic operations o $ Notes • To cancel the activated self-timer, press the jYHDR button. • In [S-AF] and [MF] focus modes, focus and exposure will be fixed at the values for the first frame in each sequence. # Cautions • When you are using S, no confirmation image is displayed during shooting. The image is displayed again after shooting ends. When you are using T, the image shot immediately before is displayed. • The speed of sequential shooting varies depending on the lens you are using and the focus of the zoom lens. • During sequential shooting, if the battery check blinks due to low battery, the camera stops shooting and starts saving the pictures you have taken on the card. The camera may not save all of the pictures depending on how much battery power remains. • Fix the camera securely on a tripod for self-timer shooting. • If you stand in front of the camera to press the shutter button halfway when using the selftimer, the photograph may be out of focus. EN 55 Adjusting color (white balance) White balance (WB) ensures that white objects in images recorded by the camera appear white. [AUTO] is suitable in most circumstances, but other values can be selected according to the light source when [AUTO] fails to produce the desired results or you wish to introduce a deliberate color cast into your images. 1 Set the lever to position 2, and turn the rear dial to select items. AUTO LOW 200 AUTO 250 250 F5.6 320 400 500 0.0 Recommend WB AUTO ISO-A Lever 200 WB Auto P AUTO AUTO 5 Basic operations Rear dial Light conditions AUTO k Used for most light conditions (when there is a white portion framed on the monitor). Use this mode for general use. 5 5300K For shooting outdoors on a clear day, or to capture the reds in a sunset or the colors in a fireworks display N 7500K For shooting outdoors in the shadows on a clear day O 6000K For shooting outdoors on a cloudy day 1 3000K For shooting under a tungsten light > 4000K For subjects lit by fluorescent lights U k n 5500K One-touch white balance (P. 57) P/Q/ W/X Color temperature set by onetouch WB. Custom white balance CWB 2000K – 14000K Auto white balance Preset white balance 56 EN Color temperature WB mode For underwater photography For flash shooting Choose when a white or gray subject can be used to measure white balance and the subject is under mixed lighting or lit by an unknown type of flash or other light source. After pressing the INFO button, use HI buttons to select a color temperature and then press Q. One-touch white balance Measure white balance by framing a piece of paper or other white object under the lighting that will be used in the final photograph. This is useful when shooting a subject under natural light, as well as under various light sources with different color temperatures. 1 Prepare a neutral-colored paper, such as white or gray. 2 Shoot while pressing the Y (one-touch white balance) button. 3 Select from P, Q, W, or X and register. • Frame the object so that it fills the display and no shadows fall it. • You can also shoot after selecting P, Q, W, or X from the white balance options screen and then pressing INFO. % Tips • If the subject is too bright or too dark or visibly tinted, the message [WB NG Retry] will be displayed and no value will be recorded. Correct the problem and repeat the process from Step 1. ISO sensitivity Increasing ISO sensitivity increases noise (graininess) but allows photographs to be taken when lighting is poor. The setting recommended in most situations is [AUTO], which starts at ISO 200 — a value that balances noise and dynamic range — and then adjusts ISO sensitivity according to shooting conditions. 1 5 Basic operations • If it is already selected in the white balance menu, select [Yes] and press the Q button. • The new value is saved as a preset white balance option. • The new value is stored until one-touch white balance is measured again. Turning the power off does not erase the data. Set the lever to position 2, and turn the front dial to select items. Front dial Lever AUTO The sensitivity is set automatically according to the shooting conditions. LOW, 200 – 25600 Sensitivity is set to the selected value. EN 57 Controlling color (Color Creator) You can adjust the color of the subject while looking through the viewfinder. Select this function with the multi-function button to use it. Set the multi-function button to c (Color Creator) in advance (P. 23). 1 While looking through the viewfinder, press the Fn2 button. • An options screen will be displayed in the viewfinder. Fn2 button 5 Basic operations 58 EN 2 Set hue using the front dial and saturation using the rear dial. • The settings are stored under picture mode. # Cautions • The white balance is fixed to AUTO. • When the image quality mode is set to [RAW], the image is recorded in RAW+JPEG. HDR photography The camera shoots several images and automatically combines them into an HDR image. You can also shoot several images and perform HDR imaging on a computer (HDR bracketing photography). 1 Set the lever to position 1 and press the jYHDR button to display the selection items. • A menu will be displayed on the screen. HDR1 OFF AUTO HDR2 3F 2.0EV 5F 2.0EV 7F 2.0EV 3F 3.0EV HDR o HDR button jY P Lever T S Y12s Y2s Yc When shooting using live view Turn the front dial to select a setting. HDR1 HDR2 3F 2.0EV 5F 2.0EV Four shots are taken, each with a different exposure, and the shots are combined into one HDR image inside the camera. HDR2 provides a more impressive image than HDR1. ISO sensitivity is fixed to 200. Also, the slowest available shutter speed is 1 second and the longest available exposure is 4 seconds. HDR bracketing is performed. Select the number of images and the exposure difference. HDR imaging processing is not performed. 5 Basic operations 2 o 7F 2.0EV 3F 3.0EV 5F 3.0EV 3 Shoot. • When you press the shutter button, the camera automatically shoots the set number of images. • While shooting, a simply composed image will be displayed on the monitor or in the viewfinder. # Cautions • • • • In the case of HDR1 and HDR2, exposure compensation is not available. If you shoot with a slower shutter speed, there may be more noticeable noise. Attach the camera to a tripod or other stabilizing item and then shoot. The image displayed on the monitor or in the viewfinder while shooting will differ from the HDR-processed image. • In the case of HDR1 and HDR2, the HDR-processed image will be saved as a JPEG file. When the image quality mode is set to [RAW], the image is recorded in RAW+JPEG. The only image recorded in RAW is the image with suitable exposure. • If set to HDR1/HDR2, the picture mode is fixed to [Natural] and the color setting is fixed to [sRGB]. [Full-time AF] does not operate. • Flash photography, bracketing, multiple exposure and time lapse shooting cannot be used at the same time as HDR photography. EN 59 Information display during playback Playback image information Simplified display 1 2 Overall display 3 4 5 67 89 g h jk i ×10 ×10 250 P AF +2.0 ±0 WB AUTO A+4 ISO 400 F5.6 45mm +1.0 G+4 Adobe Natural 4608×3456 3D 5 f 4:3 L N 100-0015 2013.10.01 12:30 SD Basic operations ed c 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 a b c d e f g 15 0 a 3D 2013.10.01 12:30 b x h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x Battery check ..................................P. 16 Wi-Fi connection .....................P. 27, 119 Including GPS information ............P. 121 Eye-Fi upload complete ..................P. 98 Print reservation Number of prints ...........................P. 112 Share order .....................................P. 62 Sound record ..................................P. 64 Protect ............................................P. 64 Image selected ...............................P. 33 File number .....................................P. 96 Frame number Storage device ..............................P. 123 Record mode ..................................P. 70 Aspect ratio .....................................P. 69 3D image ........................................P. 45 Date and time .................................P. 17 Aspect border .................................P. 69 4:3 1/8 L N 100-0015 SD 15 wvuts AF target .........................................P. 52 Shooting mode...................P. 18, 38 – 46 Exposure compensation .................P. 49 Shutter speed ..........................P. 38 – 41 Aperture value .........................P. 38 – 41 Focal length ..................................P. 128 Flash intensity control .....................P. 71 White balance compensation Color space.....................................P. 95 Picture mode...................................P. 68 Compression rate ...........................P. 70 Pixel count ......................................P. 70 ISO sensitivity .................................P. 57 White balance .................................P. 56 AF Focus adjustments ..................P. 107 Metering mode ................................P. 72 Histogram .......................................P. 37 Switching the information display You can switch the information displayed in the monitor during playback using the INFO button. ×10 INFO 4:3 L N 100-0015 2013.10.01 12:30 Image only 15 Simplified display ×10 INFO 250 P AF F5.6 +2.0 ±0 45mm ±0.0 WB AUTO A±10 ISO 400 G±10 Adobe Natural 4032×3024 4:3 1/8 L N 100-0015 2013.10.01 12:30 60 EN l m n o p q r Overall display 15 INFO Changing the playback information display method Press the q button to view pictures full frame. Press the shutter button halfway to return to shooting mode. Index display/calendar display q Q q 2013.10 Sun 29 L N 100-0020 2013.10.01 12:30 2013.10.01 12:30 20 p Single-frame playback 21 p 25 frames Mon 30 Tue 1 Wed 2 Thu 3 Fri Sat 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Calendar display Index display 5 p L N 100-0020 2013.10.01 12:30 Single-frame playback p 2x 20 q 14x 2× zoom q 14× zoom close-up playback Rear dial (o) Zoom in (p)/Index (q) Front dial (r) Previous (t)/Next (s) Operation also available during close-up playback. Arrow pad (FGHI) Single-frame playback: Next (I)/previous (H)/playback volume (FG) Close-up playback: Scroll image You can display the next frame (I) or the previous frame (H) during close-up playback by pressing the INFO button. Index/calendar playback: Highlight image Fn1 Displays a zoom frame. Use touch operations to set the position of the frame and press Fn1 to zoom in. To cancel, press Fn1. INFO Basic operations Playback zoom (close-up playback) View image info H Select picture (P. 33) AEL/AFL Protect picture (P. 32) Delete picture (P. 33) Q View menus (in calendar playback, press this button to exit to single-frame playback) EN 61 Sharing images over Wi-Fi connection (Share Order) You can connect the camera to a smartphone over wireless LAN (P. 119). Once the smartphone is connected, you can use it view images stored on the card, and transfer images between the camera and smartphone. With [Share Order], you can select the images to share in advance. 1 On the playback screen, touch the screen. 2 Select an image using a touch operation or HI and then touch h on the touch menu. • A touch menu will be displayed. • h is displayed on the images selected for sharing. • To cancel the selection, touch h again. 5 Basic operations 62 EN 3 Touch the screen to exit [Share Order]. • After an image has been selected for sharing, the selected image will be shared when a Wi-Fi connection is established using [One-Time]. # Cautions • You can set a share order on a maximum around 200 frames. • Not available for [SD] or [HD] movies. Manipulating playback images Press Q during playback to display a menu of simple options that can be used in playback mode. JPEG JPEG Edit Share Order R Rotate m Back Still image frame Movie frame JPEG Edit, RAW Data Edit g P. 85, 86 — Image Overlay g P. 87 — Movie Play — Share Order gP. 62 * 0 (Protect) R (Audio recording) — Rotate — m (Slideshow) Erase 5 Basic operations * Set Not available for [SD] or [HD] movies. Performing operations on a movie frame (Movie Play) Q Pause or resume playback. • You can perform the following operations while playback is paused. Previous/Next HIor dial Press and hold HI to continue the operation. Display the first frame. F Display the last frame. G H/I Advance or rewind a movie. F/G Adjust volume. # Cautions • We recommend using the supplied PC software to play movies on a computer. Before launching the software for the first time, connect the camera to the computer. EN 63 Protecting images 0 (protect) icon Protect images from accidental deletion. Display an image you wish to protect and press Q to display the playback menu. Select [0] and press Q, and then press F to protect the image. Protected images are shown by a 0 (protect) icon. Press G to remove protection. Press Q to save settings and exit. You can also protect multiple selected images. g Selecting images 4:3 L N 100-0020 2013.10.01 12:30 20 # Cautions • Formatting the card erases all images even if they have been protected. 5 Audio recording Add an audio recording (up to 30 sec. long) to the current photograph. Basic operations 1 JPEG Display the image to which you want to add an audio recording and press Q. JPEG Edit Share Order • Audio recording is not available with protected images. • Audio recording is also available in the playback menu. 2 Select [R] and press Q. R Rotate m Set Back • To exit without adding a recording, select [No]. 3 Select [R Start] and press Q to begin recording. 4 Press Q to end recording. R • To stop recording part-way through, press Q. • Images with audio recordings are indicated by a H icon. • To delete a recording, select [Erase] in Step 2. No R Start Erase Back Set Rotate Choose whether to rotate photographs. 1 2 3 Play the photograph back and press Q. Select [Rotate] and press Q. Press F to rotate the image counterclockwise, G to rotate it clockwise; the image rotates each time the button is pressed. • Press Q to save settings and exit. • The rotated image is saved in its current orientation. • Movies, 3D photos, and protected images cannot be rotated. 64 EN Slideshow This function displays images stored on the card one after another. 1 Press Q during playback and select [m]. JPEG JPEG Edit Share Order R Rotate m Back 2 Set Adjust settings. Start the slideshow. Images are displayed in order, starting with the current picture. BGM Set BGM or turn BGM [Off]. Slide Set type of slideshow to execute. Slide Interval Choose the length of time each slide is displayed from 2 to 10 seconds. Movie Interval Select [Full] to include full-length movie clips in the slideshow, [Short] to include only the opening portion of each clip. 3 Select [Start] and press Q. • The slideshow will start. • Press Q to stop the slideshow. Volume 5 Basic operations Start Press FG during the slideshow to adjust the overall volume of the camera speaker. Press HI to adjust the balance between the background music and the sound recorded with photographs or movies. $ Notes • You can change [Joy] to different BGM. Record the data downloaded from the Olympus website onto the card, select [Joy] from [BGM] in step 2, and press I. Visit the following website for the download. http://support.olympus-imaging.com/bgmdownload/ EN 65 6 Using shooting options Reducing camera shake (image stabilizer) You can reduce the amount of camera shake that can occur when shooting in low light situations or shooting with high magnification. The image stabilizer starts when you press the shutter button halfway. 1 Press the Q button and select the image stabilizer. S-IS AUTO IS Mode ISO AUTO j WB AUTO WB AUTO NORM AUTO i 4:3 250 F5.6 6 01:02:03 When shooting using the viewfinder Using shooting options 2 LN Focal Length Auto 4:3 1023 P OFF S-IS S-IS S-IS FullHD F S-IS AUTO 50 mm When shooting using live view Select an item using the front dial and press the Q button. OFF S-I.S. Off Image stabilizer is off. S-IS1 Auto Image stabilizer is on. S-IS2 Vertical IS Image stabilization applies only to vertical (Y) camera shake. Use when panning the camera horizontally. S-IS3 Horizontal IS Image stabilization applies only to horizontal (Z) camera shake. Use when panning the camera horizontally with the camera held in portrait orientation. S-IS AUTO Landscape Panning I.S. The camera detects the panning direction and applies the appropriate image stabilization. OFF M-I.S. Off Image stabilizer is off. ON Movie-I.S. In addition to Auto image stabilization, camera shake that occurs when shooting while walking is also reduced. Still picture Movie Choosing a focal length (Micro Four Thirds/Four Thirds System lenses excluded) Use focal length information to reduce camera shake when shooting with lenses that are not Micro Four Thirds or Four Thirds system lenses. • Select [Image Stabilizer], press the INFO button, use HI to select a focal length, and press Q. • Choose a focal length between 8 mm and 1000 mm. • Choose the value that most closely matches to the one that is printed on the lens. 66 EN # Cautions • The image stabilizer cannot correct excessive camera shake or camera shake that occurs when the shutter speed is set to the slowest speed. In these cases, it is recommended that you use a tripod. • When using a tripod, set [Image Stabilizer] to [OFF]. • When using a lens with an image stabilization function switch, priority is given to the lens side setting. • When priority is being given to the lens side image stabilization and the camera side is set to [S-IS-AUTO], [S-IS1] is used instead of [S-IS-AUTO]. • You may notice an operating sound or vibration when the image stabilizer is activated. 6 Using shooting options EN 67 Processing options (picture mode) Select a picture mode and make individual adjustments to contrast, sharpness, and other parameters (P. 78). Changes to each picture mode are stored separately. 1 Press the Q button and select [Picture Mode]. S-IS AUTO Picture Mode ISO AUTO j WB AUTO WB AUTO NORM AUTO i 4:3 LN 4:3 250 F5.6 01:02:03 1023 When shooting using the viewfinder 2 6 FullHD Natural P h i j j 4 F j 5 M C When shooting using live view Select an item using the front dial and press the Q button. Using shooting options h i-Enhance i Vivid Produces vivid colors. j Natural Produces natural colors. Z Muted Produces flat tones. a Portrait Produces beautiful skin tones. J Monotone Produces black and white tone. K Custom Select one picture mode, set the parameters, and register the setting. v e-Portrait Produces smooth skin textures. Cannot be used with bracket photography or when shooting movies. c Color Creator Produces colors set using color creator (P. 58). Produces more impressive-looking results suited to the scene. j Pop Art k Soft Focus l Pale&Light Color m Light Tone n Grainy Film o Pin Hole s Diorama t Cross Process u Gentle Sepia v Dramatic Tone Y Key Line Z Watercolor 68 EN Choose an art filter and select the desired effect. Adding effects to a movie You can create movies that take advantage of the effects available in still photography mode. Set the dial to n to enable the settings. 1 Set the shooting mode to n, press the Q button, and use the rear dial to select a shooting mode item. M-IS ON j P WB AUTO S-AF P FullHD Program Auto n 2 P P A S F M Switch the shooting mode using the front dial and press the Q button. Optimal aperture is set automatically according to the brightness of the subject. A Depiction of background is changed by setting the aperture. Use the rear dial to adjust the aperture. S Shutter speed affects how the subject appears. Use the rear dial to adjust the shutter speed. Shutter speed can be set to values between 1/30 s and 1/4000 s. M You control both aperture and shutter speed. Use the front dial to choose the aperture, the rear dial to select the shutter speed from values between 1/30 s and 1/4000 s. Sensitivity can be set manually to values between ISO 200 and 3200; auto ISO sensitivity control is not available. # Cautions • When recording a movie, you cannot change the settings for exposure compensation, aperture value, and shutter speed. • If [Image Stabilizer] is activated while recording a movie, the recorded image is enlarged slightly. • Stabilization is not possible when the camera shake is excessive. • When the inside of the camera becomes hot, shooting is automatically stopped to protect the camera. • With some art filters, [C-AF] operation is limited. • Cards with an SD speed class of 6 or above are recommended for movie recording. 6 Using shooting options P Setting the image aspect You can change the aspect ratio (horizontal-to-vertical ratio) when taking pictures. Depending on your preference, you can set the aspect ratio to [4:3] (standard), [16:9], [3:2], [1:1], or [3:4]. 1 2 Press the Q button and select an aspect ratio. Select a setting using the front dial and press the Q button. # Cautions • JPEG images are cropped to the selected aspect ratio; RAW images, however, are not cropped but are instead saved with information on the selected aspect ratio. • When RAW images are played back, the selected aspect ratio is shown by a frame. EN 69 Image quality (record mode) Select an image quality for photographs and movies according their intended use, for example retouching on a computer or display on the web. 1 Press the Q button and select an image quality for photographs or movies. S-IS AUTO K ISO AUTO WB AUTO WB AUTO NORM AUTO i 4:3 N 4:3 01:02:03 250 F5.6 FullHD 4608x3456 P 1023 RAW L L F N MN F SN L F+ RAW 38 Record mode When shooting using the viewfinder 6 2 When shooting using live view Select an item using the front dial and press the Q button. Record modes (still images) Using shooting options Choose from RAW and JPEG (YF, YN, XN, and WN) modes. Choose a RAW+JPEG option to record both a RAW and a JPEG image with each shot. JPEG modes combine image size (Y, X, and W) and compression ratio (SF, F, N, and B). Image size Compression rate Name Pixel count SF (Super Fine) Y (Large) 4608×3456* YSF YF* YN* YB XSF XF XN* XB WSF WF WN* WB F (Fine) N (Normal) B (Basic) Application 3200×2400 X (Middle) 2560×1920* 1920×1440 Select for the print size 1600×1200 1280×960* W (Small) 1024×768 640×480 For small prints and use on a website * Default RAW image data This format (extension “.ORF”) stores unprocessed image data for later processing. RAW image data cannot be viewed using other cameras or software, and RAW images cannot be selected for printing. JPEG copies of RAW images can be created using this camera. g “Editing still images” (P. 85) 70 EN Record modes (movies) Record mode Pixel count Full HD Fine 1920×1080 Full HD Normal 1920×1080 HD Fine 1280×720 HD Normal 1280×720 HD 1280×720 SD 640×480 File format Application MPEG-4 AVC/ H.264*1 Display on TVs and other devices Motion JPEG*2 For computer playback or editing • Depending on the type of card used, recording may end before the maximum length is reached. *1 Individual movies can be up to 29 minutes long. *2 Files may be up to 2GB in size. Flash output can be adjusted if you find that your subject to appears overexposed, or is underexposed even though the exposure in the rest of the frame is just right. 1 Set the lever to position 2 and press the AFm button. 0 0.0 Flash Auto AFm button P AUTO Lever 2 6 Using shooting options Adjusting flash output (flash intensity control) Select an item using the front dial and press the Q button. # Cautions • This setting has no effect when the flash control mode for the external flash unit is set to MANUAL. • Changes to flash intensity made with the external flash unit are added to those made with the camera. EN 71 Choosing how the camera measures brightness (metering) Choose how the camera meters subject brightness. 1 Set the lever to position 1 and press the AFm button. • You can also press the Q button to select metering. HI SH S-AF C-AF ESP S-AF AFm button Single AF P AUTO C-AF MF S-AF MF TR Lever 2 Turn the front dial to select an item. p Digital ESP metering The camera meters exposure in 324 areas of the frame and optimizes exposure for the current scene or (if an option other than [OFF] is selected for [I Face Priority]) portrait subject. This mode is recommended for general use. H Center weighted averaging metering This metering mode provides the average metering between the subject and the background lighting, placing more weight on the subject at the center. Spot metering Choose this option to meter a small area (about 2% of the frame) with the camera pointed at the object you wish to meter. Exposure will be adjusted according to the brightness at the metered point. IHI Spot metering highlight Increases spot metering exposure. Ensures bright subjects appear bright. ISH Spot metering shadow Lowers spot metering exposure. Ensures dark subjects appear dark. 6 Using shooting options I 3 Press the shutter button halfway. • Normally, the camera will start metering when the shutter button is pressed halfway and lock exposure while the shutter button is held in this position. 72 EN Choosing a focus mode (AF mode) Select a focusing method (focus mode). You can choose separate focusing methods for still photography mode and n mode. 1 Set the lever to position 1 and press the AFm button. • You can also press the Q button to select AF mode. HI SH S-AF C-AF ESP S-AF Single AF AFm button P AUTO C-AF MF S-AF MF TR Lever 2 Turn the rear dial to select an item. • The selected AF mode is displayed on the monitor. C-AF (continuous AF) The camera repeats focusing while the shutter button remains pressed halfway. When the subject is in focus, the AF confirmation mark lights up on the monitor and the beep sounds when the focus is locked at the first and second time. Even if the subject moves or you change the composition of the picture, the camera continues trying to focus. This function allows you to manually focus on any subject. ) Near MF (manual focus) 6 Using shooting options S-AF (single AF) The camera focuses once when the shutter button is pressed halfway. When the focus is locked, a beep sounds, and the AF confirmation mark and the AF target mark light up. This mode is suitable for taking pictures of still subjects or subjects with limited movement. Focus ring S-AF+MF After pressing the shutter button halfway to focus in [S-AF] mode, (simultaneous use of you can turn the focus ring to fine-adjust focus manually. S-AF mode and MF mode) C-AF+TR (AF tracking) Press the shutter button halfway to focus; the camera then tracks and maintains focus on the current subject while the shutter button is held in this position. • The AF target is displayed in red if the camera can no longer track the subject. Release the shutter button and then frame the subject again and press the shutter button halfway. • With a Four Thirds system lens, the tracking range narrows. If the AF target is displayed in red, AF does not operate even if the subject is tracked. # Cautions • The camera may be unable to focus if the subject is poorly lit, obscured by mist or smoke, or lacks contrast. • When using a Four Thirds system lens, the AF will not operate while recording movies. EN 73 Movie sound options (recording sound with movies) 1 Press the Q button when shooting with live view and select a movie sound. R ISO R AUTO i R Movie R On n OFF ON ON When shooting using live view 2 Switch ON/OFF using the front dial and press the Q button. # Cautions 6 Using shooting options 74 EN • When recording sound in a movie, the sound made by the lens and camera operating may be recorded. If desired, you can reduce these sounds by shooting with [AF Mode] set to [S-AF], or by limiting the amount of times you press the buttons. You can use an external microphone. • No sound is recorded in s (Diorama) mode. 7 Menu functions Basic menu operations The menus contain shooting and playback options that are not displayed by the live control, and let you customize the camera settings for easier use. W X q c # d * Preliminary and basic shooting options Advanced shooting options Playback and retouch options Customizing camera settings (P. 90) Accessory port menu options for accessory port devices such as EVF and OLYMPUS PENPAL (P. 108)* Camera setup (e.g., date and language) Not displayed at default settings. 1 Press the MENU button to display the menus. 7 Shooting Menu 1 1 Operation guide j 4:3 Off Set Back Press the MENU button to go back one screen 2 3 Press Q to confirm the setting Use FG to select a tab and press Q. Select an item using FG and press Q to display options for the selected item. The current setting is displayed Shooting Menu 2 1 Function 2 Back 4 j /Y Image Stabilizer Bracketing HDR Multiple Exposure Time Lapse Settings # RC Mode Shooting Menu 2 o Off Off Off Off Off Q Set 1 2 j/Y Image Stabilizer Bracketing HDR Multiple Exposure Time Lapse Settings # RC Mode o T S Y12s Y2s YC Back Off Off Off Off Off Menu functions (Basic operations) 2 Tab Card Setup Reset/Myset Picture Mode D Image Aspect Digital Tele-converter Set Use FG to highlight an option and press Q to select. • Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit the menu. $ Notes • For the default settings of each option, refer to “Menu directory” (P. 142). • A guide is displayed for about 2 seconds after you select an option. Press the INFO button to view or hide guides. EN 75 Using Shooting Menu 1/Shooting Menu 2 Shooting Menu 1 1 2 Card Setup Reset/Myset Picture Mode D Image Aspect Digital Tele-converter j 4:3 Off Set Back W 7 Menu functions (Shooting menus) 76 EN Card Setup (P. 76) Reset/Myset (P. 77) Picture Mode (P. 78) K (P. 79) Image Aspect (P. 69) Digital Tele-converter (P. 84) X j/Y (Sequential shooting/Self-timer) (P. 55, 79) Image Stabilizer (P. 66) Bracketing (P. 80) HDR (P. 84) Multiple Exposure (P. 82) Time Lapse Settings (P. 83) # RC Mode (P. 84) Formatting the card (Card Setup) Cards must be formatted with this camera before first use or after being used with other cameras or computers. All data stored on the card, including protected images, is erased when the card is formatted. When formatting a used card, confirm there are no images that you still want to keep on the card. g “Usable cards” (P. 123) 1 2 Select [Card Setup] in W Shooting Menu 1. Card Setup Select [Format]. All Erase Format Back 3 Select [Yes] and press Q. • Formatting is performed. Set Restoring default settings (Reset/Myset) Camera settings can be easily restored to registered settings. Using reset settings Restore default settings. 1 2 Select [Reset/Myset] in W Shooting Menu 1. 3 Select [Yes] and press Q. Select [Reset] and press Q. • Highlight [Reset] and press I to choose the reset type. To reset all settings except the time, date, and a few others, highlight [Full] and press Q. g “Menu directory” (P. 142) Reset/Myset Reset Myset1 Myset2 Myset3 Myset4 Basic No Data No Data No Data No Data Back Set Saving Myset You can save the current camera settings for modes other than shooting mode. Saved settings can be called up in P, A, S, and M modes. Adjust settings in order to save. 7 Select [Reset/Myset] in W Shooting Menu 1. Select the desired destination ([Myset1]–[Myset4]) and press I. • [Set] appears next to destinations ([Myset1]–[Myset4]) to which settings have already been saved. Selecting [Set] again overwrites the registered setting. • To cancel the registration, select [Reset]. 4 Select [Set] and press Q. • Settings that can be saved to Myset g “Menu directory” (P. 142) Using Myset Sets the camera to the settings selected for Myset. 1 2 Select [Reset/Myset] in W Shooting Menu 1. 3 Select [Set] and press Q. Select the desired settings ([Myset1]–[Myset4]) and press Q. Reset/Myset Reset Myset1 Myset2 Myset3 Myset4 Back Basic Set Set Set Set Menu functions (Shooting menus) 1 2 3 Set EN 77 Processing options (Picture Mode) You can make individual adjustments to contrast, sharpness and other parameters in [Picture Mode] (P. 68) settings. Changes to each picture mode are stored separately. 1 Select [Picture Mode] in W Shooting Menu 1. Shooting Menu 1 Card Setup Reset/Myset Picture Mode D Image Aspect Digital Tele-converter 1 2 Set Back 2 3 7 Menu functions (Shooting menus) 78 EN j 4:3 Off Select an option with FG and press Q. Press I to display settings for the selected option. h i-a J Contrast Distinction between light and dark Sharpness Sharpness of the image Saturation Vividness of the color k Gradation Adjust tone (gradation). k k k k Auto Divides the image into detailed regions and adjusts the brightness separately for each region. This is effective for images with areas of large contrast in which the whites appear too bright or the blacks appear too dark. Normal Use [Normal] mode for general uses. High Key Gradation for a bright subject. Low Key K Gradation for a dark subject. Effect (i-Enhance) Sets the extent that the effect will be applied. B&W Filter (Monotone) Creates a black and white image. The filter color is brightened and the complementary color is darkened. N:Neutral Creates a normal black and white image. Ye:Yellow Reproduces clearly defined white cloud with natural blue sky. Or:Orange Slightly emphasizes colors in blue skies and sunsets. R:Red Strongly emphasizes colors in blue skies and brightness of crimson foliage. G:Green Strongly emphasizes colors in red lips and green leaves. Pict. Tone (Monotone) h i-a J K k k Colors the black and white image. N:Neutral Creates a normal black and white image. S:Sepia Sepia B:Blue Bluish P:Purple Purplish G:Green Greenish # Cautions • Changes to contrast have no effect at settings other than [Normal]. Image quality (K) Select an image quality. You can select a separate image quality for photographs and movies. This is the same as the [K] item in [Live Control]. • You can change the JPEG image size and compression ratio combination, and [X] and [W] pixel counts. [K Set], [Pixel Count] g “Using the custom menus” (P. 90) You can customize the self timer operation. 1 Select [j/Y] in X Shooting Menu 2. Shooting Menu 2 1 2 j/Y Image Stabilizer Bracketing HDR Multiple Exposure Time Lapse Settings # RC Mode Back 2 3 o Off Off Off Off Off Set Select [YC] (custom) and press I. Use FG to select the item and press I. • Use FG to select the setting and press Q. Frame Sets the number of frames to be shot. Y Timer Sets the time after the shutter button is pressed until the picture is taken. Interval Time Sets the shooting interval for the second and subsequent frames. Menu functions (Shooting menus) Setting the self timer (j/Y) 7 EN 79 Varying settings over a series of photographs (bracketing) “Bracketing” refers to the act of varying settings automatically over a series of shots or a series of images to “bracket” the current value. You can store bracket shooting settings and turn bracket shooting off. 1 Select [Bracketing] in X Shooting Menu 2 and press Q. Shooting Menu 2 1 2 j/Y Image Stabilizer Bracketing HDR Multiple Exposure Time Lapse Settings # RC Mode Back 2 After selecting [On], press I and select a bracket shooting type. • When you select bracket shooting, t appears on the screen. Menu functions (Shooting menus) 80 EN 3 Off Off Off Off Off Set Bracketing AE BKT WB BKT FL BKT ISO BKT ART BKT Back 7 o 3f 1.0EV A-- G----- Set Press I, select settings for parameters such as the number of shots, and then press the Q button. • Continue to press the Q button until you return to the screen in step 1. • If you select [Off] in step 2, bracket shooting settings will be saved and you can shoot normally. % Tips • You can also use button operations for bracket settings. Set the lever to position 2 and turn the dial while pressing the jYHDR button. Select the bracket shooting type using the front dial and the number of shots and other parameters using the rear dial. After performing the settings, you can switch between bracket photography and normal photography each time you press the jYHDR button. # Cautions • Cannot be used during HDR photography. • Cannot be used at the same time as multiple exposure and time lapse shooting. AE BKT (AE bracketing) The camera varies the exposure of each shot. The modification amount can be selected from 0.3 EV, 0.7 EV, or 1.0 EV. In single-frame shooting mode, one photograph is taken each time the shutter button is pressed all the way down, while in sequential shooting mode the camera continues to take shots in the following order while the shutter button is pressed all the way down: no modification, negative, positive. Number of shots: 2, 3, 5, or 7 Bracketing • The t indicator turns green during bracketing. -AE BKT Off • The camera modifies exposure by varying aperture and A-- G-WB BKT 2f 0.3EV shutter speed (mode P), shutter speed (modes A and M), FL BKT 2f 0.7EV -ISO BKT 2f 1.0EV -or aperture (mode S). ART BKT 3f 0.3EV -• The camera brackets the value currently selected for 3f 0.7EV -3f 1.0EV exposure compensation. Set • The size of the bracketing increment changes with the value Back selected for [EV Step]. g “Using the custom menus” (P. 90) WB BKT (WB bracketing) Three images with different white balances (adjusted in specified color directions) are automatically created from one shot, starting with the value currently selected for white balance. WB bracketing is available in P, A, S and M modes. • White balance can be varied by 2, 4, or 6 steps on each of WB BKT the A – B (Amber – Blue) and G – M (Green – Magenta) axes. A-B G-M • The camera brackets the value currently selected for white 3f 4Step 3f 4Step balance compensation. • No pictures will be taken during WB bracketing if there is not enough memory on the card for the selected number of frames. Back Set FL BKT (FL bracketing) The camera varies flash level over three shots (no modification on the first shot, negative on the second, and positive on the third). In single-frame shooting, one shot is taken each time the shutter button is pressed; in sequential shooting, all shots are taken while the shutter button is pressed. Bracketing • The t indicator turns green during bracketing. -AE BKT Off • The size of the bracketing increment changes with the value A-- G-WB BKT 3f 0.3EV selected for [EV Step]. g “Using the custom menus” (P. 90) FL BKT 3f 0.7EV -ISO BKT ART BKT 3f 1.0EV --- Set ISO BKT (ISO bracketing) The camera varies the sensitivity over three shots while keeping the shutter speed and aperture fixed. The modification amount can be selected from 0.3 EV, 0.7 EV, or 1.0 EV. Each time the shutter button is pressed, the camera shoots three frames with the set sensitivity (or if auto sensitivity is selected, the optimal sensitivity setting) on the first shot, negative modification on the second shot, and positive modification on the third shot. • The size of the bracketing increment does not change with Bracketing -AE BKT Off the value selected for [ISO Step]. g “Using the custom A-- G-WB BKT 3f 0.3EV menus” (P. 90) FL BKT 3f 0.7EV -ISO BKT 3f 1.0EV -• Bracketing is performed regardless of the upper limit set with -ART BKT [ISO-Auto Set]. g “Using the custom menus” (P. 90) Back Set ART BKT (ART bracketing) Each time the shutter is released, the camera records multiple images, each with a different art filter setting. You can turn art filter bracketing on or off separately for each picture mode. • Recording may take some time. ART BKT Pop Art • ART BKT cannot be combined with WB BKT or ISO BKT. Menu functions (Shooting menus) Back 7 Soft Focus Pale&Light Color Light Tone Grainy Film Pin Hole Diorama Back EN 81 Recording multiple exposures in a single image (multiple exposure) Record multiple exposures in a single image, using the option currently selected for image quality. 1 2 Select [Multiple Exposure] in X Shooting Menu 2. Frame Select [2f]. Auto Gain When set to [On], the brightness of each frame is set to 1/2 and the images are overlaid. When set to [Off], the images are overlaid with the original brightness of each frame. Overlay 7 Menu functions (Shooting menus) 82 EN When set to [On], a RAW image recorded on a card can be overlaid with multiple exposures and stored as a separate image. The number of pictures taken is one. • a is displayed in the monitor while multiple exposure is in effect. 3 Multiple Exposure Adjust settings. Frame Auto Gain Overlay Off Off Off Set Back ISO 400 P 250 F5.6 0.0 01:02:03 38 Shoot. • a is displayed in green when shooting starts. • Press to delete the last shot. • The previous shot is superimposed on the view through the lens as a guide to framing the next shot. % Tips • To overlay 3 or more frames: Select RAW for [K] and use the [Overlay] option to make repeated multiple exposures. • For more information on overlaying RAW images: g [Edit] (P. 85) # Cautions • The camera will not go to sleep while multiple exposure is in effect. • Photographs taken with other cameras cannot be included in a multiple exposure. • When [Overlay] is set to [On], the images displayed when a RAW image is selected are developed with the settings at the time of shooting. • To set the shooting functions, cancel multiple exposure shooting first. Some functions cannot be set. • Multiple exposure is cancelled automatically from the first picture in the following situations. The camera is turned off/The q button is pressed/The MENU button is pressed/The shooting mode is set to a mode other than P, A, S, M/The battery power runs out/Any cable is connected to the camera • When a RAW image is selected using [Overlay], the JPEG image for the image recorded in RAW+JPEG is displayed. • When shooting multiple exposures using bracketing, priority is given to multiple exposure shooting. While the overlay image is being saved, bracketing is reset to the factory default setting. Shooting automatically with a fixed interval (time lapse shooting) You can set the camera to shoot automatically with a set time lapse. The shot frames can also be recorded as into a single movie. This setting is only available in P/A/S/M modes. 1 Perform the following settings under [Time Lapse Settings] in X Shooting Menu 2. Frame Sets the number of frames to be shot. Start Waiting Time Sets waiting time before starting to shot. Interval Time Sets interval between shots after shooting starts. Time Lapse Movie Sets recording format of frame sequence. [Off]: Records each frame as a still picture. [On]: Records each frame as a still picture and generates and records a single movie from the frame sequence. • The image quality of the movie is [M-JPEG HD] and the frame rate 10fps. 2 Shoot. % Tips • Longer shooting times are possible using a power battery holder (sold separately) (P. 129) and an AC adaptor. A maximum of 999 shots are possible. # Cautions • • • • • • • • • • • • If the AF mode is set to [C-AF] or [C-AF+TR], it is automatically changed to [S-AF]. Touch operations are disabled during time lapse shooting. Cannot be used with HDR photography. Bracketing and multiple exposure cannot be used together. The flash will not work if the flash charging time is longer than the interval between shots. For [BULB] and [TIME] shooting, the shutter speed is fixed to 60 seconds. If the camera automatically turns off in interval between shots, it will turn on in time for the next shot. If the any of the still pictures are not recorded correctly, the time lapse movie will not be generated. If there is insufficient space on the card, the time lapse movie will not be recorded. Time lapse shooting will cancelled if any of the following is operated: Mode dial, MENU button, q button, lens release button, or connecting the USB cable. If you turn off the camera, time lapse shooting will be cancelled. If there is not enough charge left on the battery, the shooting may end partway through. Make sure the battery is suitably charged before starting. 7 Menu functions (Shooting menus) • Frames are shot even if the image is not in focus after AF. If you wish to fix the focus position, shoot in MF. • [Rec View] operates for 0.5 seconds. • If either of the time before shooting, or shooting interval is set to 1 minute 30 seconds or longer, the monitor and camera power will turn off after 1 minute. 10 seconds before shooting, the power will automatically turn on again. When the monitor is off, press the shutter button to turn it on again. EN 83 Wireless remote control flash photography You can use the supplied flash and a flash equipped with the RC mode function to perform wireless flash photography. g “Wireless remote control flash photography” (P. 131) Digital Zoom (Digital Tele-converter) Digital Tele-converter is used to zoom in beyond the current zoom ratio. The camera saves the center crop. Zoom is increased by about 2×. 1 2 Select [On] for [Digital Tele-converter] in W Shooting Menu 1. The view in the monitor will be enlarged by a factor of two. • The subject will be recorded as it appears in the monitor. # Cautions 7 Menu functions (Shooting menus) 84 EN • Digital zoom is not available with multiple exposures, in J mode, or when T, s, f, w, or m is selected in SCN mode. • This function is not available when [Movie Effect] is [On] in n mode. • When a RAW image is displayed, the area visible in the monitor is indicated by a frame. • AF target drops. HDR photography Automatically shoot an HDR combination image, or shoot bracketing images to be used for HDR combining. This is the same as pressing the HDR button to perform settings (P. 59). Using the playback menu Playback Menu 1 2 m R Edit Print Order Reset Protect Connection to Smartphone Back m (P. 65) R (P. 85) Edit (P. 85) On Set Print Order (P. 112) Reset Protect (P. 87) Connection to Smartphone (P. 87) Displaying images rotated (R) When set to [On], photographs taken with the camera rotated in portrait orientation are automatically rotated and displayed in portrait orientation. Editing still images Recorded images can be edited and saved as new images. Select [Edit] in the q Playback Menu and press Q. Use FG to select [Sel. Image] and press Q. Use HI to select the image to be edited and press Q. • [RAW Data Edit] is displayed if the picture is a RAW image, [JPEG Edit] if it is a JPEG image. If the image was recorded in RAW+JPEG format, both [RAW Data Edit] and [JPEG Edit] will be displayed. Select the menu for the image to be edited. 4 Select [RAW Data Edit] or [JPEG Edit] and press Q. Create a JPEG copy of a RAW image edited according to the settings. [Current] RAW Data Edit [Custom1] [Custom2] ART BKT The JPEG copy is processed using the current camera settings. Adjust the camera settings before choosing this option. Editing can be performed while changing the settings on the monitor. You can save the settings used. Menu functions (Playback menus) 1 2 3 7 The image is edited using settings for the selected art filter. EN 85 Choose from the following options: [Shadow Adj]: Brightens a dark backlit subject. [Redeye Fix]: Reduces the red-eye phenomenon during flash shooting. [P]: Use the dial to choose the size of the crop and FGHI to position the crop. O JPEG Edit 7 Menu functions (Playback menus) 86 EN 5 Set [Aspect]: Changes the aspect ratio of images from 4:3 (standard) to [3:2], [16:9], [1:1], or [3:4]. After changing the aspect ratio, use FGHI to specify the trimming position. [Black & White]: Creates black and white images. [Sepia]: Creates sepia-toned images. [Saturation]: Sets the color depth. Adjust the color saturation checking the picture on the screen. [Q]: Converts the image file size to 1280 × 960, 640 × 480, or 320 × 240. Images with an aspect ratio other than 4:3 (standard) are converted to the closest image file size. [e-Portrait]: Makes skin look smooth and translucent. You may not be able to compensate depending on the image if face detection fails. When the settings are complete, press Q. • The settings will be applied to the image. 6 Select [Yes] and press Q. • The edited image is stored in the card. # Cautions • Movies and 3D photos cannot be edited. • Red-eye correction may not work depending on the image. • Editing of a JPEG image is not possible in the following cases: When an image is processed on a PC, when there is not enough space in the card memory, when an image is recorded on another camera • When resizing ([Q]) an image, you cannot select a larger number of pixels than was originally recorded. • [P] and [Aspect] can only be used to edit images with an aspect ratio of 4:3 (standard). • When [Picture Mode] is set to [ART], [Color Space] is locked to [sRGB]. Image overlay Up to 3 frames of RAW images taken with the camera can be overlaid and saved as a separate image. The image is saved with the record mode set at the time the image is saved. (If [RAW] is selected, the copy will be saved in [YN+RAW] format.) 1 2 3 4 Select [Edit] in the q Playback Menu and press Q. Use FG to select [Image Overlay] and press Q. Select the number of images in the overlay and press Q. Use FGHI to select the RAW images that will be used in the overlay. • When you have selected the number of images specified in Step 3, the overlay will be displayed. Image Overlay RAW RAW RAW RAW RAW RAW RAW Back 5 Set Image Overlay Adjust gain. • Use HI to select an image and use FG to adjust gain. • Gain can be adjusted in the range 0.1 – 2.0. Check the results in the monitor. 7 6 ×1.5 ×0.5 Set Press Q. A confirmation dialog will be displayed; select [Yes] and press Q. % Tips • To overlay 4 or more frames, save the overlay image as a RAW file and use [Image Overlay] repeatedly. Audio recording Add an audio recording (up to 30 sec. long) to the current photograph. This is the same function as [R] during playback. (P. 64) Canceling all protections This function lets you cancel the protection of several images at one time. 1 2 Select [Reset Protect] in the q Playback Menu. Menu functions (Playback menus) ×0.3 Back Select [Yes] and press Q. Using the Smartphone connection option (Connection to Smartphone) The camera can connect to a smartphone by using the wireless LAN function. Once connected camera images can be viewed on and transferred to the other device. g “Using the camera wireless LAN function” (P. 119) EN 87 Using the setup menu Use the Setup Menu to set the basic camera functions. Setup Menu 1 2 X W --.--.-- --:-English j±0 k±0 0.5sec Rec View Wi-Fi Settings c/# Menu Display Firmware Back Option 7 Menu functions (Setup menus) 88 EN Set g Description X (Date/time setting) Set the camera clock. W (Changing the display language) You can change the language used for the on-screen display and error messages from English to another language. i (Monitor brightness adjustment) You can adjust the brightness and color temperature of the monitor. Color temperature adjustment will affect only the monitor display during playback. Use HI to highlight j (color temperature) or k (brightness) and FG to adjust the value. Press the INFO button to switch between [Natural] and [Vivid] monitor color display. Rec View 17 j -2 — k +1 — Vivid Natural Back Set Choose whether pictures are displayed immediately after shooting and for how long. This is useful for making a brief check of the picture you have just taken. Pressing the shutter button halfway while checking the picture lets you resume shooting immediately. [0.3sec] – [20sec]: Selects the number of seconds to display each picture. [Off]: The picture being recorded to the card is not displayed. [Autoq]: Displays the image being recorded, and then switches to playback mode. This is useful for erasing a picture after checking it. — Wi-Fi Settings Set up the camera to connect to a smartphone with Wi-Fi connectivity using the wireless function on the camera. 89 c/# Menu Display Choose whether to display the custom or accessory port menu. Firmware Your product’s firmware version will be displayed. When you make inquiries about your camera or accessories or when you want to download software, you will need to state which version of each of the products you are using. 108 — Setting up a wireless LAN connection (Wi-Fi Settings) To use the wireless LAN functions on the camera (P. 119), you need to make setting such as the password to be used when connecting. [Private] and [One-Time] for a one-time connection are available. Setting password selection method 1 2 3 Select [Wi-Fi Settings] in the d Setup Menu and press Q. Select [Wi-Fi Connect Settings] and press I. Select the wireless LAN connection method and press Q. • • • • [Private]: Connect using a preset password. [One-Time]: Connect using a different password each time. [Select]: Select which method to use each time. [Off]: The Wi-Fi function is turned off. Changing private connection password Change the password used for [Private]. Select [Wi-Fi Settings] in the d Setup Menu and press Q. Select [Private Password] and press I. Follow the operation guide and press the R button. • A new password will be set. Cancelling image sharing Deselects images selected for sharing (P. 62) when connected to a wireless LAN network. 1 2 3 Select [Wi-Fi Settings] in the d Setup Menu and press Q. Select [Reset share Order] and press I. Select [Yes] and press Q. Initializing wireless LAN settings Initializes content of [Wi-Fi Settings]. 1 2 3 Select [Wi-Fi Settings] in the d Setup Menu and press Q. 7 Menu functions (Setup menus) 1 2 3 Select [Reset Wi-Fi Settings] and press I. Select [Yes] and press Q. EN 89 Using the custom menus Camera settings can be customized using the c Custom Menu. Custom Menu R S T U V W X Y Z b k 7 AF/MF (P. 90) Button/Dial/Lever (P. 91) 2 Release/j (P. 91) Disp/8/PC (P. 92) Exp/p/ISO (P. 93) # Custom (P. 94) K/Color/WB (P. 95) Record/Erase (P. 96) Movie (P. 97) Built-In EVF (P. 97) R S T U V W X AF/MF Button/Dial/Lever Release/j Disp/8/PC Exp/p/ISO # Custom K/Color/WB Back Set K Utility (P. 98) R AF/MF Menu functions (Custom menus) Option AF Mode Full-time AF AEL/AFL Reset Lens BULB/TIME Focusing Focus Ring MF Assist P Set Home 90 EN Custom Menu 1 MENU c Description Choose the AF mode. This is the same as the live control setting. You can set separate focusing methods for still photography mode and n mode. If [On] is selected, the camera will continue to focus even when the shutter button is not pressed halfway. Cannot be used when using a Four Thirds system lens. Customize AF and AE lock. When set to [On], this resets the focus of the lens (infinity) each time the power is turned off. The focus of power zoom lenses is also reset. Normally focus locks during the exposure when manual focus (MF) is selected. Select [On] to allow focusing using the focus ring. You can customize how the lens adjusts to the focal point by selecting the rotational direction of the focus ring. When set to [On], you can automatically switch to zoom or peaking in manual focus mode by rotating the focus ring. Choose the AF target position that will be saved as the home position. p appears in the AF target selection display while you choose a home position. R g 73 — 98 — — — 99 — MENU R AF/MF Option AF Illuminat. I Face Priority AF Area Pointer C-AF Lock Description Select [Off] to disable the AF illuminator. Select the face priority AF mode. This is the same as the live control setting. If you select [Off], the AF target frame will not be displayed during confirmation. When [AF Mode] (P. 73) is set to [C-AF], the AF does not adjust to sudden changes in subject distance. Depending on the sensitivity selected, the time it takes for the AF to adjust will change. S Button/Dial/Lever Option Button Function Dial Direction Mode Dial Function t Lever Function u+v MENU Description Rls Priority S Rls Priority C j L fps j H fps j + IS Off Half Way Rls With IS g — 53 — — S g Choose the function assigned to the selected button. [UFunction], [VFunction], [RFunction], [tFunction], [YFunction], [ZFunction], [IFunction], [GFunction], [nFunction], [mFunction], [nFunction], [lFunction] You can change the functions assigned to the rear dial and front dial. Choose the direction in which the dial is rotated to adjust shutter speed or aperture. Change the program shift direction. Customize the shooting mode set by the mode dial. You can apply saved Myset settings. [Myset1] - [Myset4] (P. 77) can be selected when the settings are registered. You can use the positioning of the lever to change the function of the dials and button. If you select [Off], you cannot switch the v button function even if you switch the lever. T Release/j Option c R MENU 99 — — — 101 — c T Description g If [On] is selected, the shutter can be released even when the camera is not in focus. This option can be set separately for S-AF (P. 73) and C-AF (P. 73) modes. — Choose the frame advance rates for [S] and [T]. Figures are the approximate maximums. 55 When set to [Off], the image stablizer will turn on for sequential shooting. If set to [On], image stabilization operates when you press shutter button halfway. 7 Menu functions (Custom menus) Dial Function c — — EN 91 T Release/j Option Lens I.S. Priority Release Lag-Time c MENU T g Description If [On] is selected, priority is given to the lens function operation when using a lens with an image stabilization function. If [Short] is selected, the time lag between fully pressing the shutter button and the shot being taken can be shortened.* — — * This will shorten the battery life. Also make sure that the camera is not subject to sharp impacts while in use. Such impacts may cause the monitor to stop displaying subjects. If this happens, turn the power off and on again. U Disp/8/PC HDMI 7 Video Out Menu functions (Custom menus) KControl Settings Displayed Grid Picture Mode Settings Histogram Settings Mode Guide Live View Boost 92 EN U g Description [HDMI Out]: Selecting the digital video signal format for connecting to a TV via an HDMI cable. [HDMI Control]: Select [On] to allow the camera to be operated using remotes for TVs that support HDMI control. Choose the video standard ([NTSC] or [PAL]) used in your country or region. Choose the controls displayed in each shooting mode. 101 101 Shooting mode P/A/ S/M A ART SCN Live Control (P. 30) Live SCP (P. 104) – Controls G/Info Settings c MENU Option Live Guide (P. 28) – – Art Menu – – – Scene Menu – – – Choose the information displayed when the INFO button is pressed. [q Info]: Choose the information displayed in full frame playback. [LV-Info]: Choose the information displayed when the camera is in shooting mode. [G Settings]: Choose the information displayed in index and calendar playback. Select [w], [x], [y], [X] or [x] to display a grid on the monitor. Display only the selected picture mode when a picture mode is selected. [Highlight]: Choose the lower bound for the highlight display. [Shadow]: Choose the upper bound for the shadow display. Choose [Off] to not display help for the selected mode when the mode dial is rotated to a new setting. If [On] is selected, priority will be given to making images clearly visible; the effects exposure compensation and other settings will not be visible in the monitor. 103 105, 106 — — 105 18 — U Disp/8/PC Option Frame Rate Art LV Mode Expand LV Dyn. Range Flicker reduction LV Close Up Mode Peaking Settings Backlit LCD Auto Power Off 8 (Beep sound) USB Mode Option Noise Reduct. U g Description Select [High] to reduce frame lag. However, the image quality may drop. [mode1]: The filter effect is always displayed. [mode2]: Filter effects are not visible in the monitor while the shutter button is pressed halfway. Choose for a smooth display. If you select [Off], the viewfinder and monitor will be displayed normally during HDR shooting. Reduce the effects of flicker under some kinds of lighting, including fluorescent lamps. When flicker is not reduced by the [Auto] setting, set to [50Hz] or [60Hz] in accordance with the commercial power frequency of the region where the camera is used. [mode1]: Pressing the shutter button halfway cancels zoom. [mode2]: Zoom is not cancelled when the shutter button is pressed halfway. You can switch the edge enhancement color between white and black. If no operations are performed for the selected period, the backlight will dim to save battery power. The backlight will not dim if [Hold] is selected. The camera will enter sleep (energy saving) mode if no operations are performed for the selected period. The camera can be reactivated by pressing the shutter button halfway. Sets camera to turn off after a set period. When set to [Off], you can turn off the beep sound that is emitted when the focus locks by pressing the shutter button. Choose a mode for connecting the camera to a computer or printer. Choose [Auto] to display USB mode options every time the camera is connected. V Exp/p/ISO EV Step c MENU c Description Choose the size of the increments used when selecting shutter speed, aperture, exposure compensation, and other exposure parameters. This function reduces the noise that is generated during long exposures. [Auto]: Noise reduction is performed at slow shutter speeds, or when the internal temperature of the camera has risen. [On]: Noise reduction is performed with every shot. [Off]: Noise reduction off. • Noise reduction requires about twice the time needed to record the image. • Noise reduction turns off automatically during sequential shooting. • This function may not work effectively with some shooting conditions or subjects. — — 59 — 54 — — — — — — V g 7 Menu functions (Custom menus) Sleep MENU — 41 EN 93 V Exp/p/ISO Option Noise Filter ISO ISO Step ISO-Auto Set ISO-Auto 7 Metering AEL Metering Menu functions (Custom menus) BULB/TIME Timer BULB/TIME Monitor Live BULB Live TIME Anti-Shock z MENU Choose the delay between the shutter button being pressed and the shutter being released. This diminishes camera shake caused by vibrations. This feature is useful in situations such as microscope photography and astrophotography. It is also useful for sequential shooting (P. 55) and self timer photography (P. 55). 94 EN MENU Description # X-Sync. Choose the shutter speed used when the flash fires. # Slow Limit Choose the slowest shutter speed available when a flash is used. When set to [On], it will be added to the exposure compensation value and flash intensity control will be performed. w+F V g Description Choose the amount of noise reduction performed at high ISO sensitivities. Set ISO sensitivity. Select the increments available for choosing ISO sensitivity. Choose the upper limit and default value used for ISO sensitivity when [Auto] is selected for ISO. [High Limit]: Choose the upper limit for auto ISO sensitivity selection. [Default]: Choose the default value for auto ISO sensitivity selection. Choose the shooting modes in which [Auto] ISO sensitivity is available. [P/A/S]: Auto ISO sensitivity selection is available in all modes except M. ISO sensitivity is fixed at ISO200 in mode M. [All]: Auto ISO sensitivity selection is available in all modes. Choose a metering mode according to the scene. Choose the metering method used for AE lock (P. 98). [Auto]: Use the currently selected metering method. Choose the maximum exposure for bulb and time photography. Sets the monitor brightness when [BULB], or [TIME] is used. Also sets the brightness of the external electronic viewfinder. Choose the display interval during shooting. Some restrictions apply. The frequency drops at high ISO sensitivities. Choose [Off] to disable the display. Tap the monitor or press the shutter button halfway to refresh the display. W # Custom Option c — 57 — — — 72 — — — — — — c W g 106 106 49, 71 X K/Color/WB K Set You can select the JPEG image quality mode from combinations of three image sizes and four compression rates. D Set 1 2 Y SF X F 3 W N Pixel Count 2) Press Q. 4 W SF Set Compression rate Choose the pixel count for [X]- and [W]-size images. 1) Select [Xiddle] or [Wmall] and press I. Pixel Count Xiddle Wmall 2560×1920 1280×960 70 2) Choose a pixel count and press Q. All > W Keep Warm Color #+WB Color Space Set Choose [On] to correct peripheral illumination according to the type of lens. • Compensation is not available for teleconverters or extension tubes. • Noise may be visible at the edges of photographs taken at high ISO sensitivities. Set the white balance. This is the same as the live control setting. You can also fine-tune the white balance for each mode. You can also make fine adjustments using white balance compensation on the super control panel (P. 24). [All Set]: Use the same white balance compensation in all modes except [CWB]. [All Reset]: Set white balance compensation for all modes except [CWB] to 0. Select [Off] to eliminate “warm” colors from pictures taken under incandescent lighting. 56 Adjust white balance for use with a flash. — You can select how colors are reproduced on the monitor or printer. — — — 7 Menu functions (Custom menus) Back WB 70 F Back Image size Shading Comp. X g Description 1) Use HI to select a combination ([K1] – [K4]) and use FG to change. Pixel Count c MENU Option — EN 95 Y Record/Erase Option Quick Erase RAW+JPEG Erase File Name 7 Edit Filename Menu functions (Custom menus) Priority Set dpi Settings Copyright Settings* MENU c Y g Description If [On] is selected, pressing the button in the playback display will immediately delete the current image. Choose the action performed when a photograph recorded at a setting of RAW+JPEG is erased in single-frame playback (P. 33). [JPEG]: Only the JPEG copy is erased. [RAW]: Only the RAW copy is erased. [RAW+JPEG]: Both copies are erased. • Both the RAW and JPEG copies are deleted when selected images are deleted or when [All Erase] (P. 76) is selected. [Auto]: Even when a new card is inserted, the file numbers are retained from the previous card. File numbering continues from the last number used or from the highest number available on the card. [Reset]: When you insert a new card, the folder numbers starts at 100 and the file name starts at 0001. If a card containing images is inserted, the file numbers start at the number following the highest file number on the card. Choose how image files are named by editing the portion of the filename highlighted below in gray. sRGB: Pmdd0000.jpg Pmdd AdobeRGB: _mdd0000.jpg mdd Choose the default selection ([Yes] or [No]) for confirmation dialogs. Choose the print resolution. Add the names of the photographer and copyright holder to new photographs. Names can be up to 63 characters long. [Copyright Info.]: Select [On] to include the names of the photographer and copyright holder in the Exif data for new photographs. [Artist Name]: Enter the name of the photographer. [Copyright Name]: Enter the name of the copyright holder. — 70 — — — — 1) Highlight a character 1 and press Q to add the highlighted character to the name 2. 2) Repeat Step 1 to complete the name, then highlight [END] and press Q. • To delete a character, press the INFO button to place the cursor in the name area 2, highlight the character, and press . Copyright Name 2 1 — 05/70 ABCDE ! ” # 0 1 2 3 A B C P Q R S a b c d o p q r @ Cancel $ 4 D T e s % 5 E U f t & 6 F V g u ’ 7 G W h v ( 8 H X i w Delete ) 9 I Y j x * : J Z k y + ; K [ l z , < L ] m { = M _ n } . / > ? N O END Set * OLYMPUS does not accept liability for damages arising from disputes involving the use of [Copyright Settings]. Use at your own risk. 96 EN Z Movie Option nMode Movie R Movie Effect MENU c Choose a movie record mode. This option can also be selected using the live control. Choose [Off] to record silent movies. This option can also be selected using the live control. 69 74 Choose [On] to enable movie effects in n mode. Reduce wind noise during recording. 42 Wind Noise Reduction Recording Volume Adjust microphone sensitivity. [Built-In R]: Set the camera’s internal microphone. [External R]: Set when using the SEMA-1 (sold separately). [Line-In R]: Set a microphone connected to the microphone jack. b Built-In EVF MENU c Description Built-in EVF Style Choose the viewfinder display style. Like the monitor, the viewfinder can be used to display histograms and highlights and shadows. Display a framing grid in the viewfinder. Choose from [w], [x], [y], [X], and [x]. If [Off] is selected, the viewfinder will not turn on when you put your eye to the viewfinder. Use the u button to choose the display. Adjust viewfinder brightness and hue. Brightness is automatically adjusted when [EVF Auto Luminance] is set to [On]. If set to [Off], the level gauge will not be displayed when the shutter button is pressed halfway down. This is effective when [Built-in EVF Style] is set to [Style 1] or [Style 2]. V Displayed Grid EVF Auto Switch EVF Adjust V Half Way Level — — b g — — — — — — 7 Menu functions (Custom menus) Option V Info Settings Z g Description EN 97 k K Utility Description The pixel mapping feature allows the camera to check and adjust the image pickup device and image processing functions. Adjust optimal exposure separately for each metering mode. • This reduces the number of exposure compensation options available in the selected direction. • The effects are not visible in the monitor. To make normal adjustments to the exposure, perform exposure compensation (P. 49). You can minutely adjust the AF phase contrast focus point in ±20 steps. AF Focus Adj. 7 141 — 107 : Warning Level Choose the battery level at which the 8 warning is displayed. 16 : Battery Priority Level Adjust Choose the primary power source when using a power battery holder. 129 Menu functions (Custom menus) Touch Screen Settings Eye-Fi* You can calibrate the angle of the level gauge. [Reset]: Resets adjusted values to the default settings. [Adjust]: Sets the current camera orientation as the 0 position. Activate the touch screen. Choose [Off] to disable the touch screen. Enable or disable upload when using an Eye-Fi card. Displayed when an Eye-Fi card is inserted. — — — * Use in accordance with local regulations. Onboard airplanes and in other locations in which the use of wireless devices is prohibited, remove the Eye-Fi card from the camera, or select [Off] for [Eye-Fi]. The camera does not support the “endless” Eye-Fi mode. AEL/AFL c MENU R S-AF AEL/AFL [AEL/AFL] Autofocus and metering can be performed by pressing the button to which AEL/AFL has been assigned. Choose a mode for each focus mode. mode1 Half Way Fully AEL AFL Back AEL/S-AF Exposure AEL Set AEL/AFL Shutter button function Mode S-AF C-AF MF 98 EN g Option Pixel Mapping Exposure Shift k c MENU mode1 mode2 mode3 mode1 mode2 mode3 mode4 mode1 mode2 mode3 Half-press Focus S-AF S-AF – C-AF start C-AF start – – – – – Exposure Locked – Locked Locked – Locked – Locked – Locked Full press Focus – – – Locked Locked Locked Locked – – – Exposure – Locked – – Locked – Locked – Locked – Button function When holding down AEL/AFL Focus Exposure – Locked – Locked S-AF – – Locked – Locked C-AF start – C-AF start – – Locked – Locked S-AF – MF Assist MENU c R [MF Assist] This is a focus assist function for MF. When the focus ring is rotated, the edge of the subject is enhanced or a portion of the screen display is magnified. When you stop operating the focus ring, the screen returns to the original display. Magnify Peaking Magnifies a portion of the screen. The portion to be magnified can be set in advance using AF target. g [AF Area] (P.52) Displays clearly defined outlines with edge enhancement. You can select the enhancement color. g [Peaking Settings] (P.93) $ Notes • [Magnify] and [Peaking] can be displayed using button operations. The display is switched every time the button is pressed. Assign the switching function to one of the buttons in advance using [Button Function] (P. 99). # Cautions • When Peaking is in use, the edges of small subjects tend to be enhanced more strongly. This is no guarantee of accurate focusing. Button Function Button function items [UFunction] / [VFunction] / [RFunction]*1 / [tFunction] / [YFunction] / [ZFunction] / [IFunction] / [GFunction] / [nFunction] / ([Direct Function]*2 / [P]*3) / [mFunction] / [nFunction] / [lFunction]*4 *1 Not available in n mode. *2 Assign the function to each of FGHI. *3 Choose the AF target. *4 Choose the function assigned to the button on some lenses. F Adjust exposure compensation. ISO Adjust ISO sensitivity. WB Adjust white balance. AEL/AFL AE lock or AF lock. The function changes according to the [AEL/AFL] setting. When AEL is selected, press the button once to lock the exposure and display u on the monitor. Press the button again to cancel the lock. R REC Press the button to record a movie. Menu functions (Custom menus) MENU c S [Button Function] See the table below for the functions that can be assigned. The options available vary from button to button. 7 EN 99 7 Menu functions (Custom menus) z (Preview) Aperture is stopped down to the selected value while the button is pressed. k (One-touch white balance) The camera measures white balance when the button is pressed (P. 57). P (AF area) Choose the AF target. P Home Pressing the button selects the AF target position saved with [P Set Home] (P. 90). The home AF target position is indicated by a p icon. Press the button again to return to AF target mode. If the camera is turned off when the home position is selected, the home position will be reset. MF Press the button to select manual focus mode. Press the button again to restore the previously selected AF mode. RAWK Press the button to toggle between JPEG and RAW+JPEG record modes. Test Picture Pictures taken while the button is pressed are displayed in the monitor but are not recorded to the memory card. Myset1 – Myset4 Switches among the registered Myset settings when the button is pressed. Press the button again to return. I/H The button can be used to choose between I and H while the underwater case is attached. Press and hold the button to return to the previous mode. If this option is selected, the FL-LM2 will fire even when not raised. When using an ED12-50mmEZ lens with power zoom (E-ZOOM), the lens is automatically zoomed to the WIDE end or TELE end in accordance with I and H switching. Live Guide Press the button to display live guides. b (Digital Teleconverter) Press the button to turn digital zoom on or off. a (Magnify) Press the button to display the zoom frame. Press again to magnify the image. Press and hold the button to turn off the zoom frame. Peaking Each press of the button switches the monitor between display/non-display. When Peaking is displayed, histogram and highlight/shadow display are not available. AF Stop Stop autofocus. j/Y Choose a sequential shooting or self timer option. # Choose a flash mode. HDR Switch to HDR with the saved settings. BKT Turns on BKT shooting using stored settings. Multi Function Press the button to recall the selected multi function*. When switching recalled functions, press the button while turning the dial. G (Touch panel lock) Each time the button is pressed, touch panel operation switches between enabled and disabled. Electric Zoom When using a lens with a power zoom function, after pressing the button, use the arrow pad for zooming operations. * Multi function: b (Highlight&Shadow Control), c (Color Creator), a (Magnify), d (Image Aspect) 100 EN t Lever Function c MENU S [t Lever Function] You can use the positioning of the lever to change the function of the dials and buttons. Table of lever position and functions assigned to dial/buttons Mode Off mode1 mode2 mode3 mode4 When the lever position is set to 2 The lever function is not used. Front dial: ISO Rear dial: White balance Front dial: White balance Rear dial: ISO The R button and Fn2 button functions are based on [RFunction] and [VFunction] settings. R button: ISO Fn2 button: White balance The R button and Fn2 R button: White balance button functions are based on Fn2 button: ISO [RFunction] and [VFunction] settings. The AF modes assigned to the lever positions apply. When the lever position is set to 2, the default setting is [MF]. Viewing camera images on TV Use the separately sold cable with the camera to playback recorded images on your TV. Connect the camera to an HD TV using an HDMI cable to view high-quality images on a TV screen. When connecting devices using an AV cable, first set the camera’s [Video Out] settings (P. 92). HDMI cable (sold separately: CB-HD1) (Connect to the HDMI connector on the TV.) HDMI connector (type D) Type A 2 1 7 Menu functions (Custom menus) mode5 When the lever position is set to 1 The lever function is not used. Dial functions are based on [Dial Function] settings. Dial functions are based on [Dial Function] settings. AV cable (sold separately: CB-AVC3) (Connect to the TV video input jack (yellow) and audio input jack (white).) Multi-connector EN 101 1 Connect the TV and camera and switch to TV input. • The camera monitor turns off when the cable is connected. • Press the q button when connecting via an AV cable. # Cautions • For details on changing the input source of the TV, refer to the TV’s instruction manual. • Depending on the TV’s settings, the displayed images and information may become cropped. • If the camera is connected using both an AV and HDMI cables, it will assign priority to HDMI. • If the camera is connected via an HDMI cable, you will be able to choose the digital video signal type. Choose a format that matches the input format selected with the TV. 7 Menu functions (Custom menus) 102 EN 1080i Priority is given to 1080i HDMI output. 720p Priority is given to 720p HDMI output. 480p/576p 480p/576p HDMI output. 576p is used when [PAL] is selected for [Video Out] (P. 92). • You cannot shoot pictures or movies when the HDMI cable is connected. • Do not connect the camera to other HDMI output devices. Doing so may damage the camera. • HDMI output is not performed while connected via USB to a computer or printer. Using the TV remote control The camera can be operated by a TV remote control when connected to a TV that supports HDMI control. g [HDMI] (P. 92) $ Notes • You can operate the camera by following the operation guide displayed on the TV. • During single-frame playback, you can display or hide the information display by pressing the “Red” button, and display or hide the index display by pressing the “Green” button. • Some televisions may not support all features. Choosing the control panel displays (KControl Settings) Sets whether or not to display control panels for option selection when shooting using live view. When each screen is displayed, the displays can be switched as shown below. How to display control panels 1 Press the u button and select live view shooting mode. u button Wi-Fi S-IS AUTO j ISO-A 200 LN FullHD F 250 F5.6 2 01:02:03 0.0 38 Press the Q button while the control panel is displayed, then press the INFO button to switch the display. Q INFO S-IS AUTO A INFO WB WB WB AUTO AUTO ISO AUTO 4:3 AUTO WB AUTO NORM i LN 4:3 FullHD WB Auto F Live guide 01:02:03 250 F5.6 AUTO AUTO Cancel Live control 1023 LV super control panel (P. 104) INFO Q S-IS AUTO P/A/S/M INFO WB WB WB AUTO AUTO ISO AUTO 4:3 AUTO WB AUTO NORM i LN P 4:3 FullHD WB Auto F AUTO AUTO 250 F5.6 01:02:03 1023 LV super control panel (P. 104) Live control Menu functions (Custom menus) INFO Change Color Saturation 7 INFO Art filter menu Q 1 Pop Art 1 Portrait INFO S-IS AUTO ART/SCN INFO WB WB WB AUTO AUTO ISO AUTO 4:3 AUTO WB AUTO NORM i LN WB Auto AUTO AUTO Scene menu Live control 4:3 FullHD F 250 F5.6 01:02:03 1023 LV super control panel (P. 104) EN 103 LV super control panel This is the super control panel that is used for option setting when shooting using live view. Shooting setting statuses are displayed in a list. Select options using the arrow pad or touch operations to change the settings. 1 6 Recommended ISO ISO AUTO 2 3 7 WB AUTO NORM AUTO 4 5 0 4:3 P 250 F5.6 f e d 8 9 i 0.0 38 c ba Settings that can be modified using super control panel 7 Menu functions (Custom menus) 1 2 3 4 5 6 Currently selected option ISO sensitivity .................................P. 57 Flash mode .....................................P. 50 Flash intensity control .....................P. 71 Sequential shooting/self-timer ........P. 55 White balance .................................P. 56 White balance compensation 7 Picture mode...................................P. 68 8 Sharpness N..................................P. 78 Contrast J .....................................P. 78 Saturation T .................................P. 78 9 0 a b c d e f Gradation z...................................P. 78 B&W Filter x .................................P. 78 Picture tone y ...............................P. 79 Color space.....................................P. 95 Button function assignment ............P. 99 Face priority ....................................P. 53 Metering mode ................................P. 72 Aspect ratio .....................................P. 69 Record mode ..................................P. 70 AF mode .........................................P. 73 AF target .........................................P. 52 Image stabilizer...............................P. 66 # Cautions • Not displayed in movie record mode. 1 Press the Q button when shooting using live view. S-IS AUTO WB WB AUTO AUTO • Live control is displayed. 2 4:3 Press the INFO button to display the LV super control panel. LN P • Each time you press the INFO button, the display switches. 3 Touch the function you wish to set. • The cursor appears over the touch function. 4 FullHD WB Auto F AUTO AUTO Recommended ISO Cursor ISO AUTO WB AUTO NORM AUTO i Press Q to select a settings value. 4:3 01:02:03 250 F5.6 1023 $ Notes • Also available in the ART or SCN menu screens. Touch the icon of the function you wish to select. WB ISO AUTO WB AUTO NORM AUTO i 4:3 250 F5.6 104 EN 01:02:03 1023 Adding information displays (G/Info Settings) LV-Info (Shooting information displays) Use [LV-Info] to add the following shooting information displays. The added displays are displayed by repeatedly pressing the INFO button during shooting. You can also choose to not show displays that appear at the default setting. R Wi-Fi S-IS AUTO ISO-A ISO 200 200 LN LN FullHD P 250 F5.6 01:02:03 0.0 38 Histogram display HD P 250 F5.6 0.0 01:02:03 38 Highlight & Shadow display Highlight & Shadow display Areas above the upper limit of brightness for the image are shown in red, those below the lower limit in blue. g [Histogram Settings] (P. 92) q Info (Playback information displays) Use [q Info] to add the following playback information displays. The added displays are displayed by repeatedly pressing the INFO button during playback. You can also choose to not show displays that appear at the default setting. 2013.10.01 12:30 15 Histogram display Shadow Highlight 15 15 Highlight & Shadow display 16 Light box display Light box display Compare two images side-by-side. Press Q to select the image on the opposite side of the display. • The base image is displayed on the right. Use HI to select an image and press Q to move the image to the left. The image to be compared to the image on the left can be selected on the right. To choose a different base image, highlight the right frame and press Q. • Press Fn1 to zoom in on the current image. To change the zoom ratio, turn the rear dial. When zooming in, you can use FGHI to scroll to other areas of the image, and the front dial to select between images. Fn1 2x Fn1 2x Menu functions (Custom menus) ×10 7 Fn1 2x 53 54 EN 105 G Settings (Index/calendar display) You can add an index display with a different number of frames and calendar display using [G Settings]. The additional screens are displayed by turning the rear dial during playback. p Q p p 2013.10 Sun 2013.10.01 12:30 20 L N 100-0020 2013.10.01 12:30 20 Single-frame playback q 2013.10.01 12:30 4 frames 20 q 2013.10.01 12:30 9–100 frames 20 q Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat 29 30 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 5 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Calendar display Index display Shutter speeds when the flash fires automatically [# X-Sync.] [# Slow Limit] You can set shutter speed conditions for when the flash fires. 7 Shooting mode Flash timing (synchronous) Menu functions (Custom menus) P The slower of 1/(lens focal length×2) and the [# X-Sync.] settings 106 EN A S M Upper limit Lower limit [# Slow Limit] setting [# X-Sync.] setting* The set shutter speed No lower limit * 1/320 sec when using the supplied external flash FL-LM2, and 1/125 sec when using a commercially available specialty flash. AF focus adjustments You can adjust the phase contrast AF focal point in a range of ±20 steps (–: Near distance, +: Far distance). Normally there is no need to change the settings. 1 Select [AF Focus Adj.] using the k tab in the c custom menu and press the Q button. • Select a setting and press I. [OFF]: AF minute adjustments are not performed. [Default Data]: Minute adjustments for all lenses are registered and applied. Adjustments are not applied to individually registered lenses. [Lens Data]: Adjustments are made for each lens; adjustment values for a maximum of 20 lenses can be registered. When [Default Data] is selected 2 Select adjustment values using FG. • Registration is ended when Q is pressed. • Before pressing Q, press the shutter button and confirm the settings by shooting an actual photograph. When [Lens Data] is selected • If data is already registered, [Lens Data] will be displayed. You can confirm or delete information by selecting it using FG and pressing I. 3 Select an AF target to be minutely adjusted and set the adjustment values using FG. • Repeat your AF target selection and input of adjustment values; when finished, press Q. • When using the zoom lens, you can record the adjustment values for each of Far distance and Near distance. • Before pressing Q, press the shutter button and confirm the settings by shooting an actual photograph. 4 Press the MENU button to return to the c custom menu, select [Lens Data] in [AF Focus Adj.] on the k tab, and press Q. % Tips 7 Menu functions (Custom menus) 2 Select [Create Lens Data Set] and press Q. • On the screen displaying the actual photograph shot to confirm the settings, you can check by turning the front dial to zoom in on the image. # Cautions • Depending on the adjustments and the lens, the camera may not be able to focus at far or near distances. EN 107 Using the accessory port menus You can make settings relating to devices connected via the accessory port. Before using the accessory port menus The Accessory Port menu is only available when the appropriate option is selected for the [c/# Menu Display] item in the setup menu. 1 Press the MENU button to display the menus, and display the d (Setup Menu) tab. 2 Select [c/# Menu Display] and set [# Menu Display] to [On]. • The # (Accessory Port Menu) tab will be displayed in the menu. Accessory Port Menu A OLYMPUS PENPAL Share (P. 110) B OLYMPUS PENPAL Album (P. 111) C Electronic Viewfinder (P. 111) 7 Menu functions (Accessory port menus) 108 EN Accessory Port Menu 1 2 OLYMPUS PENPAL Share OLYMPUS PENPAL Album Electronic Viewfinder c # Back Set Using OLYMPUS PENPAL The optional OLYMPUS PENPAL can be used to upload pictures to, and receive pictures from, Bluetooth devices or other cameras connected to an OLYMPUS PENPAL. Visit the OLYMPUS website for more information on Bluetooth devices. Sending images Resize and upload JPEG images to another device. Before sending images, make sure that the receiving device is set to the mode for receiving data. 1 Display the picture you wish to send full frame and press Q. 2 Select [Send A Picture] and press Q. 3 • Select [Search] and press Q in the next dialog. The camera searches for and displays Bluetooth devices in range or in [Address Book]. JPEG < Send A Picture Erase Back Select the destination and press Q. Set Send Picture • The image will be uploaded to the receiving device. • If prompted to provide a PIN code, enter 0000 and press Q. Sending 7 Receiving images/adding a host Connect to the transmitting device and download JPEG images. 1 2 Select [OLYMPUS PENPAL Share] in # Accessory Port Menu (P. 108). Select [Please Wait] and press Q. • Perform operations for sending images on the sending device. • Transmission will start and a [Receive Picture Request] dialog will be displayed. 3 Accessory Port Menu 1 2 OLYMPUS PENPAL Share OLYMPUS PENPAL Album Electronic Viewfinder c # Set Back Select [Accept] and press Q. Receive Picture • The image will be downloaded to the camera. • If prompted to provide a PIN code, enter 0000 and press Q. Receiving Cancel Menu functions (Accessory port menus) Cancel EN 109 Editing the address book The OLYMPUS PENPAL can store host information. You can assign names to hosts or delete host information. 1 Select [OLYMPUS PENPAL Share] in # Accessory Port Menu (P. 108). 2 3 Select [Address Book] and press Q. 1 Select [Address List] and press Q. • The names of existing hosts are listed. 4 A. OLYMPUS PENPAL Share Please Wait Address Book My OLYMPUS PENPAL Picture Send Size Set Back Select the host you wish to edit and press Q. Deleting hosts Select [Yes] and press Q. Editing host information Press Q to display host information. To change the host name, press Q again and edit the current name in the rename dialog. 7 Menu functions (Accessory port menus) 110 EN Creating albums Your favorite JPEG pictures can be resized and copied to an OLYMPUS PENPAL. 1 Display the picture you wish to copy full frame and press Q. 2 Select [z] and press Q. JPEG < Send A Picture Erase • To copy images from an OLYMPUS PENPAL to the memory card, select [y] and press Q. Set Back # Cautions • The OLYMPUS PENPAL can be used only in the region in which it was purchased. Depending on the areas, the usage may infringe the wave regulations and may be subject to its penalty. A OLYMPUS PENPAL Share Option MENU # Description A g Please Wait Receive images and add hosts to the address book. 109 Address Book [Address List]: View the hosts that have been saved to the address book. [New Pairing]: Add a host to the address book. [Search Timer]: Choose how long the camera searches for a host. 110 My OLYMPUS PENPAL Display information for your OLYMPUS PENPAL, including the name, address, and supported services. Press Q to edit the device name. 110 Picture Send Size Choose the size at which images are transmitted. [Size 1: Small]: Images are sent at a size equivalent to 640 × 480. [Size 2: Large]: Images are sent at a size equivalent to 1920 × 1440. [Size 3: Medium]: Images are sent at a size equivalent to 1280 × 960. 109 B OLYMPUS PENPAL Album Option Copy All Reset Protect MENU B # g Description All images and sound files are copied between the SD card and OLYMPUS PENPAL. Copied images are resized according to the option selected for picture copy size. 110 Remove protection from all pictures in the OLYMPUS PENPAL album. 110 Album Mem. Usage Show the number of pictures currently in the album and the number of additional pictures that can be stored at [Size 2: Medium]. 110 Album Mem. Setup [All Erase]: Delete all pictures in the album. [Format Album]: Format the album. 110 Picture Copy Size Choose the size at which images are copied. [Size 1: Large]: Copied images are not resized. [Size 2: Medium]: Images are copied at a size equivalent to 1920 × 1440. 110 C Electronic Viewfinder Option EVF Auto Switch C # g Description Adjust the brightness and the color temperature of optional external viewfinders. The selected color temperature is also used in the monitor during playback. Use HI to select color temperature (j) or brightness (k) and use FG to choose from values between [+7] and [–7]. 7 EVF Adjust j -5 k +2 — Back Set Sets whether to automatically switch the display away from the monitor when using the VF-4 external electronic viewfinder. When set to [Off], pressing the u button on the external viewfinder switches the display between the viewfinder and the monitor. When set to [On], the display automatically switches to VF-4 when you look through it. 134 Menu functions (Accessory port menus) EVF Adjust MENU EN 111 8 Printing pictures Print reservation (DPOF) You can save digital “print orders” to the memory card listing the pictures to be printed and the number of copies of each print. You can then have the pictures printed at a print shop that supports DPOF or print the pictures yourself by connecting the camera directly to a DPOF printer. A memory card is required when creating a print order. Creating a print order 1 2 Press Q during playback and select [<]. Select [<] or [U] and press Q. Individual picture Press HI to select the frame that you want to set as print reservation, then press FG to set the number of prints. • To set print reservation for several pictures, repeat this step. Press Q when all the desired pictures have been selected. 8 Print Order Setting < ALL Back Set Printing pictures All pictures Select [U] and press Q. 3 Select the date and time format and press Q. No The pictures are printed without the date and time. Date The pictures are printed with the shooting date. Time The pictures are printed with the shooting time. 4 X No Date Time Back Set Select [Set] and press Q. # Cautions • The camera cannot be used to modify print orders created with other devices. Creating a new print order deletes any existing print orders created with other devices. • Print orders cannot include 3D photos, RAW images, or movies. Removing all or selected pictures from the print order You can reset all print reservation data or just the data for selected pictures. 1 112 EN Press Q during playback and select [<]. 2 Select [<] and press Q. 3 Press HI to select images you wish to remove from the print order. 4 Select the date and time format and press Q. • To remove all pictures from the print order, select [Reset] and press Q. To exit without removing all pictures, select [Keep] and press Q. • Use G to set the number of prints to 0. Press Q once you have removed all the desired pictures from the print order. • This setting is applied to all frames with print reservation data. 5 Select [Set] and press Q. Direct printing (PictBridge) By connecting the camera to a PictBridge-compatible printer with the USB cable, you can print out recorded pictures directly. 1 Connect the camera to the printer using the supplied USB cable and turn the camera on. 8 Multi-connector Smaller terminal USB port • Use a fully charged battery for printing. • When the camera is turned on, a dialog should be displayed in the monitor prompting you to choose a host. If it is not, select [Auto] for [USB Mode] (P. 93) in the camera custom menus. 2 Use FG to select [Print]. • [One Moment] will be displayed, followed by a printmode selection dialog. • If the screen is not displayed after a few minutes, disconnect the USB cable and start again from Step 1. Printing pictures USB cable USB Storage MTP Print Exit Set Proceed to “Custom printing” (P. 114). # Cautions • 3D photos, RAW images, and movies cannot be printed. EN 113 Easy printing Use the camera to display the picture you wish to print before connecting the printer via the USB cable. 1 Use HI to display the pictures you want to print on the camera. 2 Press I. • The picture selection screen appears when printing is completed. To print another picture, use HI to select the image and press Q. • To exit, unplug the USB cable from the camera while the picture selection screen is displayed. Easy Print Start PC/Custom Print Custom printing 1 Follow the operation guide to set a print option. Selecting the print mode Select the type of printing (print mode). The available print modes are as shown below. 8 Printing pictures 114 EN Print Prints selected pictures. All Print Prints all the pictures stored in the card and makes one print for each picture. Multi Print Prints multiple copies of one image in separate frames on a single sheet. All Index Prints an index of all the pictures stored in the card. Print Order Prints according to the print reservation you made. If there is no picture with print reservation, this is not available. Setting the print paper items This setting varies with the type of printer. If only the printer’s STANDARD setting is available, you cannot change the setting. Size Sets the paper size that the printer supports. Borderless Selects whether the picture is printed on the entire page or inside a blank frame. Pics/Sheet Selects the number of pictures per sheet. Displayed when you have selected [Multi Print]. Selecting pictures you want to print Select pictures you want to print. The selected pictures can be printed later (single-frame reservation) or the picture you are displaying can be printed right away. 123-3456 2013.10.01 12:30 Select Print 15 Single Print More Print (f) Prints the currently displayed picture. If there is a picture that [Single Print] reservation has already been applied to, only that reserved picture will be printed. Single Print (t) Applies print reservation to the currently displayed picture. If you want to apply reservation to other pictures after applying [Single Print], use HI to select them. More (u) Sets the number of prints and other items for the currently displayed picture, and whether or not to print it. For operation, refer to “Setting printing data” in the next section. Setting printing data Select whether to print printing data such as the date and time or file name on the picture when printing. When the print mode is set to [All Print] and [Option Set] is selected, the following options appears. Sets the number of prints. Date Prints the date and time recorded on the picture. File Name Prints the file name recorded on the picture. P Trims the picture for printing. Use the dial to choose the crop size and FGHI to position the crop. Once you have set the pictures for printing and printing data, select [Print], then press Q. • To stop and cancel printing, press Q. To resume printing, select [Continue]. Cancelling printing 8 Printing pictures 2 <× To cancel printing, highlight [Cancel] and press Q. Note that any changes to the print order will be lost; to cancel printing and return to the previous step, where you can make changes to the current print order, press MENU. EN 115 9 Connecting the camera to a computer and a smartphone Installing the PC software Windows 1 Insert the supplied CD in a CD-ROM drive. Windows XP • A “Setup” dialog will be displayed. Windows Vista/Windows 7/Windows 8 • An Autorun dialog will be displayed. Click “OLYMPUS Setup” to display the “Setup” dialog. # Cautions 9 Connecting the camera to a computer and a smartphone 116 EN • If the “Setup” dialog is not displayed, select “My Computer” (Windows XP) or “Computer” (Windows Vista/Windows 7) from the start menu. Double-click the CD-ROM (OLYMPUS Setup) icon to open the “OLYMPUS Setup” window and then double-click “LAUNCHER.EXE”. • If a “User Account Control” dialog is displayed, click “Yes” or “Continue”. 2 Follow the on-screen instructions on your computer. # Cautions • If nothing is displayed on the camera screen even after connecting the camera to the computer, the battery may be exhausted. Use a full-charged battery. Multi-connector Look for this mark. USB cable Smaller terminal USB port # Cautions • When the camera is connected to another device via USB, a message will be displayed prompting you to choose a connection type. Select [Storage]. 3 Register your Olympus product. 4 Install OLYMPUS Viewer 3. • Click the “Registration” button and follow the on-screen instructions. • Check the system requirements before beginning installation. • Click the “OLYMPUS Viewer 3” button and follow the on-screen instructions to install the software. Operating System Windows XP (Service Pack 2 or later) / Windows Vista / Windows 7 / Windows 8 Processor Pentium 4 1.3 GHz or better (Core2Duo 2.13 GHz or better required for movies) RAM 1 GB or more (2 GB or more recommended) Free Hard Drive Space 3 GB or more Monitor Settings 1024 × 768 pixels or more Minimum 65,536 colors (16,770,000 colors recommended) • See online help for information on using the software. Macintosh 1 Insert the supplied CD in a CD-ROM drive. 2 Install OLYMPUS Viewer 3. • Check the system requirements before beginning installation. • Click the “OLYMPUS Viewer 3” button and follow the on-screen instructions to install the software. Operating System Mac OS X v10.5–v10.8 Processor Intel Core Solo/Duo 1.5 GHz or better (Core2Duo 2 GHz or better required for movies) RAM 1 GB or more (2 GB or more recommended) Free Hard Drive Space 3 GB or more Monitor Settings 1024 × 768 pixels or more Minimum 32,000 colors (16,770,000 colors recommended) • Other languages can be selected from the language combo box. For information on using the software, see online help. 9 Connecting the camera to a computer and a smartphone • The disk contents should automatically be displayed in the Finder. If they are not, double-click the CD icon on the desktop. • Double-click the “Setup” icon to display the “Setup” dialog. EN 117 Copying pictures to a computer without OLYMPUS Viewer 3 Your camera supports the USB Mass Storage Class. You can transfer images to a computer by connecting the camera to the computer with the provided USB cable. The following operating systems are compatible with the USB connection: Windows: Macintosh: 1 Windows XP Home Edition/ Windows XP Professional/ Windows Vista/Windows 7/Windows 8 Mac OS X v.10.3 or later Turn the camera off and connect it to the computer. • The location of the USB port varies with the computer. For details, refer to your computer’s manual. 2 Turn on the camera. • The selection screen for the USB connection is displayed. 3 Press FG to select [Storage]. Press Q. USB Storage MTP Print Exit Set 4 9 Connecting the camera to a computer and a smartphone 118 EN The computer recognizes the camera as a new device. # Cautions • If you are using Windows Photo Gallery for Windows Vista, Windows 7 or Windows 8, choose [MTP] in Step 3. • Data transfer is not guaranteed in the following environments, even if your computer is equipped with a USB port. Computers with a USB port added by means of an extension card, etc. Computers without a factory-installed OS Home-built computers • Camera controls cannot be used while the camera is connected to a computer. • If the dialog shown in Step 2 is not displayed when the camera is connected to a computer, select [Auto] for [USB Mode] (P. 93) in the camera custom menus. Using the camera wireless LAN function You can use the camera wireless LAN function to connect to a smartphone over a wireless network. • View and transfer images stored on the camera card. • Add position information to image using the smartphone position information. • Operate the camera using your smartphone. For these operations, a smartphone with the smartphone app installed is necessary. See the Olympus website for details on “OI.Share”, the smartphone app. # Cautions • Before using the wireless LAN function, read “Precautions when using the wireless LAN function” (P. 153). • If using the wireless LAN function in a country outside the region where the camera was purchased, there is a risk that the camera will not conform to the wireless communication regulations of that country. Olympus will not be held responsible for any failure to meet such regulations. • As with any wireless communication, there is always a risk of interception by a third party. • The wireless LAN function on the camera cannot be used to connect to a home or public access point. Preparing your smartphone Install “OI.Share”, the smartphone app, and then start OI.Share on your smartphone. Private Connects using a preset password every time. Use this method when you always connect to the same devices, such as your smartphone to transfer images. One-Time Connects using a different password each time. Use this method for one-time connection, such as when you wish to share selected images among a number of friends. Select the wireless LAN connection method in advance. g “Setting up a wireless LAN connection (Wi-Fi Settings)” (P. 89) Private connection The following procedure can be used to connect. 1 Select [Connection to Smartphone] in the q Playback Menu, and press Q. 2 Follow the operation guide displayed on the monitor, pressing Q to proceed. • The SSID, password and QR code are displayed on the monitor. 3 Enter the SSID and password into your smartphone. • If you use OI.Share on your smartphone to read the QR code, the SSID and password are entered automatically. • From the second time you connect, connection will be performed automatically. • An index of images on the camera is displayed in OI.Share on your smartphone. 9 Connecting the camera to a computer and a smartphone Preparing your camera There are 2 methods for the wireless LAN connection. EN 119 One-time connection 1 Select [Connection to Smartphone] in the q Playback Menu, and press Q. • The SSID, password and QR code are displayed on the monitor. 2 Enter the SSID and password into your smartphone. • If you use OI.Share on your smartphone to read the QR code, the SSID and password are entered automatically. • From the second time you connect, a confirmation message first will be displayed asking if you wish to change your password. To end the connection 1 Press MENU on the camera or touch [Stop] on the monitor screen. • You can also end the connection with OI.Share or by turning off your camera. • The connection ends. # Cautions 9 Connecting the camera to a computer and a smartphone 120 EN • Combination of the wireless LAN function with OLYMPUS PENPAL, an Eye-Fi card, or similar may result in a significant reduction in camera performance. • The wireless LAN antenna is contained in the camera grip. Where possible, avoid covering the antenna with your hands. • During wireless LAN connection, the battery will run down faster. If the battery is running low, the connection may be lost during a transfer. • Connection may be difficult or slow in proximity to devices that generate magnetic fields, static electricity or radio waves, such as near microwaves, cordless telephone. Things you can do with OI.Share Synchronize the time and date on your camera with your smartphone Synchronize the time and date on your smartphone and camera to allow position information to be added to images on your camera. Start time synchronization in OI.Share. • It may take a minute or so for the camera time to synchronize. Adding smartphone position information to images 1 Start position information recording in OI.Share. 2 End the connection. 3 Stop position information recording in OI.Share when position information is no longer required. 4 5 Start [Connection to Smartphone] in your camera. • Your smartphone will log position information at a predetermined interval. • The camera is now ready for shooting. Start sending position information in OI.Share. • The position information will be added to images on the memory card. g is displayed on images to which position information has been added. • Position information cannot be added to movies. Sharing images To share images, set a [Share Order] on the images you wish to share. 1 2 Playback images and set [Share Order] (P. 62). Use [One-Time] to set up a Wi-Fi connection. Operating the camera You can shoot pictures with the camera by performing operations on your smartphone. This function is only available when connected with [Private]. 1 Start [Connection to Smartphone] in your camera. 2 Shoot pictures using your smartphone. • You can also connect by touching w on the shooting screen. • Shooting modes P/A/S/M/A can be used. # Cautions • Log position information is only available when using a smartphone with a GPS function. • Not all camera functions are available over the wireless LAN connection. 9 Connecting the camera to a computer and a smartphone # Cautions EN 121 10 Battery, battery charger, and card Battery and charger • Use the single Olympus lithium-ion battery. Use only genuine OLYMPUS rechargeable batteries. • The camera’s power consumption varies widely with usage and other conditions. • As the following consume a lot of power even without shooting, the battery will be drained quickly. • Performing auto focus repeatedly by pressing the shutter button halfway in shooting mode. • Displaying images on the monitor for a prolonged period. • When connected to a computer or printer. • When using a drained battery, the camera may turn off without the low battery warning being displayed. • The battery will not be fully charged at the time of purchase. Charge the battery using the provided charger before use. • The normal charging time using the provided charger is approximately 3 hours 30 minutes (estimated). • Do not attempt to use chargers not specifically designated for use with the supplied battery, or to use batteries not specifically designated for use with the supplied charger. # Cautions • There is a risk of explosion if the battery is replaced with the incorrect battery type. Dispose of the used battery following the instructions “Battery Handling Precautions” (P. 152). 10 Battery, battery charger, and card 122 EN Using an optional AC adapter The camera can be connected to an optional AC-3 AC adapter via a power battery holder (HLD-7). Other adapters can not be used. The power cable supplied with the AC adapter can not be used with other products. Using your charger abroad • The charger can be used in most home electrical sources within the range of 100 V to 240 V AC (50/60 Hz) around the world. However, depending on the country or area you are in, the AC wall outlet may be shaped differently and the charger may require a plug adapter to match the wall outlet. For details, ask at your local electrical shop or travel agent. • Do not use commercially available travel adapters as the charger may malfunction. Usable cards In this manual, all storage devices are referred to as “cards.” The following types of SD memory card (commercially available) can be used with this camera: SD, SDHC, SDXC, and Eye-Fi. For the latest information, please visit the Olympus website. SD card write protect switch The SD card body has a write protect switch. If you set the switch to the “LOCK” side, you will not be able to write to the card, delete data or format. Return the switch to the unlock position enable writing. LOCK # Cautions • The data in the card will not be erased completely even after formatting the card or deleting the data. When discarding, destroy the card to prevent leakage of personal information. • Use the Eye-Fi card in compliance with the laws and regulations of the country where the camera is used. Remove the Eye-Fi card from the camera or disable the card functions in airplanes and other locations where use is prohibited. g [Eye-Fi] (P. 98) • The Eye-Fi card may become hot during use. • When using an Eye-Fi card, the battery may run out faster. • When using an Eye-Fi card, the camera may function more slowly. 10 Battery, battery charger, and card EN 123 Record mode and file size/number of storable still pictures The file size in the table is approximate for files with a 4:3 aspect ratio. Record Number of pixels mode (Pixel Count) 10 Battery, battery charger, and card 124 EN RAW YSF YF YN YB XSF XF XN XB XSF XF XN XB XSF XF XN XB XSF XF XN XB WSF WF WN WB WSF WF WN WB WSF WF WN WB 4608×3456 3200×2400 2560×1920 1920×1440 1600×1200 1280×960 1024×768 640×480 Compression Loss-less compression 1/2.7 1/4 1/8 1/12 1/2.7 1/4 1/8 1/12 1/2.7 1/4 1/8 1/12 1/2.7 1/4 1/8 1/12 1/2.7 1/4 1/8 1/12 1/2.7 1/4 1/8 1/12 1/2.7 1/4 1/8 1/12 1/2.7 1/4 1/8 1/12 File format File size (MB) ORF Approx. 17 Approx. 11 Approx. 7.5 Approx. 3.5 Approx. 2.4 Approx. 5.6 Approx. 3.4 Approx. 1.7 Approx. 1.2 Approx. 3.2 Approx. 2.2 Approx. 1.1 Approx. 0.8 Approx. 1.8 Approx. 1.3 Approx. 0.7 Approx. 0.5 Approx. 1.3 Approx. 0.9 Approx. 0.5 Approx. 0.4 Approx. 0.9 Approx. 0.6 Approx. 0.4 Approx. 0.3 Approx. 0.6 Approx. 0.4 Approx. 0.3 Approx. 0.2 Approx. 0.3 Approx. 0.2 Approx. 0.2 Approx. 0.1 JPEG Number of storable still pictures* 41 79 114 248 369 155 257 508 753 271 398 782 1151 476 701 1356 1968 678 984 1906 2653 1034 1488 2773 3813 1564 2260 4068 5547 3589 5085 7627 10170 *Assumes a 1GB SD card. # Cautions • The number of storable still pictures may change according to the subject, whether or not print reservations have been made, and other factors. In certain instances, the number of storable still pictures displayed on the monitor will not change even when you take pictures or erase stored images. • The actual file size varies according to the subject. • The maximum number of storable still pictures displayed on the monitor is 9999. • For the available recording time for movies, see the Olympus website. 11 Interchangeable lenses Choose a lens according to the scene and your creative intent. Use lenses designed exclusively for the Micro Four Thirds system and bearing the M.ZUIKO DIGITAL label or the symbol shown at right. With an adapter, you can also use Four Thirds System and OM System lenses. # Cautions • When you attach or remove the body cap and lens from the camera, keep the lens mount on the camera pointed downward. This helps prevent dust and other foreign matter from getting inside the camera. • Do not remove the body cap or attach the lens in dusty places. • Do not point the lens attached to the camera toward the sun. This may cause the camera to malfunction or even ignite due to the magnifying effect of sunlight focusing through the lens. • Be careful not to lose the body cap and rear cap. • Attach the body cap to the camera to prevent dust from getting inside when no lens is attached. M.ZUIKO DIGITAL lens specifications Names of parts 11 Interchangeable lenses 1 Front cap 2 Filter mount thread 3 Focus ring 4 Zoom ring (zoom lenses only) 5 Mount index 6 Rear cap 7 Electrical contacts 8 UNLOCK switch (only retractable lenses) 9 Decoration ring (only some lenses, remove when attaching a lens hood) EN 125 Using power zoom lenses with macro functions (ED12-50mm f3.5-6.3EZ) Lens operation is determined by the position of the zoom ring. MACRO button MACRO Zoom ring + While pressing E-ZOOM (Power Zoom) Rotate the zoom ring for power zoom. Zoom speed is determined by the amount of rotation. M-ZOOM (Manual Zoom) Rotate the zoom ring to zoom in and out. MACRO (Macro Photography) To photography subjects at a range of 0.2 to 0.5 m, press the MACRO button and slide the zoom ring forward. Zoom is not available. • The role of the L-Fn button can be selected in the camera custom menu. MF (manual focus) control (17mm f1.8, ED12mm f2.0 (Snapshot focus), ED12-40mm f2.8PRO) Slide the focus ring in the direction of the arrow to change the focus method. AF/MF MF, Snapshot focus Focus ring 11 Interchangeable lenses 126 EN With snapshot focus, a distance is set using the focus ring based on the shooting distance. The camera focuses over a depth of field corresponding to the set aperture value. • We recommend setting the aperture to F5.6 or above with a 17mm f1.8 or an ED12mm f2.0. • You can shoot at the selected distance irrespective of the AF mode on the camera. • Use the distance scale only as a guide. Cap lens control (BCL-1580) Use the MF lever to open and close the lens barrier, and adjust the focus between infinity and close-up. • There is no data communication between camera and lens. • Some functions of the camera cannot be used. • Set the focal distance to 15 mm for the image stabilization function. MF lever Closing the lens barrier Infinity focus Close focus Distant focus Lens and camera combinations Lens Camera Micro Four Thirds system lens Four Thirds system lens Micro Four Thirds system camera OM System lenses Micro Four Thirds system lens Four Thirds System Camera Attachment AF Metering Yes Yes Yes Attachment possible with mount adapter Yes*1 Yes No Yes*2 No No No *1 When recording movies, you cannot use [C-AF] or [C-AF+TR] in [AF mode]. Also, AF is not operational when recording movies. *2 Accurate metering is not possible. 11 Interchangeable lenses EN 127 Main lens specifications Items ED12-40mm f2.8PRO Mount ED14-150mm f4.0-5.6 Micro Four Thirds mount Focal length 12 – 40 mm 40 – 150 mm 14 – 150 mm f/2.8 f/4.0 – 5.6 f/4.0 – 5.6 84.1° – 30.3° 30.3° – 8.2° 75° – 8.2° Lens configuration 9 groups, 14 lenses 10 groups, 13 lenses 11 groups, 15 lenses Iris control f/2.8 – 22 f/4.0 – 22 f/4.0 – 22 0.2 m – ) 0.9 m – ) 0.5 m – ) Max. aperture Image angle Shooting range (Focal length) Focus adjustment Weight (excluding hood and cap) Dimensions (Max. diameter × length) Filter mount thread diameter Lens hood Items AF/MF, snapshot focus Focal length AF/MF switching 382 g 190 g 260 g l69.9×84 mm l63.5×83 mm l63.5×83 mm 62 mm 58 mm 58 mm Supplied* LH-61D LH-61C ED12-50mm f3.5-6.3EZ 17mm f1.8 BCL-1580 (15mm f8) Mount 11 ED40-150mm f4.0-5.6R Micro Four Thirds mount Interchangeable lenses 12 – 50 mm 17 mm Max. aperture f/3.5 – 6.3 f/1.8 f/8 Image angle 84° – 24° 64° 72° Lens configuration 9 groups, 10 lenses 6 groups, 9 lenses 3 groups, 3 lenses Iris control f/3.5 – 22 f/1.8 – 22 Fixed to f/8 0.35 m – ) 0.2 m – 0.5 m (macro mode) 0.25 m – ) 0.30 m – ) AF/MF switching AF/MF, snapshot focus MF 212 g 120 g 22 g l56×9 mm Shooting range (Focal length) Focus adjustment Weight (excluding hood and cap) Dimensions (Max. diameter × length) 15 mm l57×83 mm l57.5×35.5 mm Filter mount thread diameter 52 mm 46 mm – Lens hood LH-55B LH-48B – * To remove the ED12-40mm lens hood, turn the lens hood while pressing in the buttons on both sides. # Cautions • Edges of pictures may be cut off if more than one filter is used or if a thick filter is used. 128 EN 12 Using separately sold accessories Power Battery Holder (HLD-7) You can extend camera usage time by using the power battery holder with the camera’s battery. You can assign functions to the camera’s custom menu using the dial and Fn button. You can use an AC adaptor (sold separately) via the HLD-7. Be sure to turn off the camera’s power when attaching or removing the power battery holder. Names of parts AC connector cover Camera mount knob Shutter button Vertical operation lock knob Front dial B-Fn2 button B-Fn1 button Inserting the battery Use a BLN-1 battery. After inserting the battery, be sure to lock the battery cover. a 12 a 2 1 Using separately sold accessories Attaching the HLD-7 Remove the PBH cover (a) on the bottom of the camera and attach the HLD-7. Once the HLD-7 is attached, turn the release wheel firmly. Be sure to put the PBH cover on the camera when the HLD-7 is not attached. Rear dial EN 129 Using the AC adaptor When using the AC adaptor, open the AC connector cover and plug in the AC connector. Using the dial and button Set the functions for the HLD-7 dial and B-Fn button using [Button Function] on the camera’s c custom menu. g “Button Function” (P. 99) Main Specifications (HLD-7) Power supply Dimensions Weight Splash resistance (when attached to a camera) Battery: Li-ion Battery BLN-1 ×1 AC power supply: AC adapter AC-3 Approx. 128.5 mm (W) × 48.2 mm (H) × 57.3 mm (D) (5.1” × 1.9” × 2.3”) Approx. 235 g (0.5 lb.) (excluding the battery and connector cap) Type Equivalent to IEC Standard publication 529 IPX1 (under OLYMPUS test conditions) # Cautions 12 Using separately sold accessories 130 EN • Do not use batteries or AC adaptors other than those specified. Doing so may cause an injury or may cause the device to fail or explode. • Do not use your fingernails to turn the release knob. Doing so may cause an injury. • Use the camera only within the guaranteed operation temperature range. • Do not use or store this device in locations with a lot of dust or high humidity. • Do not touch the contact points of this device. • If the main body or contacts become dirty, wipe them with a soft, dry cloth. Do not use a damp cloth or organic solvents such as paint thinner or benzene. External flash units designated for use with this camera With this camera, you can use one of the separately sold external flash units to achieve a flash suited to your needs. The external flashes communicate with the camera, allowing you to control the camera’s flash modes with various available flash control modes, such as TTL-AUTO and Super FP flash. An external flash unit specified for use with this camera can be mounted on the camera by attaching it to the camera’s hot shoe. You can also attach the flash to the flash bracket on the camera using the bracket cable (optional). Refer to the documentation provided with the external flash units as well. The upper limit of the shutter speed is 1/250 sec. when using a flash. Functions available with external flash units Optional flash FL-600R Flash control mode TTL-AUTO, AUTO, MANUAL, FP TTL AUTO, FP MANUAL TTL-AUTO, MANUAL TTL-AUTO, AUTO, MANUAL GN (Guide number) (ISO100) RC mode GN36 (85 mm*) GN20 (24 mm*) FL-300R GN20 (28 mm*) FL-14 GN14 (28 mm*) RF-11 GN11 TTL-AUTO, MANUAL TF-22 GN22 * The focal length of the lens that can be used (Calculated based on 35 mm film camera). – – – Wireless remote control flash photography External flash units that are designated for use with this camera and have a remote control mode can be used for wireless flash photography. The camera can separately control each of three groups of remote flash units, and the supplied external flash. See the instruction manuals provided with the external flash units for details. 1 Set the remote flash units to RC mode and place them as desired. • Turn the external flash units on, press the MODE button, and select RC mode. • Select a channel and group for each external flash unit. 2 Select [On] for [# RC Mode] in X Shooting Menu 2 (P. 76). • The super control panel switches to RC mode. • You can choose the super control panel display by repeatedly pressing the INFO button. • Select a flash mode (note that red-eye reduction is not available in RC mode). 3 Adjust the settings for each group in the super control panel. Adjust settings for the camera flash unit. Flash intensity value Normal flash/Super FP flash • Switch between normal flash and Super FP flash. A Mode TTL M Off TTL P +5.0 1/8 – +3.0 Ch LO 1 250 F5.6 Flash control Flash intensity mode 4 Communication light level • Set the communication light level to [HI], [MID], or [LO]. 38 Channel • Set the communication channel to the same channel used on the flash. Attach the supplied external flash to the camera and raise the flash head. • After confirming that the built-in and remote flash units have charged, take a test shot. 12 Using separately sold accessories Group • Select the flash control mode and adjust the flash intensity separately for each group. For MANUAL, select the flash intensity. EN 131 Wireless flash control range Position the wireless flash units with their remote sensors facing the camera. The following illustration shows the approximate ranges at which the flash units can be positioned. The actual control range varies with local conditions. 30° 60° 30° 7m 50° 100° 50° 5m # Cautions • We recommend using a single group of up to three remote flash units. • Remote flash units cannot be used for second curtain slow synchronization or anti-shock exposures longer than 4 seconds. • If the subject is too close to the camera, the control flashes emitted by the camera flash may affect exposure (this effect can be reduced by reducing the output of the camera flash by, for example, using a diffuser). • The upper limit of flash synchronization timing is 1/250 sec. when using the flash in remote control mode. Other external flash units Use after connecting the synchro cord to the hot shoe or external flash jack. When not using an external flash terminal, be sure to attach the cap. When attaching a third-party flash to the camera’s hot shoe or external flash jack, be careful of the following points. 12 Using separately sold accessories 132 EN Cap • Using obsolete flash units that apply currents of more than about 250 V to the X-contact will damage the camera. • Connecting flash units with signal contacts that do not conform to Olympus specifications may damage the camera. • Set the Shooting mode to M, set the shutter speed to a value no higher than flash synchronous speed, and set ISO sensitivity to a setting other than [AUTO]. • Flash control can only be performed by manually setting the flash to the ISO sensitivity and aperture values selected with the camera. Flash brightness can be adjusted by adjusting either ISO sensitivity or aperture. • Use a flash with an angle of illumination suited to the lens. Angle of illumination is usually expressed using 35-mm format equivalent focal lengths. Principal Accessories Four Thirds lens adapter (MMF–2/MMF–3) The camera requires a Four Thirds lens adapter to attach Four Thirds lenses. Since the AF method differs when using a Micro Four Thirds system lens, the AF operational area is narrower. Remote cable (RM–UC1) Use when the slightest camera movement can result in blurred pictures, for example for macro or bulb photography. The remote cable attaches via the camera multiconnector. Converter lenses Converter lenses attach to the camera lens for quick and easy fish-eye or macro photography. See the OLYMPUS website for information on the lenses that can be used. • Use the appropriate lens attachment for SCN mode (f, w, or m). Macro arm light (MAL–1) Use to illuminate subjects for macro photography, even at ranges at which vignetting would occur with the flash. Microphone set (SEMA–1) The microphone can be placed at a distance from the camera to avoid recording ambient sounds or wind noise. Third-party commercial microphones can also be used depending on your creative intent. We recommend that you use the supplied extension cord. (power supplied via l3.5 mm stereo mini-plug) Eyecup (EP-13) You can exchange this for a larger eyecup. Using separately sold accessories Removing 12 EN 133 System chart Power Supply Viewfinder BLN-1 BCN-1 Li-ion Battery Li-ion Battery Charger HLD-7 AC-3 Power Battery Holder AC adapter EP-13 VF-3/VF-4 Eyecup Electronic View Finder Remote Operation RM-UC1 Remote Cable USB Cable/ Connection Cable AV Cable/ HDMI Cable 12 Using separately sold accessories 134 EN Case / Strap Shoulder Strap Camera Case Underwater System Underwater case Memory Card*4 Accessory port devices OLYMPUS PENPAL PP-1*3 SEMA-1 Communication Unit Microphone Set 1 SD/SDHC/ SDXC/Eye-Fi Software OLYMPUS Viewer MAL-1 MACRO ARM LIGHT Digital Photo Managing Software *1 Not all lenses can be used with adapter. For details, refer to the Olympus Official Web Site. Also, please note that manufacture of OM System Lenses has been discontinued. *2 For compatible lens, refer to the Olympus Official Web Site. : E-M1 compatible products : Commercially available products For the latest information, please visit the Olympus website. Lens Converter Lens*2 M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED 12-50mm f3.5-6.3 EZ M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED 12-40mm f2.8 PRO M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED 12mm f2.0 M.ZUIKO DIGITAL 17mm f1.8 M.ZUIKO DIGITAL 17mm f2.8 M.ZUIKO DIGITAL 45mm f1.8 M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED 75mm f1.8 M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED 60mm f2.8 Macro M.ZUIKO DIGITAL 14-42mm f3.5-5.6 II R M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED 9-18mm f4.0-5.6 M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED 14-150mm f4.0-5.6 M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED 40-150mm f4.0-5.6 R M.ZUIKO DIGITAL 75-300mm f4.8-6.7 II MMF-2/MMF-3 *1 FCON-P01 Fisheye WCON-P01 Wide Four Thirds System Lenses MCON-P01 Four Thirds Adapter Macro OM System Lenses MF-2 *1 OM Adapter 2 Flash 12 FL-600R FL-300R Electronic Flash Electronic Flash Electronic Flash SRF-11 STF-22 Ring Flash Set Twin Flash Set RF-11*2 TF-22 *2 Ring Flash Twin Flash FC-1 Macro Flash Controller *3 The OLYMPUS PENPAL can be used only in the region in which it was purchased. Depending on the areas, the usage may infringe the wave regulations and may be subject to its penalty. *4 Use the Eye-Fi card in compliance with the laws and regulations of the country where the camera is used. Using separately sold accessories FL-14 EN 135 13 Information Shooting tips and information The camera does not turn on even when a battery is loaded The battery is not fully charged • Charge the battery with the charger. The battery is temporarily unable to function because of the cold • Battery performance drops at low temperatures. Remove the battery and warm it by putting it in your pocket for a while. No picture is taken when the shutter button is pressed The camera has turned off automatically • The camera automatically enters sleep mode to reduce the drain on the battery if no operations are performed for a set period of time. g [Sleep] (P. 93) If no operations are performed for a set time (4 hours) after the camera has entered sleep mode, the camera will turn off automatically. The flash is charging • On the monitor, the # mark blinks when charging is in progress. Wait for the blinking to stop, then press the shutter button. Unable to focus • The camera cannot focus on subjects that are too close to the camera or that are not suited to autofocus (the AF confirmation mark will blink in the monitor). Increase the distance to the subject or focus on a high contrast object at the same distance from the camera as your main subject, compose the shot, and shoot. 13 Subjects that are difficult to focus on It may be difficult to focus with auto focus in the following situations. Information AF confirmation mark is blinking. These subjects are not focused. Subject with low contrast Excessively bright light in center of frame Subject containing no vertical lines Subjects at different distances Fast-moving subject Subject not inside AF area AF confirmation mark lights up but the subject is not focused. 136 EN Noise reduction is activated • When shooting night scenes, shutter speeds are slower and noise tends to appear in images. The camera activates the noise-reduction process after shooting at slow shutter speeds. During which, shooting is not allowed. You can set [Noise Reduct.] to [Off]. g [Noise Reduct.] (P. 93) The number of AF targets is reduced The number and size of AF targets varies with aspect ratio, group target settings, and the option selected for [Digital Tele-converter]. When using a Four Thirds system lens, there are 37 targets. The date and time has not been set The camera is used with the settings at the time of purchase • The date and time of the camera is not set when purchased. Set the date and time before using the camera. g “Setting the date/time” (P. 17) The battery has been removed from the camera • The date and time settings will be returned to the factory default settings if the camera is left without the battery for approximately 1 day. The settings will be cancelled more quickly if the battery was only loaded in the camera for a short time before being removed. Before taking important pictures, check that the date and time settings are correct. Set functions are restored to their factory default settings When you rotate the mode dial or turn off the power in a shooting mode other than P, A, S, or M, functions with changes made to their settings are restored to the factory default settings. Image taken appears whitish This may occur when the picture is taken in backlight or semi-backlight conditions. This is due to a phenomenon called flare or ghosting. As far as possible, consider a composition where strong light source is not taken in the picture. Flare may occur even when a light source is not present in the picture. Use a lens hood to shade the lens from the light source. If a lens hood does not have effect, use your hand to shade the lens from the light. g “Interchangeable lenses” (P. 125) This may be due to stuck pixel(s) on the image pickup device. Perform [Pixel Mapping]. If the problem persists, repeat pixel mapping a few times. g “Pixel Mapping - Checking the image processing functions” (P. 141) Functions that cannot be selected from menus Information Unknown bright dot(s) appear on the subject in the picture taken 13 Some items may not be selectable from the menus when using the arrow pad. • Items that cannot be set with the current shooting mode. • Items that cannot be set because of an item that has already been set: Combination of [T] and [Noise Reduct.], etc. EN 137 Error codes Monitor indication Possible cause Corrective action The card is not inserted, or it cannot be recognized. Insert a card or insert a different card. There is a problem with the card. Insert the card again. If the problem persists, format the card. If the card cannot be formatted, it cannot be used. Writing to the card is prohibited. The card write-protect switch is set to the “LOCK” side. Release the switch. (P. 123) • The card is full. No more pictures can be taken or no more information such as print reservation can be recorded. • There is no space in the card and print reservation or new images cannot be recorded. Replace the card or erase unwanted pictures. Before erasing, download important images to a PC. Card cannot be read. Card may not have been formatted. • Select [Clean Card], press Q and turn off the camera. Remove the card and wipe dry the metallic surface with a soft, dry cloth. • Select [Format][Yes], and then press Q to format the card. Formatting the card erases all data on the card. There are no pictures on the card. The card contains no pictures. Record pictures and play back. The selected picture cannot be displayed for playback due to a problem with this picture. Or the picture cannot be used for playback on this camera. Use image processing software to view the picture on a PC. If that cannot be done, the image file is damaged. No Card Card Error Write Protect Card Full Card Setup Clean the contact area of the card with a dry cloth. Clean Card Format Set 13 No Picture Information Picture Error Pictures taken with another camera cannot be edited on this The Image Cannot camera. Be Edited Picture Error 138 EN Images cannot be transferred between devices that are currently receiving or transmitting data. Use image processing software to edit the picture. Increase the amount of memory available on the card, for example by deleting unwanted images, or choose a smaller size for the images being transmitted. Monitor indication Possible cause Corrective action Turn off the camera and wait for the internal temperature to cool. m The internal temperature of the camera has risen due to sequential shooting. Wait a moment for the camera to turn off automatically. Allow the internal temperature of the camera to cool before resuming operations. The battery is drained. Charge the battery. The camera is not correctly connected to a computer, printer, HDMI display, or other device. Reconnect the camera. There is no paper in the printer. Load some paper in the printer. The printer has run out of ink. Replace the ink cartridge in the printer. The paper is jammed. Remove the jammed paper. The printer’s paper cassette has been removed or the printer has been manipulated while making settings on the camera. Do not manipulate the printer while making settings on the camera. There is a problem with the printer and/or camera. Turn off camera and printer. Check the printer and remedy any problems before turning the power on again. Pictures recorded on other cameras may not be printed on this camera. Use a personal computer to print. The lens is locked. Please extend the lens. The lens of the retractable lens stays retracted. Extend the lens. (P. 14) Please check the status of a lens. An abnormality has occurred between the camera and the lens. Turn off the camera, check the connection with the lens, and turn the power on again. Internal camera temperature is too high. Please wait for cooling before camera use. Battery Empty No Connection No Paper No Ink Jammed Settings Changed Cannot Print Information Print Error 13 EN 139 Cleaning and storing the camera Cleaning the camera Turn off the camera and remove the battery before cleaning the camera. Exterior: • Wipe gently with a soft cloth. If the camera is very dirty, soak the cloth in mild soapy water and wring well. Wipe the camera with the damp cloth and then dry it with a dry cloth. If you have used the camera at the beach, use a cloth soaked in clean water and well wrung. Monitor: • Wipe gently with a soft cloth. Lens: • Blow dust off the lens with a commercially available blower. For the lens, wipe gently with a lens cleaning paper. Storage • When not using the camera for a prolonged period, remove the battery and card. Store the camera in a cool, dry place that is well ventilated. • Insert the battery periodically and test the camera’s functions. • Remove dust and other foreign matter from the body and rear caps before attaching them. • Attach the body cap to the camera to prevent dust from getting inside when no lens is attached. Be sure to replace the front and rear lens caps before putting the lens away. • Clean the camera after use. • Do not store with insect repellent. Cleaning and checking the image pickup device 13 Information 140 EN This camera incorporates a dust reduction function to keep dust from getting on the image pickup device and to remove any dust or dirt from the image pickup device surface with ultrasonic vibrations. The dust reduction function operates when the camera is turned on. The dust reduction function operates at the same time as the pixel mapping, which checks the image pickup device and image processing circuitry. Since dust reduction is activated every time the camera’s power is turned on, the camera should be held upright for the dust reduction function to be effective. # Cautions • Do not use strong solvents such as benzene or alcohol, or a chemically treated cloth. • Avoid storing the camera in places where chemicals are treated, in order to protect the camera from corrosion. • Mold may form on the lens surface if the lens is left dirty. • Check each part of the camera before use if it has not been used for a long time. Before taking important pictures, be sure to take a test shot and check that the camera works properly. Pixel Mapping - Checking the image processing functions The pixel mapping feature allows the camera to check and adjust the image pickup device and image processing functions. After using the monitor or taking continuous shots, wait for at least one minute before using the pixel mapping function to ensure that it operates correctly. 1 2 Select [Pixel Mapping] in c Custom Menu (P. 98) tab k. Press I, then press Q. • The [Busy] bar is displayed when pixel mapping is in progress. When pixel mapping is finished, the menu is restored. # Cautions • If you accidentally turn the camera off during pixel mapping, start again from Step 1. 13 Information EN 141 Menu directory *1: Can be added to [Myset]. *2: Default can be restored by selecting [Full] for [Reset]. *3: Default can be restored by selecting [Basic] for [Reset]. K Shooting Menu Tab W Function Card Setup Reset/Myset Picture Mode K X Still Picture Movie Image Aspect Digital Tele-converter j/Y Image Stabilizer Still Picture Movie Bracketing AE BKT A– B WB BKT G–M FL BKT ISO BKT ART BKT HDR Multiple Exposure Frame Auto Gain Overlay Time Lapse Settings Frame Start Waiting Time Interval Time Time Lapse Movie 13 Information 142 EN # RC Mode Default ― ― jNatural YN X 4:3 Off o S-I.S. Auto M-I.S. On Off 3f 1.0EV ― *1 *2 *3 g 76 77 68 70 69 84 55 80 ― ― ― Off Off Off Off Off 99 00:00:01 00:00:01 Off Off 66 81 81 81 81 59 82 83 131 q Playback Menu Tab q m Function Start BGM Slide Slide Interval Movie Interval Default ― Joy All 3 sec Short On R Edit Sel. Image Image Overlay Print Order Reset Protect Connection to Smartphone *1 RAW Data Edit JPEG Edit R *2 *3 g 65 85 85 86 87 87 112 87 87 *2 *3 g 17 88 ― ― ― ― ― ― ― d Setup Menu Tab d Function X W* i Rec View Default ― ― j ±0, k ±0, Natural 0.5 sec *1 Wi-Fi Connect Private Settings Private Password ― Wi-Fi Settings Reset share ― Order Reset Wi-Fi ― Settings c Menu Display On c/# Menu Display # Menu Display Off Firmware ― 88 88 88 88 88 13 Information * Settings differ depending on the region where the camera is purchased. EN 143 c Custom Menu Tab c R AF/MF Function AF Mode Still Picture Movie Full-time AF AEL/AFL Reset Lens BULB/TIME Focusing Focus Ring Magnify MF Assist Peaking P Set Home AF Illuminat. I Face Priority AF Area Pointer C-AF Lock S Button/Dial/Lever UFunction VFunction RFunction tFunction YFunction ZFunction Button Function 13 Information Dial Function Default S-AF C-AF Off S-AF C-AF MF On On b Off Off o On K On Off j/Y* P 90 91 AEL/AFL P AF Stop Ps/F FNo./F Shutter/F Shutter/FNo. FG/HI Prev/Next/G/U Exposure Dial1 Ps Dial1 Off mode1 On * When [nFunction] is set to [Direct Function] 144 EN g RREC AEL/AFL k z GFunction Dial Direction *3 P #* Mode Dial Function t Lever Function u+v *2 Multi Function IFunction nFunction mFunction nFunction lFunction P A S M Menu q mode1 mode2 mode1 *1 91 Default Off On 6 fps 10 fps On On Off Normal *1 *2 *3 1080i Off ― Live Guide Live Control Art Menu Scene Menu Image Only, Overall Image Only, u, Level Gauge O, Calendar Off All On 255 0 On Off Normal mode1 On Auto mode2 White Hold 1 min 4h On Auto g 91 92 92 13 93 Information Tab Function c T Release/j Rls Priority S Rls Priority C j L fps j H fps j + IS Off Half Way Rls With IS Lens I.S. Priority Release Lag-Time U Disp/8/PC HDMI Out HDMI HDMI Control Video Out iAUTO KControl P/A/S/M Settings ART SCN q Info G/Info LV-Info Settings G Settings Displayed Grid Picture Mode Settings Histogram Highlight Settings Shadow Mode Guide Live View Boost Frame Rate Art LV Mode Expand LV Dyn. Range Flicker reduction LV Close Up Mode Peaking Settings Backlit LCD Sleep Auto Power Off 8 USB Mode EN 145 Tab Function c V Exp/p/ISO EV Step Noise Reduct. Noise Filter ISO ISO Step ISO-Auto Set ISO-Auto Metering AEL Metering BULB/TIME Timer BULB/TIME Monitor Live BULB Live TIME Anti-Shock z W # Custom # X-Sync. # Slow Limit w+F X K/Color/WB K Set 13 Information 146 EN Xiddle Pixel Count Wmall Shading Comp. WB All Set All > All Reset W Keep Warm Color #+WB Color Space Y Record/Erase Quick Erase RAW+JPEG Erase File Name Edit Filename Priority Set dpi Settings Copyright Info. Copyright Artist Name Settings Copyright Name Default *1 *2 *3 1/3EV Auto Standard Auto 1/3EV High Limit: 1600 Default: 200 P/A/S p Auto 8 min -7 Off 0.5 sec Off 1/320 1/60 Off K1 YF, K2 YN, K3 XN, K4 WN 2560×1920 1280×960 Off Auto On WB Auto sRGB Off RAW+JPEG Reset Off No 350dpi Off — — 93 94 A : 0, G : 0 — — g 94 95 96 Tab Function c Z Movie nMode Movie R Movie Effect Wind Noise Reduction Recording Volume b Built-In EVF Built-in EVF Style V Info Settings V Displayed Grid EVF Auto Switch EVF Auto EVF Adjust Luminance V Half Way Level k K Utility Pixel Mapping p Exposure J Shift 5 AF Focus Adj. : Warning Level : Battery Priority Level Adjust Touch Screen Settings Eye-Fi Default P On On Off Built-In R External R Line-In R *1 Standard Standard Standard Style 3 u, Level Gauge, Basic Information Off On On *2 *3 g 97 On 97 — ±0 Off ±0 PBH Battery 98 — On On # Accessory Port Menu Picture Send Size B OLYMPUS PENPAL Album Copy All Reset Protect Album Mem. Usage Album Mem. Setup Picture Copy Size C Electronic Viewfinder EVF Adjust EVF Auto Switch Default *1 *2 g 109, 110 — — 30 sec *3 — — Size 1: Small 110 13 Information Tab Function # A OLYMPUS PENPAL Share Please Wait Address List Address Search Timer Book New Pairing My OLYMPUS PENPAL — — — — Size 2: Medium j ±0, k ±0 On 111 111 EN 147 Specifications Camera Product type Product type Lens Lens mount Equivalent focal length on a 35 mm film camera Image pickup device Product type No. of total pixels No. of effective pixels Screen size Aspect ratio Viewfinder Type No. of pixels Magnification Eye point Live view Sensor Field of view Monitor Product type Total no. of pixels 13 Information 148 EN Shutter Product type Shutter Auto focus Product type Focusing points Selection of focusing point Exposure control Metering system Metered range Shooting modes ISO sensitivity Exposure compensation White balance Product type Mode setting Digital camera with interchangeable Micro Four Thirds Standard lens system M.Zuiko Digital, Micro Four Thirds System Lens Micro Four Thirds mount Approx. twice the focal length of the lens 4/3" Live MOS sensor Approx. 17,200,000 pixels Approx. 16,280,000 pixels 17.3 mm (H) × 13.0 mm (V) 1.33 (4:3) Electronic viewfinder with eye sensor 2,360,000 pixels 100% Approx. 21.0 mm (–1 m-1) Uses Live MOS sensor 100% 3.0" TFT color LCD, Vari-angle, touch screen Approx. 1,040,000 dots (aspect ratio 3 : 2) Computerized focal-plane shutter 1/8000 - 60 sec., bulb photography, time photography Hi-Speed Imager AF 81 points Auto, Optional TTL metering system (imager metering) Digital ESP metering/Center weighted averaging metering/Spot metering EV –2 - 20 (Equivalent to M.ZUIKO DIGITAL 17mm f2.8, ISO100) A: iAUTO/P: Program AE (Program shift can be performed)/ A: Aperture priority AE/S: Shutter priority AE/M: Manual/ J: PHOTO STORY/ART: Art filter/SCN: Scene/n: Movie LOW, 200 - 25600 (1/3, 1 EV step) ±5 EV (1/3, 1/2, 1 EV step) Image pickup device Auto/Preset WB (7 settings)/Customized WB/One-touch WB Recording Memory Recording system Applicable standards Sound with still pictures Movie Audio Playback Display format Drive Drive mode Sequential shooting Self-timer Energy saving function SD, SDHC, SDXC and Eye-Fi UHS-I compatible Digital recording, JPEG (in accordance with Design rule for Camera File system (DCF)), RAW Data, MP format Exif 2.3, Digital Print Order Format (DPOF), PRINT Image Matching III, PictBridge Wave format MPEG-4 AVC/H.264 / Motion JPEG Stereo, PCM 48kHz Single-frame playback/Close-up playback/Index display/Calendar display Single-frame shooting/Sequential shooting/Self-timer Up to 10 fps (T) Operation time: 12 sec./2 sec./Customized Switch to sleep mode: 1 minute, Power OFF: 4 hours (This function can be customized.) External flash Flash control mode TTL-AUTO (TTL pre-flash mode)/MANUAL Sync speed 1/320 s or slower (FL-LM2) Wireless LAN Compatible standard IEEE 802.11b/g/n External connector Multi-connector (USB connector, AV connector)/HDMI micro-connector (type D)/ Accessory port/ External flash connector/Microphone connector Power supply Battery Li-ion Battery ×1 Dimensions/weight Dimensions 130.4 mm (W) × 93.5 mm (H) × 63.1 mm (D) (5.1" × 3.7" × 2.5") (excluding protrusions) Weight Approx. 497 g (0.9 lb.) (including battery and memory card) Operating environment Temperature –10 °C - 40 °C (14 °F - 104 °F) (operation)/–20 °C - 60 °C (–4 °F - 140 °F) (storage) Humidity 30% - 90% (operation)/10% - 90% (storage) Splash resistance Type Equivalent to IEC Standard publication 529 IPX1 (under OLYMPUS test conditions) Information HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC. 13 EN 149 FL-LM2 Guide number Firing angle 7 (ISO100), 10 (ISO200) Covers the angle of view of a 14 mm lens (28 mm in 35 mm format) Dimensions Weight Splash resistance Approx. 44.3 mm (W) × 33.5 mm (H) × 52.5 mm (D) (1.7" × 1.3" × 2.1") Approx. 31 g (0.07 Ib.) Type Equivalent to IEC Standard publication 529 IPX1 (under OLYMPUS test conditions) Lithium ion battery MODEL NO. Product type Nominal voltage Nominal capacity No. of charge and discharge times Ambient temperature Dimensions Weight BLN-1 Rechargeable Lithium ion battery DC 7.6 V 1220 mAh Approx. 500 times (varies with usage conditions) 0 °C - 40 °C (32 °F - 104 °F) (charging) Approx. 36.0 mm (W) × 15.4 mm (H) × 50.2 mm (D) (1.4" × 0.6" × 2.0") Approx. 52 g (0.1 Ib.) Lithium ion charger MODEL NO. Rated input Rated output Charging time Ambient temperature Dimensions Weight (without AC cable) BCN-1 AC 100 V - 240 V (50/60 Hz) DC 8.7 V, 600 mA Approx. 4 hours (room temperature) 0 °C - 40 °C (32 °F - 104 °F) (operation)/ –20 °C - 60 °C (–4 °F - 140 °F) (storage) Approx. 67 mm (W) × 26 mm (H) × 95.5 mm (D) (2.6" × 1.0" × 3.8") Approx. 77 g (0.2 Ib.) • The AC cable supplied with this device is for use only with this device and should not be used with other devices. Do not use cables for other devices with this device. 13 Information 150 EN SPECIFICATIONS ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT ANY NOTICE OR OBLIGATION ON THE PART OF THE MANUFACTURER. 14 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS SAFETY PRECAUTIONS CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED OLYMPUS SERVICE PERSONNEL. An exclamation mark enclosed in a triangle alerts you to important operating and maintenance instructions in the documentation provided with the product. DANGER If the product is used without observing the information given under this symbol, serious injury or death may result. WARNING If the product is used without observing the information given under this symbol, injury or death may result. CAUTION If the product is used without observing the information given under this symbol, minor personal injury, damage to the equipment, or loss of valuable data may result. WARNING! TO AVOID THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRICAL SHOCK, NEVER DISASSEMBLE, EXPOSE THIS PRODUCT TO WATER OR OPERATE IN A HIGH HUMIDITY ENVIRONMENT. General Precautions Foreign Objects — To avoid personal injury, never insert a metal object into the product. Heat — Never use or store this product near any heat source such as a radiator, heat register, stove, or any type of equipment or appliance that generates heat, including stereo amplifiers. Product Handling Precautions WARNING • Do not use the camera near flammable or explosive gases. • Do not use the flash and LED on people (infants, small children, etc.) at close range. You must be at least 1 m (3 ft.) away from the faces of your subjects. Firing the flash too close to the subject’s eyes could cause a momentary loss of vision. 14 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Read All Instructions — Before you use the product, read all operating instructions. Save all manuals and documentation for future reference. Cleaning — Always unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning. Use only a damp cloth for cleaning. Never use any type of liquid or aerosol cleaner, or any type of organic solvent to clean this product. Attachments — For your safety, and to avoid damaging the product, use only accessories recommended by Olympus. Water and Moisture — For precautions on products with weatherproof designs, read the weatherproofing sections. Location — To avoid damage to the product, mount the product securely on a stable tripod, stand, or bracket. Power Source — Connect this product only to the power source described on the product label. EN 151 • Keep young children, infants, and animals such as pets away from the camera. Always use and store the camera out of the reach of young children and infants to prevent the following dangerous situations which could cause serious injury: • Becoming entangled in the camera strap, causing strangulation. • Accidentally swallowing the battery, cards or other small parts. • Accidentally firing the flash into their own eyes or those of another child. • Accidentally being injured by the moving parts of the camera. • Do not look at the sun or strong lights with the camera. • Do not use or store the camera in dusty or humid places. • Do not cover the flash with a hand while firing. CAUTION 14 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 152 EN • Stop using the camera immediately if you notice any unusual odors, noise, or smoke around it. Never remove the batteries with bare hands, which may cause a fire or burn your hands. • Never hold or operate the camera with wet hands. • Do not leave the camera in places where it may be subject to extremely high temperatures. Doing so may cause parts to deteriorate and, in some circumstances, cause the camera to catch fire. Do not use the charger if it is covered (such as a blanket). This could cause overheating, resulting in fire. • Handle the camera with care to avoid getting a low-temperature burn. When the camera contains metal parts, overheating can result in a low-temperature burn. Pay attention to the following: • When used for a long period, the camera will get hot. If you hold on to the camera in this state, a low temperature burn may be caused. • In places subject to extremely cold temperatures, the temperature of the camera’s body may be lower than the environmental temperature. If possible, wear gloves when handling the camera in cold temperatures. • Be careful with the strap. Be careful with the strap when you carry the camera. It could easily catch on stray objects - and cause serious damage. Battery Handling Precautions Follow these important guidelines to prevent batteries from leaking, overheating, burning, exploding, or causing electrical shocks or burns. DANGER • The camera uses a lithium ion battery specified by Olympus. Charge the battery with the specified charger. Do not use any other chargers. • Never heat or incinerate batteries. • Take precautions when carrying or storing batteries to prevent them from coming into contact with any metal objects such as jewelry, pins, fasteners, etc. • Never store batteries where they will be exposed to direct sunlight, or subjected to high temperatures in a hot vehicle, near a heat source, etc. • To prevent causing battery leaks or damaging their terminals, carefully follow all instructions regarding the use of batteries. Never attempt to disassemble a battery or modify it in any way, by soldering, etc. • If battery fluid gets into your eyes, flush your eyes immediately with clear, cold running water and seek medical attention immediately. • Always store batteries out of the reach of small children. If a child accidentally swallows a battery, seek medical attention immediately. • Should you notice that the charger is emitting smoke, heat, or an unusual noise or smell, immediately cease use and unplug the charger from the power outlet, and then contact an authorized distributor or service center. WARNING • Keep batteries dry at all times. • To prevent batteries from leaking, overheating, or causing a fire or explosion, use only batteries recommended for use with this product. • Insert the battery carefully as described in the operating instructions. • If rechargeable batteries have not been recharged within the specified time, stop charging them and do not use them. • Do not use a battery if it is cracked or broken. • If a battery leaks, becomes discolored or deformed, or becomes abnormal in any other way during operation, stop using the camera. • If a battery leaks fluid onto your clothing or skin, remove the clothing and flush the affected area with clean, running cold water immediately. If the fluid burns your skin, seek medical attention immediately. • Never subject batteries to strong shocks or continuous vibration. CAUTION • Before loading, always inspect the battery carefully for leaks, discoloration, warping, or any other abnormality. • The battery may become hot during prolonged use. To avoid minor burns, do not remove it immediately after using the camera. • Always unload the battery from the camera before storing the camera for a long period. • This camera uses a lithium ion battery specified by Olympus. Do not use any other type of battery. For safe and proper use, read the battery's instruction manual carefully before using it. • If the battery's terminals get wet or greasy, camera contact failure may result. Wipe the battery well with a dry cloth before use. • Always charge a battery when using it for the first time, or if it has not been used for a long period. • When operating the camera with battery power at low temperatures, try to keep the camera and spare battery as warm as possible. A battery that has run down at low temperatures may be restored after it is warmed at room temperature. • The number of pictures you can take may vary depending on the shooting conditions or battery. • Before going on a long trip, and especially before traveling abroad, purchase extra batteries. A recommended battery may be difficult to obtain while traveling. • When the camera will not be used for an extended period, store it in a cool place. • Please recycle batteries to help save our planet’s resources. When you throw away dead batteries, be sure to cover their terminals and always observe local laws and regulations. WARNING • Turn off the camera in hospitals and other locations where medical equipment is present. The radio waves from the camera may adversely affect medical equipment, causing a malfunction that results in an accident. • Turn off the camera when onboard aircraft. Using wireless devices onboard may hinder safe operation of the aircraft. • To protect the high-precision technology contained in this product, never leave the camera in the places listed below, no matter if in use or storage: • Places where temperatures and/or humidity are high or go through extreme changes. Direct sunlight, beaches, locked cars, or near other heat sources (stove, radiator, etc.) or humidifiers. • In sandy or dusty environments. • Near flammable items or explosives. • In wet places, such as bathrooms or in the rain. When using products with weatherproof designs, read their manuals as well. • In places prone to strong vibrations. • Never drop the camera or subject it to severe shocks or vibrations. • When mounted on a tripod, adjust the position of the camera with the tripod head. Do not twist the camera. • Do not leave the camera pointed directly at the sun. This may cause lens or shutter curtain damage, color failure, ghosting on the image pickup device, or may possibly cause fires. • Do not touch electric contacts on cameras and interchangeable lenses. Remember to attach the body cap when removing the lens. • Before storing the camera for a long period, remove the battery. Select a cool, dry location for storage to prevent condensation or mold from forming inside the camera. After storage, test the camera by turning it on and pressing the shutter release button to make sure that it is operating normally. • The camera may malfunction if it is used in a location where it is subject to a magnetic/ electromagnetic field, radio waves, or high voltage, such as near a TV set, microwave, video game, loud speakers, large monitor unit, TV/radio tower, or transmission towers. In such cases, turn the camera off and on again before further operation. • Always observe the operating environment restrictions described in the camera’s manual. • Do not directly touch or wipe the image pickup device of the camera. 14 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Precautions when using the wireless LAN function Caution for Usage Environment EN 153 Monitor The display on the rear of the camera is an LCD monitor. • In the unlikely event that the monitor breaks, do not put the liquid crystal in your mouth. Any of the material adhering to your hands, feet, or clothing should be rinsed off immediately. • A strip of light may appear on the top/bottom of the monitor, but this is not a malfunction. • When a subject is viewed diagonally in the camera, the edges may appear zigzagged on the monitor. This is not a malfunction; it will be less noticeable in playback mode. • In places subject to low temperatures, the monitor may take a long time to turn on or its color may change temporarily. When using the camera in extremely cold places, it is a good idea to occasionally place it in a warm place. An monitor exhibiting poor performance due to low temperatures will recover in normal temperatures. • The monitor is made with high-precision technology. However, black spots or bright spots of light may appear constantly on the monitor. Due to its characteristics or the angle at which you are viewing the monitor, the spot may not be uniform in color and brightness. This is not a malfunction. Lens • • • • • • 14 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 154 EN Do not immerse in water or splash with water. Do not drop or exert strong force on the lens. Do not hold at the moving part of the lens. Do not touch the lens surface directly. Do not touch the contact points directly. Do not subject to abrupt temperature changes. Legal and Other Notices • Olympus makes no representations or warranties regarding any damages, or benefit expected by using this unit lawfully, or any request from a third person, which are caused by the inappropriate use of this product. • Olympus makes no representations or warranties regarding any damages or any benefit expected by using this unit lawfully which are caused by erasing picture data. Disclaimer of Warranty • Olympus makes no representations or warranties, either expressed or implied, by or concerning any content of these written materials or software, and in no event shall be liable for any implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for any particular purpose or for any consequential, incidental or indirect damages (including but not limited to damages for loss of business profits, business interruption and loss of business information) arising from the use or inability to use these written materials or software or equipment. Some countries do not allow the exclusion or limitation of liability for consequential or incidental damages, so the above limitations may not apply to you. • Olympus reserves all rights to this manual. Warning Unauthorized photographing or use of copyrighted material may violate applicable copyright laws. Olympus assumes no responsibility for unauthorized photographing, use or other acts that infringe upon the rights of copyright owners. Copyright Notice All rights reserved. No part of these written materials or this software may be reproduced or used in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying and recording or the use of any type of information storage and retrieval system, without the prior written permission of Olympus. No liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained in these written materials or software, or for damages resulting from the use of the information contained therein. Olympus reserves the right to alter the features and contents of this publication or software without obligation or advance notice. FCC Notice FCC Caution This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: • Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. • Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. • Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. • Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/ TV technician for help. • Only the OLYMPUS-supplied USB cable should be used to connect the camera to USB enabled personal computers. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. This equipment complies with FCC/IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65 and RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency (RF) Exposure rules. This equipment has very low levels of RF energy that are deemed to comply without testing of specific absorption ratio (SAR). Use Only Dedicated Rechargeable Battery and Battery Charger We strongly recommend that you use only the genuine Olympus dedicated rechargeable battery and battery charger with this camera. Using a non-genuine rechargeable battery and/ or battery charger may result in fire or personal injury due to leakage, heating, ignition or damage to the battery. Olympus does not assume any liability for accidents or damage that may result from the use of a battery and/or battery charger that are not genuine Olympus accessories. 14 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS EN 155 For customers in North and South America For customers in USA Declaration of Conformity Model Number : E-M1 Trade Name : OLYMPUS Responsible Party : Address : 3500 Corporate Parkway, P. O. Box 610, Center Valley, PA 18034-0610, USA Telephone Number : 484-896-5000 Tested To Comply With FCC Standards FOR HOME OR OFFICE USE This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules and Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference. (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. For customers in Canada This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. CAN ICES-3(B) 14 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 156 EN OLYMPUS WORLDWIDE LIMITED WARRANTY - IMAGING PRODUCTS Olympus warrants that the enclosed Olympus® imaging product(s) and related Olympus® accessories (individually a “Product” and collectively the “Products”) will be free from defects in materials and workmanship under normal use and service for a period of one (1) year from the date of purchase. If any Product proves to be defective within the one-year warranty period, the customer must return the defective Product to any of Olympus Service Centers, following the procedure set forth below (See “WHAT TO DO WHEN SERVICE IS NEEDED”). Olympus, at its sole discretion, will repair, replace, or adjust the defective Product, provided that Olympus investigation and factory inspection disclose that (a) such defect developed under normal and proper use and (b) the Product is covered under this limited warranty. Repair, replacement, or adjustment of defective Products shall be Olympus’s sole obligation and the customer’s sole remedy hereunder. The customer is liable and shall pay for shipment of the Products to the Olympus Service Center. Olympus shall not be obligated to perform preventive maintenance, installation, deinstallation, or maintenance. Olympus reserves the right to (i) use reconditioned, refurbished, and/or serviceable used parts (that meet Olympus’s quality assurance standards) for warranty or any other repairs and (ii) make any internal or external design and/or feature changes on or to its products without any liability to incorporate such changes on or to the Products. WHAT IS NOT COVERED BY THIS LIMITED WARRANTY Excluded from this limited warranty and not warranted by Olympus in any fashion, either express, implied, or by statute, are: (a) products and accessories not manufactured by Olympus and/or not bearing the “OLYMPUS” brand label (the warranty coverage for products and accessories of other manufacturers, which may be distributed by Olympus, is the responsibility of the manufacturers of such products and accessories in accordance with the terms and duration of such manufacturers’ warranties); (b) any Product which has been disassembled, repaired, tampered with, altered, changed, or modified by persons other than Olympus’s own authorized service personnel unless repair by others is made with the written consent of Olympus; (c) defects or damage to the Products resulting from wear, tear, misuse, abuse, negligence, sand, liquids, impact, improper storage, nonperformance of scheduled operator and maintenance items, battery leakage, use of non-“OLYMPUS” brand accessories, consumables, or supplies, or use of the Products in combination with non-compatible devices; (d) software programs; (e) supplies and consumables (including but not limited to lamps, ink, paper, film, prints, negatives, cables and batteries); and/or (f) Products which do not contain a validly placed and recorded Olympus serial number, unless they are a model on which Olympus does not place and record serial numbers. Representations and warranties made by any person, including but not limited to dealers, representatives, salespersons, or agents of Olympus, which are inconsistent or in conflict with or in addition to the terms of this limited warranty, shall not be binding upon Olympus unless reduced to writing and approved by an expressly authorized officer of Olympus. This limited warranty is the complete and exclusive statement of warranty which Olympus agrees to provide with respect to the Products and it shall supersede all prior and contemporaneous oral or written agreements, understandings, proposals, and communications pertaining to the subject matter hereof. This limited warranty is exclusively for the benefit of the original customer and cannot be transferred or assigned. WHAT TO DO WHEN SERVICE IS NEEDED The customer must transfer any image or other data saved on a Product to another image or data storage medium and/or remove any film from the Product prior to sending the Product to Olympus for service. IN NO EVENT SHALL OLYMPUS BE RESPONSIBLE FOR SAVING, KEEPING OR MAINTAINING ANY IMAGE OR DATA SAVED ON A PRODUCT RECEIVED BY IT FOR SERVICE, OR ON ANY FILM CONTAINED WITHIN A PRODUCT RECEIVED BY IT FOR SERVICE, NOR SHALL OLYMPUS BE RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY DAMAGES IN THE EVENT ANY IMAGE OR DATA IS LOST OR IMPAIRED WHILE SERVICE IS BEING PERFORMED (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR SPECIAL DAMAGES, LOSS OF PROFITS OR LOSS OF USE), WHETHER OR NOT OLYMPUS SHALL BE OR SHOULD BE AWARE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH POTENTIAL LOSS OR IMPAIRMENT. Package the Product carefully using ample padding material to prevent damage in transit and either deliver it to the Authorized Olympus Dealer that sold you the Product or ship it postage prepaid and insured to any of our Olympus Service Centers. When returning Products for service, your package should include the following: 1 Sales receipt showing date and place of purchase. 2 Copy of this limited warranty bearing the Product serial number corresponding to the serial number on the Product (unless it is a model on which Olympus does not place and record serial numbers). 3 A detailed description of the problem. 14 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS EXCEPT FOR THE LIMITED WARRANTY SET FORTH ABOVE, OLYMPUS MAKES NO AND DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER REPRESENTATIONS, GUARANTIES, CONDITIONS, AND WARRANTIES CONCERNING THE PRODUCTS, WHETHER DIRECT OR INDIRECT, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, OR ARISING UNDER ANY STATUTE, ORDINANCE, COMMERCIAL USAGE OR OTHERWISE, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION AS TO THE SUITABILITY, DURABILITY, DESIGN, OPERATION, OR CONDITION OF THE PRODUCTS (OR ANY PART THEREOF) OR THE MERCHANTABILITY OF THE PRODUCTS OR THEIR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OR RELATING TO THE INFRINGEMENT OF ANY PATENT, COPYRIGHT, OR OTHER PROPRIETARY RIGHT USED OR INCLUDED THEREIN. IF ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES APPLY AS A MATTER OF LAW, THEY ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE LENGTH OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY. SOME STATES MAY NOT RECOGNIZE A DISCLAIMER OR LIMITATION OF WARRANTIES AND/OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY SO THE ABOVE DISCLAIMERS AND EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY. THE CUSTOMER MAY ALSO HAVE DIFFERENT AND/OR ADDITIONAL RIGHTS AND REMEDIES THAT VARY FROM STATE TO STATE. THE CUSTOMER ACKNOWLEDGES AND AGREES THAT OLYMPUS SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY DAMAGES THAT THE CUSTOMER MAY INCUR FROM DELAYED SHIPMENT, PRODUCT FAILURE, PRODUCT DESIGN, SELECTION, OR PRODUCTION, IMAGE OR DATA LOSS OR IMPAIRMENT OR FROM ANY OTHER CAUSE, WHETHER LIABILITY IS ASSERTED IN CONTRACT, TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE AND STRICT PRODUCT LIABILITY) OR OTHERWISE. IN NO EVENT SHALL OLYMPUS BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR SPECIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND (INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION LOSS OF PROFITS OR LOSS OF USE), WHETHER OR NOT OLYMPUS SHALL BE OR SHOULD BE AWARE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH POTENTIAL LOSS OR DAMAGE. EN 157 4 Sample prints, negatives, digital prints (or files on disk) if available and related to the problem. When service is completed, the Product will be returned to you postage prepaid. WHERE TO SEND PRODUCT FOR SERVICE See “WORLDWIDE WARRANTY” for the nearest service center. INTERNATIONAL WARRANTY SERVICE International warranty service is available under this warranty. For customers in Europe 14 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 158 EN “CE” mark indicates that this product complies with the European requirements for safety, health, environment and customer protection. “CE” mark cameras are intended for sales in Europe. Hereby, Olympus Imaging Corp. and Olympus Europa SE & Co. KG declare that this E-M1 is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC. For details visit: http://olympuseuropa.com/ This symbol [crossed-out wheeled bin WEEE Annex IV] indicates separate collection of waste electrical and electronic equipment in the EU countries. Please do not throw the equipment into the domestic refuse. Please use the return and collection systems available in your country for the disposal of this product. This symbol [crossed-out wheeled bin Directive 2006/66/EC Annex II] indicates separate collection of waste batteries in the EU countries. Please do not throw the batteries into the domestic refuse. Please use the return and collection systems available in your country for the disposal of the waste batteries. Provisions of warranty 1 If this product proves to be defective, although it has been used properly (in accordance with the written Handling Care and Operating instructions supplied with it), during the applicable national warranty period and has been purchased from an authorized Olympus distributor within the business area of Olympus Europa SE & Co. KG as stipulated on the website: http://www.olympus.com this product will be repaired, or at Olympus’s option replaced, free of charge. To claim under this warranty the customer must take the product before the end of the applicable national warranty period to the dealer where the product was purchased or any other Olympus service station within the business area of Olympus Europa SE & Co. KG as stipulated on the website: http://www.olympus. com. During the one year period of the World Wide Guarantee the customer may turn the product in at any Olympus service station. Please notice that not in all countries such Olympus service station exists. 2 The customer shall transport the product to the dealer or Olympus authorized service station at his own risk and shall be responsible for any costs incurred in transporting the product. Provisions of Guarantee 1 “OLYMPUS IMAGING CORP.” grants a one year World Wide Guarantee. This worldwide Guarantee must be presented at an Olympus authorized repair service station before any repair can be made under conditions of this Guarantee. This Guarantee is valid only if the Guarantee Certificate and proof of purchase are presented at the Olympus repair service station. Please note that this Guarantee is in addition to and does not affect the customer’s legal warranty rights under the applicable national legislation governing the sale of consumer goods mentioned above. 2 This Guarantee does not cover the following and the customer will be required to pay repair charge, even for defects occurring within the Guarantee period referred to above. (a) Any defect that occurs due to mishandling (such as an operation performed that is not mentioned in the Handling Care or other sections of the instructions, etc.) (b) Any defect that occurs due to repair, modification, cleaning, etc. performed by anyone other than Olympus or an Olympus authorized service station. 3 4 Notes regarding Guarantee maintenance 1 2 This Guarantee will only be valid if the Guarantee Certificate is duly completed by Olympus or an authorized dealer or other documents contain sufficient proof. Therefore, please make sure that your name, the name of the dealer, the serial number and the year, month and date of purchase are all completed or the original invoice or the sales receipt (indicating the dealer’s name, the date of purchase and product type) is attached to this Guarantee Certificate. Olympus reserves the right to refuse free-of-charge service if neither Guarantee Certificate is completed nor the above document is attached or if the information contained in it is incomplete or illegible. Since this Guarantee Certificate will not be re-issued, keep it in a safe place. • Please refer to the list on the web site: http://www.olympus.com for the authorized international Olympus service network. For customers in Thailand This telecommunication equipment conforms to technical standard NTC TS 1012-2551. This telecommunication equipment conforms to NTC technical requirement. For customers in Mexico The operation of this equipment is subject to the following two conditions: (1) it is possible that this equipment or device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this equipment or device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation. For customer in Singapore 14 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS (c) Any defect or damage that occurs due to transport, a fall, shock, etc. after purchase of the product. (d) Any defect or damage that occurs due to fire, earthquake, flood damage, thunderbolt, other natural disasters, environmental pollution and irregular voltage sources. (e) Any defect that occurs due to careless or improper storage (such as keeping the product under conditions of high temperature and humidity, near insect repellents such as naphthalene or harmful drugs, etc.), improper maintenance, etc. (f) Any defect that occurs due to exhausted batteries, etc. (g) Any defect that occurs due to sand, mud, etc. entering the inside of the product casing. (h) When the Guarantee Certificate is not returned with the product. (i) When any alterations whatsoever are made to the Guarantee Certificate regarding the year, month and date of purchase, the customer’s name, the dealer’s name, and the serial number. (j) When proof of purchase is not presented with this Guarantee Certificate. This Guarantee applies to the product only; the Guarantee does not apply to any other accessory equipment, such as the case, strap, lens cap and batteries. Olympus’s sole liability under this Guarantee shall be limited to repairing or replacing the product. Any liability under the Guarantee for indirect or consequential loss or damage of any kind incurred or suffered by the customer due to a defect of the product, and in particular any loss or damage caused to any lenses, films, other equipment or accessories used with the product or for any loss resulting from a delay in repair or loss of data, is excluded. Compelling regulations by law remain unaffected by this. EN 159 Trademarks • Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. • Macintosh is a trademark of Apple Inc. • SDXC Logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC. • Eye-Fi is a trademark of Eye-Fi, Inc. • “Shadow Adjustment Technology” function contains patented technologies from Apical Limited. • Micro Four Thirds, Four Thirds, and the Micro Four Thirds and Four Thirds logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of the OLYMPUS IMAGING Corporation in Japan, the United States, the countries of the European Union, and other countries. • “PENPAL” is used in reference to the OLYMPUS PENPAL. • Wi-Fi is a registered trademark of the Wi-Fi Alliance. • The Wi-Fi CERTIFIED logo is a certification mark of the Wi-Fi Alliance. • The standards for camera file systems referred to in this manual are the “Design Rule for Camera File System/DCF” standards stipulated by the Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association (JEITA). • All other company and product names are registered trademarks and/or trademarks of their respective owners. 14 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 160 EN THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE AVC PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL AND NONCOMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE AVC STANDARD (“AVC VIDEO”) AND/OR (ii) DECODE AVC VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE AVC VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C. SEE HTTP://WWW. MPEGLA.COM The software in this camera may include third party software. Any third party software is subject to the terms and conditions, imposed by the owners or licensors of that software, under which software is provided to you. Those terms and other third party software notices, if any, may be found in the software notice PDF file stored within the accompanying CD-ROM or at http://www.olympus.co.jp/en/support/imsg/ digicamera/download/notice/notice.cfm Index Symbols A # RC Mode .......................................131 W (Language selection) .................88 c/# Menu Display .............................88 P Set Home .....................................90 I Face Priority .............................53, 91 j H fps..............................................91 j L fps ..............................................91 j + IS Off ..........................................91 G/Info Settings ..................................92 K Control Settings .............................92 # Slow Limit........................................94 # X-Sync. ...........................................94 w+F .................................................94 #+WB .................................................95 8 Warning Level .............................98 I/H (Underwater wide/underwater macro) ...........................................100 G (Index display) ...............................61 U (Close-up playback) .......................61 n (Movie mode) .................................42 n Mode ..............................................97 (Single-frame erase) .......................33 v (Picture selection) ..........................33 0 (Protecting).............................32, 64 P (AF Area)......................................52 W Keep Warm Color .........................95 R (Image rotation) .............................85 K Set ................................................95 8 (Beep sound) .................................93 R (Audio recording) .............................64 i (Monitor brightness adjustment)....88 m (Slideshow) ...................................65 t Lever Function..............................91 A (Aperture priority mode) ..................39 Address Book .................................... 110 AEL/AFL ........................................90, 98 AEL Metering .......................................94 AF Illuminat..........................................91 AF Mode ........................................73, 90 Album Mem. Usage ........................... 111 All > ...............................................95 Anti-Shock z .....................................94 ART (Art filter mode) ............................44 Art Fade ...............................................42 Art LV Mode .........................................93 Aspect..................................................69 B Backlit LCD ..........................................93 Bracketing............................................80 BULB ...................................................41 BULB/TIME Focusing ..........................90 BULB/TIME Monitor.............................94 BULB/TIME Timer................................94 Button Function ...................................91 C Card Setup ..........................................76 Color Space .........................................95 Connection to Smartphone ..................87 Copy All ............................................. 111 Copyright Settings ...............................96 D Date/time setting X.............................17 Dial Direction .......................................91 Dial Function........................................91 Digital Tele-converter ...................84, 100 Displayed Grid .....................................92 dpi Settings ..........................................96 E Edit Filename.......................................96 EN 161 Erase Selected ....................................33 EVF Adjust ......................................... 111 EV Step ...............................................93 Exposure Shift .....................................98 Eye-Fi ..................................................98 F File Name ............................................96 Firmware..............................................88 Flash intensity control w ....................71 Flicker reduction ..................................93 Focus Ring ..........................................90 Full-time AF .........................................90 H Half Way Rls With IS ...........................91 HDMI ...................................................92 HDR .....................................................59 Highlight&Shadow Control...................49 Histogram Settings ..............................92 I A (iAuto mode) ..................18, 22, 26 Image Aspect .......................................69 Image Overlay .....................................87 Image Stabilizer ...................................66 INFO button .............................37, 49, 60 ISO ................................................57, 94 ISO-Auto ..............................................94 ISO-Auto Set .......................................94 ISO Step ..............................................94 J JPEG Edit ............................................86 L Lens I.S. Priority ..................................92 Level Adjust .........................................98 Live BULB............................................94 Live Control .........................................30 Live Guide ...................................28, 100 Live TIME ............................................94 LIVE TIME ...........................................41 Live View Boost ...................................92 LV super control panel .......................103 162 EN M M (Manual shooting) ...........................41 Metering...............................................72 MF .....................................................100 MF Assist .......................................90, 99 Mode Dial Function..............................91 Mode Guide .........................................92 Movie R .........................................74, 97 Movie Play ...........................................63 Movie Tele-converter ...........................43 MTP ................................................... 118 Multi Echo ............................................42 Multi Function ..............................23, 100 Multiple Exposure a..........................82 My OLYMPUS PENPAL..................... 110 N Noise Filter ..........................................94 Noise Reduct. ......................................93 O OLYMPUS PENPAL Album ............... 111 OLYMPUS PENPAL Share ........ 109, 110 One Shot Echo ....................................42 P P (Program shooting) ..........................38 Peaking Settings..................................93 Picture Copy Size .............................. 111 Picture Mode .................................68, 78 Picture Mode Settings .........................92 Pixel Count ..........................................95 Pixel Mapping ....................................141 Print ................................................... 113 Print reservation < ........................... 112 Priority Set ...........................................96 Q Quick Erase .........................................96 R RAW Data Edit ....................................85 RAW+JPEG Erase ..............................96 Recording Volume ...............................97 Rec View .............................................88 Release Lag-Time ...............................92 Reset Lens ..........................................90 Reset/Myset.........................................77 Reset Protect ............................... 87, 111 Rls Priority C........................................91 Rls Priority S ........................................91 Rotate ..................................................64 S S (Shutter priority shooting) ................40 Shading Comp. ....................................95 Sleep .............................................16, 93 Storage .............................................. 118 Super Control Panel ............................24 T Time Lapse Settings ............................83 Touch Screen Settings.........................98 U USB Mode ...........................................93 V Video Out.............................................92 W WB .................................................56, 95 Wi-Fi Settings ......................................89 EN 163 Premises: Goods delivery: Letters: Consumer Product Division Wendenstrasse 14 – 18, 20097 Hamburg, Germany Tel.: +49 40 - 23 77 3-0 / Fax: +49 40 - 23 07 61 Modul H, Willi-Bleicher Str. 36, 52353 Düren, Germany Postfach 10 49 08, 20034 Hamburg, Germany European Technical Customer Support: Please visit our homepage http://www.olympus-europa.com or call our TOLL FREE NUMBER*: 00800 - 67 10 83 00 for Austria, Belgium, Czech Republic, Denmark, Finland, France, Germany, Luxemburg, Netherlands, Norway, Poland, Portugal, Russia, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, United Kingdom. * Please note some (mobile) phone services / provider do not permit access or request an additional prefix to +800 numbers. For all not listed European Countries and in case that you can’t get connected to the above mentioned number please make use of the following CHARGED NUMBERS: +49 40 - 237 73 899. Our Technical Customer Support is available from Monday to Thursday 9 am to 6 pm, Friday 9 am to 3:30 pm CET. Authorized Distributors United Kingdom: Olympus Service Department /Eire Olympus Imaging & Audio KeyMed House Stock Road Southend-on-Sea Essex SS2 5QH United Kingdom South Africa: Tudortech (Pty) Ltd. Ground floor, Building 1A, Wedgefield Office Park, 17 Muswell Road, Bryanston 219 South Africa Tel: +27 (0) 11 803 2226 Fax: +27 (0) 86 639 5359 Service - 0800 111 4888 Fax: +44 (0) 1702 452763 E-mail: [email protected] www.olympus.co.uk WC182501-
1
-
2
-
3
-
4
-
5
-
6
-
7
-
8
-
9
-
10
-
11
-
12
-
13
-
14
-
15
-
16
-
17
-
18
-
19
-
20
-
21
-
22
-
23
-
24
-
25
-
26
-
27
-
28
-
29
-
30
-
31
-
32
-
33
-
34
-
35
-
36
-
37
-
38
-
39
-
40
-
41
-
42
-
43
-
44
-
45
-
46
-
47
-
48
-
49
-
50
-
51
-
52
-
53
-
54
-
55
-
56
-
57
-
58
-
59
-
60
-
61
-
62
-
63
-
64
-
65
-
66
-
67
-
68
-
69
-
70
-
71
-
72
-
73
-
74
-
75
-
76
-
77
-
78
-
79
-
80
-
81
-
82
-
83
-
84
-
85
-
86
-
87
-
88
-
89
-
90
-
91
-
92
-
93
-
94
-
95
-
96
-
97
-
98
-
99
-
100
-
101
-
102
-
103
-
104
-
105
-
106
-
107
-
108
-
109
-
110
-
111
-
112
-
113
-
114
-
115
-
116
-
117
-
118
-
119
-
120
-
121
-
122
-
123
-
124
-
125
-
126
-
127
-
128
-
129
-
130
-
131
-
132
-
133
-
134
-
135
-
136
-
137
-
138
-
139
-
140
-
141
-
142
-
143
-
144
-
145
-
146
-
147
-
148
-
149
-
150
-
151
-
152
-
153
-
154
-
155
-
156
-
157
-
158
-
159
-
160
-
161
-
162
-
163
-
164
-
165
in andere talen
- English: Olympus OM-D E-M1 User manual
Gerelateerde artikelen
-
Olympus VoiSquare Handleiding
-
Olympus VN-5500 Handleiding
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Andere documenten
-
Sony α 7S III Gebruikershandleiding
-
-
Panasonic DMCLX100EB de handleiding
-
Ingo HEC-050N de handleiding
-
-
Ingo HEC-050N Gebruikershandleiding
-
-
Hama 00118564 de handleiding
-
Samsung Digimax 130 Handleiding
-
Sony HVL-F42AM de handleiding